Home

Welcome History

1. Rlagimmedciates Setup Macro button appearance Backcolor Mouseover Backcolor Button Caption Forecolor Mouseover Forecolor LOG OF Cancel Reset Backcolors Reset Cancel all settings Audio Split Frequency Operation Even though you do not have computer radio communication over a serial port the Sound Card Data Window can operate split frequency on transmit and receive by using different tones for each frequency This is only possible in PSK mode Audio split frequency operation is fully described in the Receiving PSK31 topic in the section called Inner Link Operating Split Frequency Using Different Audio Tones Sound Card Data WIndow Operating Split Frequency Using Different Audio Tones If you have computer control look at the section later in this topic called Inner Link Operating Split Frequency with Computer Control Sound Card Data WIndow Operating Split Frequency with Computer Control Using Logger32 With Computer Radio Communication You must configure computer radio communication through Logger32 as described in the topic Interfacing a Radio for PC Control Here are various functions that are enabled with radio computer communication Display of frequency from the radio q Frequency control of the radio using the align macro 1 Split frequency operation Display of Frequency from the Radio The Sound Card Data Window can display the radio frequency the actual transmitted frequency and
2. Text font sets the font parameters for all three tab panels Text backcolor sets the background color of all three tab panels Text color transmit sets the color to be used for transmitted text in all three panels Text color messages sets the color to be used for received text in all three panels Tab font sets the font color of all three tabs Front tab color sets the color of the tab of the currently viewed tab panel Back tab color sets the color of the tab of the other two hidden tab panels 2 Telnet You have connected to the NE7J Utah D Packet CLA Cluster Mode HAPPY HOLIDAYS de VWYCT and Worl For Internet Web Browser based access and USER MANUAL information point wi ctir cam kblzg de ncj 14 Jan 2002 00154 clx gt VHF PANEL The VHF panel is selected by the VHF tab and provides a connection to a serial port and is intended to use a TNC to receive packet radio spots from a VHF packet cluster station It can also be used to connect to another computer serial to serial to receive spots from a second packet cluster station contact Hal KB1ZQ for more information Right clicking on the VHF panel displays a pop up menu allowing the operator to both configure and operate the VHF This menu is divided into five sections Sections 1 2 3 and 5 display a fixed set of menu items Section 4 displays up to packet cluster shortcuts that are manually entered by the user using the Cluster shortcuts
3. Determine which piece of a portable callsign is the Portable piece Is KIOK VP2M in the US or Monserrat The rule applied the shortest piece KIOK or VP2M or if they are the same length the first part following ITU convention is the correct designator In the KIOK VP2M the callsign is internally changed to VP2M KIOK A station using the callsign N6BFM 9K2 defaults internally to 9K2 N6BFM e The next step is to identify the Country Prefix First make all portable callsigns with a number only following the reflect their correct location i e N6BFM 4 N4BFM W8CNL 4 W4CNL Now loop reducing the length of the callsign by one letter at a time to find an Alias that matches i e N6BFM N6BF N6B N Nis an Alias for W the USA In the example above of SV8ASP A the first pass of the loop would identify SV8ASP A as Alias for SY Mt Athos In the case of the KIOK VP2M internally converted to VP2M KIOK the following occurs in the loop VP2M KIOK VP2M KI0 VP2M VP2M where a match with Monserrat is identified The information regarding the matched Alias is correlated to the Country prefix e The last step is to find out if there is any Offset information on the Country and determine the exact Offset Check if the callsign is in the Offset Database N6BFM does not sign as portable 4 so you could if you choose put N6BFM the Offset database under W for the USA with the details of Zone and Latitude and Longitude of Atlanta If
4. Auldlo Input pin of your transmitters MIC Plug through the 100 1 voltage divider Again it is extremely important to match your sound input and output levels To set the output level we bring up the Windows Volume control just like we did with the Recording Control panel before only this time we select ToolBox then Sound card output level This brings up the Volume Control mixer Ee Volume Control Of x Options Help Volume Control Wave Microphone Line Iri CO Audio MICI Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Mute all Mute W Mute E Advanced ESS AudioD rive 1 Set Transmit Level Mute Mute z th These audio output adjustments are best made with your transceiver connected to a dummy load Set your transceiver mic gain control slightly above its minimum setting and make sure your rig s VU meter or modulation indicator is set to monitor ALC rigs do not have such a meter and use only a light Your VOX settings if you re using VOX should be adjusted as you normally have it for your other modes and it should be engaged If you re not yet using VOX or PTT more info on that in Configuring to Talk you can make these adjustments by manually engaging transmit on the rig at the same time that you tell Logger32 to transmit Prepare to Adjust the PC Again make Logger82 active in one window and the Volume Control mixer in a second window as you did fo
5. Logger32 will accept a maximum of 100 element sets DX Spots Panel This window is not coded yet Soundcard Data Window Jim Hargrave W5IFP In Logger32 it is the Sound Card Data Window that provides the functionality previously found in the Zakanaka application written by Bob Furzer K4CY The Sound Card Data Window is the interface that provides PSK31 and RTTY capabilities through an interface to the computer sound card and a radio connected to Logger82 through a serial Com port Logger32 is an extremely efficient way of operating PSK31 and RTTY The RTTY capability in Logger32 incorporates the RI TY engine of MMTTY written by Makoto Mori JESHHT This RTTY engine supports a number of baud rates shift widths and mark space selections The Sound Card Data Window provides the capability for One click entry of callsigns for use in logging and in macros Presentation of frequency information in the Sound Card Data Window requires a radio that communicates with Logger82 over the serial port and Automatic entry of data from the Rx screen to Logger32 There are several ways of using Logger32 and the Sound Card Data Window The choice will determine what features are available Communication may be set up between the radio and the computer This lets Logger32 control the radio display the radio frequency and do a number of special functions 1 The Sound Card Data Window has the capability to operate in both PSK31
6. e The Table of Contents can be found under the Contents tab at the top of the page use the Table of Contents to navigate a topic e The Index and Find tabs of the Help window will allow you to search for specific topics or individual words within the Help files There is a section of Tips Tricks and Troubleshooting hints that may save you time in solving problems for example Everything stopped working ls Logger32 on top of an error message Links and Reflectors Hew Lines VA3HU LINKS The following links to the internet may provide you with more specific or additional detail on topics related to Logger32 www hosenose com adif The current version and details on the Amateur Data Interchange Format used to exchange between various logging programs www arz com www golist net For information on USB to Serial Port adaptors try www aadau com usb Until QSL Label printing functionality is implemented in Logger32 try the BV software for QSL management label printing and more Check it out at DF3CB s site www df3cb com bv index html Try the following link to NG3K s large list of DX Clusters available through the Telnet Window www cpcug org user wfeidt Misc cluster html In addition to the Telnet site pre defined in the Satellite Tracking Window another source for Keplerian elements can be found at www amsat org amsat keps menu html A site that has lots of good information on time zones a
7. CONTROL_CR CONTROL_CS CONTROL_CT CONTROL_CX CONTROL_CW An example AMTOR macros is CONTROL_CT Hello call name from mike de mycall You are 599 30 serialnum CONTROL_CE Returns to standby after transmit buffer is sent also puts If linked Inverts MARK SPACE Immediately returns to receive mode regardless of TX buffer Selects the next MARK SPACE shift hz Enters transmit mode Returns to command mode Sends the Who Are You inquiry Enter transmit mode Send his call name and mycall Send report zone and serial number Return to standby ASCII MODE The ASCII mode selection macro is CONTROL CX for command mode echo on to see your transmitted text and ascii to set 110 baud ASCII default The following KAM AMTOR instructions can be used in Logger32 CONTROL_CE CONTROL_CI CONTROL_CR CONTROL_CS CONTROL _CT CONTROL_CX CONTROL Cn An example ASCII macro is CONTROL_CT call de mycall CONTROL_CE Returns to standby after transmit buffer is sent also puts If linked Inverts MARK SPACE Immediately returns to receive mode regardless of TX buffer Selects the next MARK SPACE shift hz Enters transmit mode Returns to command mode n baud speed as per manual 0 9 Enter transmit mode Send his call and my call Return to standby To change baud rates use the following instruction CONTROL Cn Where n speed baud 1 45 2 50 35 7 4 75 5 100 6 110
8. Parallel Port DB 25 pin Female Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Strobe 10 Acknowl 2 Data 0 11 Busy 3 Data 1 12 Paper Empty 4 Data 2 13 Select 5 Doto 3 14 Auto Feed 6 Data 4 15 Error 7 Doto 5 16 initialize B Doto 6 17 Select In g Doto 7 18 25 GND Greenwhich Mean Time A Windows standard time zone that corresponds to UTC and ZULU times Grid Squares Grid Squares are used as an indication of a location based on the Maidenhead system of identifying a location within a square on the earths surface based on Latitude and Longitude and identified by six characters two letters two digits another two letters The first two letters Identify a 20 degree by 10 degree field followed by two digits designating a 2 degree by 1 degree square within that field The last two characters are normally not used This location methodology is used in almost all VHF contacts and contests Hot Keys Keys that the may be assigned to programmable buttons to be used to execute that buttons functionality Islands on the Air Award An award issued by the Radio Society of Great Britain in recognition of confirmed contacts with the required number of islands countries since 1 Dec 1964 Contact the RSGB for further details Keplerian Elements A set of six orbital element numbers used to define and compute satellite orbital motions Complete details can be found the ARRL Handbook One source of this data is www celestrak com NORAD elements amateur t
9. System Time Adjustment If you decide to use a time stamp some contests even require this then you may want to be sure that your computer system is correct See the section describing the Atomic Clock Computer Tuneup Jan Ditzian KX2A During the development of Zakanaka the predecessor of the Logger32 Sound Card window some users reported complaints like Letters appear slowly on the display The mouse cursor moves slowly or jerkily The mouse cursor disappears q1 The display freezes The program freezes and must be removed with ctrl alt del The whole machine freezes and must be rebooted The underlying problem may be that the computer is overloaded There are a number of ways in which this can occur There is too much for the CPU to do in real time There is a need for more computer memory RAM than is available There is more for the display processing subsystem to do than it can handle When the MMTTY engine detects a shortage of CPU resources the CPU LED at the lower right turns red for a few seconds Reducing CPU Usage The most likely cause of problems is that your CPU cannot keep up with all the activity you are asking it to do Actually you need not shoulder all the blame Bob Furzer and Makoto Mori helped to load down your computer when you run RTTY the people at company that installed your operating system and associated software may have sneaked a CPU load onto the computer these the folks from whom
10. There are separate controls to adjust the sensitivity of the waterfall and spectrum displays The waterfall gets brighter with increasing signal strength and the spectrum display gets higher Go to Settings and choose Waterfall Sensitivity or Spectrum Sensitivity Individual Tuning windows There are three such windows q Main Rx Tx Tuning window q Aux 1 Rx Tuning window Aux 2 Rx Tuning window Each Tuning window includes the following tools 1 Phase scope mini vectorscope aids in finding and tuning PSK31 signals 2 Frequency histogram graphical display 250Hz wide centered on the main passband frequency 3 Receive quality meter the higher the reading the better quality reliable the signal is being received 4 IMD display window indication of distortion unwanted harmonics 5 Squelch adjustment bar to tell the program at what squelch setting to start displaying received signals 6 Passband indicators red blue or green bar that is fixed 31Hz wide Adjusting Squelch Signal clarity is shown by the height of the yellow squelch bar The more letters Logger32 decodes successfully the higher the yellow bar When there is a lot of noise and Logger32 is unsure of whether letters have been sent the yellow bar drops The higher the bar the more correct text will be sent You can set Logger32 not to display when the bar drops below a certain level This gives you cleaner copy but you may miss some information in the noise
11. 2 2 2 2 TEILE a T T Microsoft Standard Name Countries Effected For Win98 983SE Suggest CEOE CEO CEO HR TG TI TIS Central America Standard Time VO YN YS Canada Central Standard Time Central Asia Central Time rr a Moth Asia Standard Time Malay Peninsular Standard Time Shia Sib Sw OL YB Taipel Standard Time North Asia East Standard Time WT 0 agin Standard Time Tonga Standard Time 302 A3 T31 Ta 4L Samoa Standard time Table 2 As a much better alternative one can edit and or add to the actual time zone list within the operating system using TZEdit The Zone Editor is part of the Windows 98 Resource Kit Windows NT 4 0 Resource Kit and Windows 2000 Resource Kit Find the directory tools reskit config on your Windows installation CD and run Tzedit exe If you use this method then it is imperative the Microsoft standard name is used exactly as shown above in Table 1 for it is this which Logger uses and it MUST match exactly If you make a mistake in typing the time zone name abbreviation it will not work correctly with Logger32 An example is given below for Greenland s time zone Edit Time one E MT 3 00 Greenland ergo e On Aaa alan Caen Mea aan cuca Sal 3 0 02 00 00 o a october M 02 00 00 G NOTE In Win 98 it is not possible to generate a time zone of 13 hours for Tonga However a very close approximation can be achieved but using a GMT offset of 12 59 Remember als
12. Select a file or create one to receive the saved text 4 When saving is completed go to File 5 Select Close receive text file There is no indication that the text is being saved to file except as viewed in the File drop down menu The user should turn the Open receive text file off when the desired copy is complete by selecting Close receive text file If this is not done the Main Receive Window will continue to save your text Evaluating the Other Guy s Signal The presence of extra lines around someone s signal is a sign that he may be overmodulating However this is not a guarantee the other station is distorting since a strong signal can cause very similar distortion to take place in your receiver even from a signal This is receiver overload The surest way to determine whether the other station is or is not clean is to use the IMD indication in the fourth pane from the left in the Statusbar also shown at the bottom left of the Rx Tuning window It will turn green about 23 dB of intermodulation distortion IMD but there is little noticeable distortion at 20 dB If you see a strong signal that is generating extra bars on the display but whose IMD is good then the distortion is in your You use your crystal filters and passband tuning to reduce the strength of the station by moving him out of the receiver s Logger32 s built in DSP does a good job of copying through such distortion products and if the strong station is the one you want
13. Sets the radio to CW mode Turns the RIT on Sets the filter to 50 Hz Now follow or precede this sequence with a receive command and you have the receive in CW mode command The developer of this macro script calls it RXCW Transmit in USB mode RTN USB command MD2 RT0 FW0030 1S 3400 This command script does the following four actions Sets radio to USB Sets RIT off Sets Bandpass filter lower to 300 Hz Sets Bandpass filter upper to 3400 Hz Of course you can select other modes and filters if you want Just use these scripts but change the commands Direct Control of Yaesu Radios This detailed information is for the Yaesu FT 990 and the FT 1000MP however the fundamentals described may give an to those owning other equipment on how to construct macros in Logger32 to control their rigs Some of the suggestions will work with all Yaesu equipment having remote control interfaces However because of slight changes between models command sequences may be slightly different The reader should consult his her radio s instruction manual to understand the capabilities of these rigs and to experiment to achieve his her own desired results Direct Control of Yaesu Transceivers Logger32 has two macros for the direct control of transceivers using the remote interface one macro for those rigs which require a string command and the other for hex commands The format of the macro is command for strings and hexcommana
14. The three Tuning windows Main Tx Rx and two Auxiliary consist of five sections The Title bar The Phase Scope The Frequency Histogram The Receive Quality Meter The IMD Display window The Main Menu The Sound Card Data Window Main Menu Bar provides access to the following functionality File Send a text tile Open receive text file Close receive text file Exit Settings Squelch response Squelch slow Squelch fast Display smoothing PSK Fast display no smoothing PSK Medium display little smoothing PSK Slow display heavy smoothing RT TY Fast display no smoothing RTTY Medium display little smoothing RTTY Slow display heavy smoothing Spectrum pen width Spectrum pen width 1 Spectrum pen width 2 CW ID Speed 37 WPM 19 WPM 12 WPM 9 WPM Typing preference PSK Send as typed PSK Send all CAPS PSK Send all lower case RTTY Send word out Line wrap on Use slash for zero Long tx tail Overload warning RT TY watchdog timer Transmit buffer indicator Receive window mouseover Radio PTT options Spectrum display width Waterfall sensitivity Spectrum sensitivity Preset Radio frequencies Preset Audio frequencies Audio frequency markers RT TY Watchdog timer delay ToolBox Rx window font Rx window Tx text color Rx windowcontrol codes color Rx window normal background Rx window paused background Rx window mouseover highlight Tx window font Tx window background T
15. You can leave this entry blank BUT without a Time Zone here Logger32 will NOT be able to determine the Local time for that prefix When satisfied that all is correct click on the Add button NOTE If you are entering a country name that will include the amp character you must enter the character twice in order for it to display correctly For example the country name for the prefix V2 must be Antigua amp amp Barbuda Delete a Prefix Deleting a prefix can be achieved in two different ways First select the row containing the entry you wish delete then Ifyou simply wish to REMOVE the data from the database then click on the Delete button Logger will check with you that this is what you really want to do If you wish to just mark the country as having been deleted but to keep the information place a check mark in the box alongside the word Deleted and then click Modify This second will produce a grey background in the Country Database maintenance window for that prefix VK9 G and VK9 P above Modify a Prefix To modify a prefix select the row containing the entry you wish to modify then make the changes in the appropriate edit box s and click the Modify button Alternative Prefixes dbE dit Canada Ontario X w C E Pe e eae A F E Canada Nowa Scotia WL Atlantic Stan E Canada Quebec 2 Eastern Stan Canada Ontario y Eastern Stan Canada Manitoba iG Central Stari Canada Sask
16. and the Settings group ends with a statement about AFC then add the above statement on the line after AFC as the last line of Settings Be sure to keep a blank line before the next group of settings Run Only Logger32 Try exiting all other programs and run only Logger32 and see if it runs properly If this is the case there is a reasonable possibility that you do not have sufficient memory RAM in your computer system to run Logger32 along with the other programs that you to run However it could mean that your CPU is too slow 64 mBytes of memory should be able to handle Logger32 in RTTY mode plus a few other programs running under Windows 98 Remove Programs By Using MSConfig Many computers that come with Windows have additional programs also loaded In fact Windows does this without being explicit about it You may find a task scheduling program virus checker power management sound card controls fax receive software modem sharing software internet hacker protection software a screen saver and so forth all running without anyone telling you about them Many of these programs make themselves known at the lower right on the taskbar Clean out your computer In Windows 98 it is possible to stop most programs other than the ones you want to run In Windows 98 Click Start Programs System Tools MSConfig exe to run MSConfig If it is not there use Windows Find and click MSConfig exe it to run it when you find it 1 When M
17. but the amount of computation doubles at each extra signal delay and for PSK31 which is used for live QSOs the delay would be too long More Facts to Consider About QPSK The relationship between BPSK and QPSK is that both have the same bandwidth but that QPSK uses that bandwidth for two signals shifted from each other by 90 degrees The extra signal is used to transmit redundant information for error correction reduces the signal to noise ratio for QPSK by 3 dB in comparison to BPSK The expectation is that the error correction will more than make up for this difference The results are not in and one goal of current PSK31 activity is to evaluate and compare BPSK QPSK to determine the situations in which each method is superior According to Peter BPSK should be superior under conditions of ordinary noise white noise or random noise but that under conditions of fading or real life interference as contrasted with random white noise QPSK may be superior More evaluation is needed For a good introduction see NB6Z s excellent discussion of QPSK at http www teleport com nb6z psk31 htm Peter Martinez has granted Logger32 permission to use his above description Screen Control Operation Randy Tipton WA5UFH and Jim Hargrave W5IFP This topic discusses the way that Logger82 presents information on the screen If you re competent with the manipulation of windows you might skip this topic Each user is encouraged to experiment with d
18. button to produce the window below Degrees to Gidsquares x oy Enter as a decimal 5 gi Enter the Latitude and Longitude and select the appropriate North South and East West buttons then click on Calculate The Square identifier will appear in the pane on the bottom right Note that the latitude and longitude should be entered as a positive decimal number As an alternative a right click on either of two entry panes will allow for the Lat Long entry in degrees minutes and seconds Callsign lookup Geoff Anderson G3NPA From CDROM Using the menu item Setup CDROM select the CDROM being used Be CO Rom Auto lookup i None W RAC l orz Hamcall If you wish an automated lookup from the CDROM then also check the item Setup Auto lookup Auto CD ROM Lookup Pe Auto lookup Frequency Antenna F Auto www qrz com lookup Auto CD ROM lookup i Adta oleh aku If you have the automatic lookup selected a dialog box will be automatically populated with information after entering a callsign in the Logbook Entry Window and pressing the TAB key or moving the cursor to another field with the mouse The display will be similar to that shown below Name Gw Anderson E TA AS Address 4E Bearcrolt See es _ Weobley F Hereford HR4 BTA County Great Britain AA REESE aid ot ees SS Old call Se ze eMail ee i 2 Bees a Ss e S TA EEN S el G3NPA se eee If you are using the manual mode of lookup after
19. menu item of section 5 If no cluster shortcuts are defined there will be no menu items displayed in section 4 Section one Hold off receive text This is a toggled menu item When checked the display of received text stops When cleared the display received text starts Section two Port setup This menu item displays a pop up dialog box allowing the user to set the serial port parameters Cluster Port Com port pE Databits e H StopBits o x Parity None B audras 00 Apply Cancel Open Close port This is a toggled menu item that allows the user to open or close the serial port configured for the panel The text of the menu item changes with the state of the port If the port is currently closed the text will display Open port If the port is open the text will display Close port Section three Clear text Clears all text from the VHF panel Paste text Pastes any text in the Windows clipboard into the VHF panel at the current cursor position Section four Show DX In this example the menu item has been adapted by the user using the Cluster shortcuts menu item to display the last ten DX spots received Section five Cluster shortcuts This menu item displays yet another dialog box that permits the user to enter up to ten packet cluster commands Each entry consists of plain text in the left column that will be displayed as the menu item of Section four and in the righ
20. na 67 Contact 219 QSL wie aWDSFCA RST 599 NAME Right click on the name and the following window will appear Select name then left click This is a fixed field ay Sound Card Data RaVindow menu hidden File Sel ATH Jim Ger ii Mame Jim Callsign JIM ASL via Jim Grid square JIM QTH Right click on the QTH and select QTH then left click This is a fixed field TE Sound Card Data RexVWindow menu hidden File Settings ToolBe de WSifp Jim ATH Bulverde moro Mame Bulverde Callsign BULVERDE QSL Via Bulverde Grid square BULVERDE STATE Right click on the state and select U S State then left click This field requires user setup with the ADIF definition of STATE RE Vindow menu hidden File Settings Tool de vite Jim Bulverde 1 pee i Mame Tx LIS State Tx ASL Via TR Grid square Ta GRID SQUARE Right click on the Grid Square and select Grid Square then left click This field requires user setup with the ADIF definition of GRID SQUARE ME Sound Card Data RxWindow menu hidden File Settings ToolBox View Mo e QTH Emogss Mame EmuUgss Callsign EMogss QSL Via EMO9ss Grid square EMOSSS dew Sifp Jim Bulverde TA Grid Your RST signal report Right click on the numeric signal report select RST then left click This is a fixed field TE Sound Card Data Ravindow menu hidden File Settings Toolbox View Mode Di jde W5ifp Ji
21. second harmonics which might be generated in your transmitter If you ve been paying close attention you may have noticed the SPACE audio frequency is higher than the MARK audio just the opposite of the RF frequency you actually transmit This happens because you re using lower sideband If you happen to forget and set your transmitter to USB instead of LSB two things will happen Because your MARK and SPACE are now in your receiver any RTTY signals you hear will not print correctly All you will see is random characters that make no sense at The other thing is that YOUR transmissions will also be nonsense to the other guy Just remember always use LSB In the real world of course sometimes USB gets selected accidentally This is why MMTTY has a button marked REV When you have a station tuned correctly but all you see is nonsense printing click on REV and your transceiver will be reversed Now you can print the other fellow and tell him he is upside down as it s commonly called After he reverses himself just click REV again and you will both be back to normal Note By default when using AFSK REV reverses both your receiver and transmitter If you want REV to reverse only your receiver go to Option Setup MMTTY click the TX tab and click Disable REV When using FSK REV reverses only your If you want to reverse your transmitter and receiver with FSK your transceiver should have a way of doing that See your manual Also you should kn
22. the main title will be highlighted in the listing In the case below the highlighting is in yellow with a red script but this is user definable The red and light yellow highlights show island groups confirmed and worked again these highlight colors are user definable EU 130 Need x OTA 7 Pix Island group Lat Long EU 1 29 DLISP1 Usedom Uznam Island 54 0167 14 041 ii ae ELI 1 31 3 Veneto Region group 45 2167 12 608 C 5M SzczecinKoszalin Province group 541500 EU 133 R14 Gulf of Finland group 60 0417 25 425 EU 134 EAZ BilbaoSan Sebastian Basque Province 43 4000 2 4 50 EU 135 SM2 Vasterbotten County group B4 2355 20 458 Fl 1 447 hit kane Counts ar oer 47 Agir 15 444 EU U48 Belle lle Anfora N4 126 Bellechasse Are Storta EU 130 Belli Banco d Oro OC 12 Bellona Belli EU 1l4 Belogquzikha Gorgo AS 083 Bel Grado Having highlighted an IOTA reference you can now click on the Show button to produce a map with the nominal center of island group marked as shown below In the picture below the island group is denoted by a small yellow square just at the northern end of Italy IOTA EU 130 Once this map is displayed you can select any island group from the table above and the island marker will move to the appropriate location The map size can be changed to suit by using the normal operating system facilities for resizing a window By right clicking on the map itself you can get at the menus for customizing
23. ty F CONT ty F CONTEST_ID wa M COZ tr F DOK Date Time On Time Off Freq Band WSLS LISL A Sent Recd Mode Submode Name Address Age AAAL Sect Cnty Comment Contest Cont ID COZ DOF OF Cancel Ha lot Hal Tuz cia IEC Cia JEG Cia E NOTES Cia E OPERATOR cake FFs Ci 4 PROP_MODE aA GSLMSG cia GSLADATE ca OSLSDATE iM GSl_viA CaA OTH Ha R PWR cia SAT_MODE Eia SAT_NAME ca E SRX CW E STATE Ca ST cae TEN_TEN Ca Tx POWER Yy F VE_PROY IOTA ITUZ JEC JEG NOTES OPERATOR PF PROP_MOD SLMS SLADATE QSLaDATE QSL VIA OTH Ra PW SAT_MODE SAT_NAME SAA STATE STA TEN_TEN TPOWER WE_PROY The columns shown above are from left to right move field indicator yellow box display field checkbox white box with check mark ADIF Field Name Grid Column Header Text Justification indicator lt gt This is a complete list of all the fields you can display in the LogBook Page Window with half of the fields on the left and the other half on the right To display a field click on the white box to the left of the ADIF field name In this example all the fields are checked and are displayed in the LogBook Page window The first text column shows the ADIF field name In the example above the text in Blue QSO_DATE is an ADIF field name it not be changed When importing and exporting data these field names allow Logger to identify parts of your data For more information on the
24. v 1 10 or Later VBIS5032 DLL L32 Dir v 50 32 3 3 WINLO DLL L32 Dir v N A File Created 3 17 2001 WINLO SYS L32 Dir v N A File Created 7 4 2000 VERIFY THESE ARE STILL AN ISSUE TOOLLTIPS 1 Tooltips on Tabs in the Telnet Cluster window do not function under Windows XP Loading ADIF file with PSK as mode So BobF how do you will you overcome this as there will be lots of folk hopefully who will want to do as did and their logs from 16 into 32 Knowing of the problem I ve cheated and edited my somewhat small file but this will be an onerous task for some Will the refresh take care of this Charlie can you make a note please for the hint and tips that a forced refresh after an ADIF load might well be required Bob manages to do this automatically then we can drop the note from the list but for now it might be as well to keep a reminder SETTING UP A SECOND LOGGER INI FILE Geoff Anderson G3NPA Logger32 has the ability to use the default Logger32 INI file or to select custom configurations An example of this might be a preferred standard layout for day to day use and to have a different arrangement for contesting or possibly a second operator The command line for Logger is C path Logger32 Exe Filenamel ini Where filename INI is the name of the ini file to load The INI extension is optional The INI file will always be placed in the application s directory Note that filename ini is optional an
25. 1 Load Keplerian elements and 4 Set the colour and width of the satellite terminator Before the display of any data in the Tracking Window will be correct for your location you MUST ensure that your own latitude longitude have been entered into Logger82 as detailed in the Initial Setup To load new Keplearian elements 1 Right click on the map and select Load Keplerian elements from the menu Load Keplerian elements http Awww celestrak com NO AAD elements amateur txt Download fromintemet ss Savedata Loadhomfle 2 You are now given the option to load elements from the web or from a file you may already have on your computer Note that the files MUST have the extension of TXT 3 If you download from the Internet you can change the default location and file before clicking on Download from The file contents will appear in the central part of the Load Keplerian elements window 4 If you wish to load a file from the computer click on Load from file and you will be presented with the standard Open window in your operating system Make your selection and click the Open button The file contents will appear in the central part of the Load Keplerian elements window 5 Click Save data and you will be advised on how many satellite elements have been loaded and you will be given the choice to save these to memory Select Yes This data will now be held in a file called KEPS TXT in the default directory
26. ADIF format please refer to the Appendix Amateur Data Interchange Format Refer to the bottom of this page for a list of all the fields you have available along with the type of data expected in each field and to see what fields Logger32 automatically fill in for you The next text column shows the Grid Column Header This is the heading at the top of each column in your LogBook Page In example above the text in purple Date is a Grid Column Header This text can be changed In the example above the column header will be displayed as Date rather then the longer QSO_DATE Other examples include Time On and Time Off which were also changed from their ADIF counterpart Please keep in mind while you can change a column header to anything you like it should represent the data Logger82 is expecting there For example you could change the QSLMSG column header to ABC and you could enter ID Numbers for contacts you make with the ABC Club BUT when you export your logs that field will be QSLMSG and other programs reading that label will expect to find a QSL Message in that field If you have a special need for a unique data field it is suggested you use the Notes or comments field If you refer to the first example at the top of this page will see how customizing the Grid Column Headers can look NOTE Even though you are able to change the names of the column headers the correct ADIF field will be used during any export function The last colu
27. Auxiliary Tuning windows 1 File Closes the Aux window 1 ToolBox Fonts and Background 1 View Shows Tuning window 1 Mode BPSK QPSK QPSK inverted 1 Clear Clears Aux Channel Window of received text To close the Aux Channel click on the X in the upper right corner of the Aux Channel task bar or use lt ALT gt F4 with the focus on window you wish to close Operating Split Frequency There are times when you want to establish separate transmit and receive frequencies operate split There are several ways to this q If you are using AFSK for PSK31 use a different audio frequency for transmit and receive This works as long as you want to split the frequencies within the available range of audio frequencies Ifyou have computer control of your radio use the Split Simplex pane or the QSX macro to change the transmit and frequency automatically each time you switch between transmit and receive Operate without any special features and use two VFOs one on receive and another on transmit and set the transmit frequency manually at the radio Operating Split with a Computer Controlled Radio This is the simplest way to operate split but you must have communication between the radio and the computer Operating Split Frequency Using Different Audio Tones Logger32 can work split frequency within its receive range about 3000 Hz without relying on computer radio communication simply by sending a tone that is different from the one be
28. BPSK 1500 0 Hef 14071 112KH2 f 23d8 Simplex Receive NetOtt AFC OF Reset Abot CPU PTT Note Logger32 may or may not reflect a change in frequency that you set using your RIT or clarifier control on the radio You should check this so you know how it works Turn the RIT or clarifier and see if the frequency pane shows a change IMD The fourth pane shows the IMD reading When the received station is idling transmitting but not sending text this area displays IMD intermodulation distortion of the received signal The IMD is due to interaction between the two transmitted tones one tone shifted by 180 degrees This number also appears below the round phase indicator on the Rx Tx Tuning window A negative number is displayed indicating the number of dB below the peak signal amplitude is the amplitude of the strongest distortion products fa Cg 14070 e ie ne ee eee eee e eS ee ee ee ee ees Se ee eee Pee eee ee ee eee a E eles eke roe e seers Pein naman res BPSK 1500 0Hz 14071 112KHz 2348 Simplex Receive NetOf AFCOM Reset Abot cru PTT Simplex Split The fifth pane shows Simplex or Split operation When you have computer radio communication using a serial port Logger32 can operate split frequency by changing the frequency of the radio as it goes between receive and transmit This pane tells you if you are in simplex or split mode and allows you to set the direction and amount of transmit split fr
29. Files both of which are accessed from the toolbar Ea Logger 2 Fie Tools View Awards CW Setup Help 4 Ff Eel eadk gE Zip Logbook zip user Files 1 ZIP Logbook This option will compress your logbook files into the popular PKZip format Only one logbook can be backed at a time If you have several logbooks you will need to perform this backup once per logbook Clicking on it s icon will bring up following menu i 3 Logbook backup utility x Backup this Logbook CAHAM RADIOSLOGGERSASTEST LOG Browse into this Zip file CAHAM FADIOSLOGGERSASTEST LOG 2IP Browse Start Exit Verity In the first line select the logbook you wish to backup In the second line provide the path and name of the ZIP file you wish to create NOTE If you select the A drive Logger32 will automatically sopan multiple floppy disks if necessary Press Start to begin the backup Exit to leave this window without backing up the logbook Verify to check if the archive was created error free and Abort to abort a backup in progress The very bottom of the window will show the status of the backup and any instructions necessary 2 ZIP User Files This option will compress your User Files into the popular PKZip format The User Files includes all non logbook files that you may have modified while using Logger32 Examples include all ini files containing your prefered setup country databases and support files IOTA databas
30. G3NPA Freq 14 0700 Mode PSK31 Band 20M calle EDTA Cant England Reyd Sunse 07 57 Sunset 16 10 Mame 118 290 at Deh mnt Note that now the country name sunrise and sunset times short and long path beam headings and the short path distance are calculated and displayed If it should happen that you have more entry panes visible then some or none of this latter may not be visible here However the same information is displayed on the upper of the two Status Bars at the bottom of the window so the information is still available Continuing with the callsign entry once you have typed sufficient AND there are matching callsigns already in your log Logger32 will attempt to prompt you for the callsign known as Callsign Preview If the one you require is in the list presented then a click the particular callsign will place it in the Callsign area of the entry window If not just continue to type in the remaining letters See example below aj Logbook Entry G3NPA Mode PSK31 Band 20M gland 57 Sunset 16 1 298 at FMI If you do not see this type of presentation then right click on the Log Input window place the cursor on Setup and check Show callsign preview NOTE It is preferred for Logger to enter a callsign in the format Callsign Prefix modifier For example W4xxx 1 a W4 portable in area 1 or G8xxx FR T A G prefix operating on Tromelin Island Logger32 will operate with a number of different callsign formats
31. ISD ISF ISL and ISM These files must ALWAYS be treated as set of four e The Offset database contains offset information for Countries having a large landmass that could span several Zones For example in the case of the USA an offset is provided for each of the call districts This ensures that the Zone is 3 if Callsign is a W6 and the Zone is 5 fora W4 Also Latitude and Longitudes of the approximate center of each Offset are maintained to ensure the calculated beam headings will be more accurate In the Offset Database the Offset Prefix i e W1 W2 VE1 VE2 VK6 VK7 etc must be unique This information is contained in the four files OFFSET ISD ISF ISL and ISM These files must ALWAYS be treated set of four The ARRL Prefix links the three databases This unique identifier is the key to getting anywhere in any of the three databases A Help Topic Calculating a Country from a Callsign is provided to further explain the process followed by Logger32 in country from a callsign This may seem overly complicated to some however if you anticipate doing major changes to the Alias and Offset databases you must know what you are doing If you make modifications to the database and the results are as expected you should review this section The County Database The program maintains three separate but linked databases and it is used to check the validity of the entered county name the US state The County database conta
32. Radio Radio Port configuration menu item to display the RigControl Setup dialog box RigControl setup Com port Com 1 D atabits E Baudrate 9600 StopBits fi Radio Kerwood all Parity None Data file Set DTR high M Polling speed ms 1000 Set ATS high M loom address Hex foo Ok The first step is to select your radio from the Radio drop down list Currently supported transceivers are ICOM IC 735 only ICOM not IC 735 Kachina 505 Kenwood all models Ten Tec Omni VI or Omni VI Plus Yaesu FT 100 Yaesu FT 817 Yaesu FT 847 Yaesu FT 890 Yaesu FT 920 Yaesu FT 990 Yaesu FT 1000D and Yaesu FT 1000MP Accept the default values for the remaining serial port parameters or change them as required according to the specific of your radio Ensure that the radio is connected to the configured COM port and currently turned on from the Setup Menu select the Radio Open Radio port menu item The default values of 9600 baud for the COM port and 1000 ms 1 second for the Polling Speed should be used as a starting for your configuration If your radio and computer can handle faster baud rates you should select the highest baud rate that reliable operation with your specific hardware Reducing the value of the Polling Speed increasing the rate of radio polling will provide a faster and smoother display of all band frequency and mode changes Detailed interface inf
33. TY was to use an oscilloscope with an XY display The two audio tones that make up RTTY signal mark and space were displayed One signal appeared as a vertical ellipse and the other as a horizontal ellipse goal was to tune the signal so that the vertical ellipse was straight up and down If the horizontal ellipse was not at exactly 90 degrees this meant that the shift width for receive did not match the shift being used for transmit With Logger32 MMTTY you set the AFC to free and it will always cause the ellipses to be at right angles See AFC below You can switch the XY display on in the RTTY toolbar If your computer slows down or has other problems running Logger32 in RT TY mode try eliminating the XY scope to save resources To set the color of this XY display use the Toolbox menu RTTY XY Scope Color for a selection of color choices Unshift On Space UOS Baudot uses a character to indicate that the next character will be LTRS letters or FIGS figures shift In other words each character can have two meanings depending on whether it is preceded by LTRS or FIGS shift Furthermore once you shift into LTRS or FIGS the original standard of Baudot was that the decoder stayed in that shift until it received a command to shift to the other state If your decoder misses a shift character then it will be in the wrong shift state until it receives another shift command You can shift to numbers miss a shift and then continue to print garbage
34. This procedure was developed by Peter G3PLX If we generate a clean PSK31 signal this is pretty good evidence that we will generate a clean RTTY signal from the same computer transmitter interface hardware and software settings Please note the term averaging or RMS RF power meter This is extremely important A peak reading meter will not show the expected results it will show high power at all times Follow this procedure 1 Transmit a single tone we use the Tune mode of Logger32 in PSK31 mode to do this 2 Measure the output of the radio on an averaging RF power meter This can be an external meter in average mode or it be the meter built into most modern radios as long as this is an averaging meter Many radios use a peak reading meter and this is not what we want here Even an older external SWR bridge can be used just use the forward position to get a relative reading Note the reading and 3 Now switch from Tune to the PSK31 idle tone BPSK mode of Logger32 no typing and note the reading again The average RMS power reading should go down to half or less than half the power of the original average power reading If We Fail the Test lf the power does not drop by half or more when we go from Tune to BPSK then we are probably generating substantial IMD ultimate goal is to create a situation in which the microphone gain control is in the same position for both clean phone and AFSK input signals This suggests that we are o
35. To adjust the squelch using this window simply click below or above the indicator line in the yellow vertical quality display bar at right side of the display For received text to be displayed in the Main Receive window the yellow bar must be above the squelch line In the above example it is set at about 25 setting and the yellow bar indicating signal quality is about 75 percent of This station s IMD is down 20 dB and the squelch is open The bandwidth of each Tuning window is 250 Hz and is not adjustable Rx Frequency Controls Here are three ways to control your receive frequency 1 Click somewhere in the Logger82 receive range 2 Use the qsy macro 3 Use the up or down macros The actual Transmit Receive frequency is your USB radio dial frequency setting plus the audio frequency displayed in Logger32 you were using LSB then you would subtract the Logger32 audio frequency reading from your radio s dial frequency You can go View Frequency display and choose whether you want Logger82 to display the audio frequency or preset radio frequency or if you want Logger82 to read the transceiver using computer radio communication to show you the actual frequency at which are received Note Logger32 will display the offset for RIT for some radios but not for others You should verify how this works with your own radio AFC Control Turn on the AFC in the pane on the Statusbar at the bottom The pane says AFC On or AFC Off To recei
36. While the DLL and low level drivers are freeware these files cannot be distributed in isolation and therefore the download is VERY much bigger than Logger32 needs but the authors owners do not make just the necessary components available separately Once the exe has been run and the drivers installed users can delete the exe file if they so wish How to install the I O drivers 1 If you are running WinXP make sure you are logged into your PC as the ADMINISTRATOR If you have a simple set up your PC with a single user then this will be the default state However if you have a more complex arrangement with users with different rights then make sure that you are logged on correctly 2 Locate the file port96nt exe and double click on the file This will start off the installation process 3 During the installation the program pauses to allow selections It is strongly recommended that you use the default setting right through this process 4 On completion of the install reboot your PC More information about these drivers can be found at www driverlinx com DownLoad DIPortlO htm Shared Serial and Parallel Ports Jim Hargrave W5IFP Logger 32 uses serial RS 232 ports to interface with the Radio Rotor and Terminal Node Controllers TNC Logger 32 also uses Parallel ports for Antenna switching and CW transmit Interface To accommodate limited hardware configurations several of functions can be shared on the same ports but some rule
37. a match is found then this step is complete Check if the Prefix of the callsign not the Country prefix is in the Offset database Use the example of CK1XX in Canada Under the Offsets for Canada is there a CK1 If so the offset is found and this step is complete Take the Country prefix use the example of the callsign EXOMM that has the Country prefix of UA9 If the number in the callsign differs from the number in the callsign as it does in our example strip the number from the Country prefix we now temporarily have UA as the Country prefix and add the suffix of the callsign we now have UAOMM We now loop decrementing the length of the callsign each loop i e first pass UAOMM second pass UAOM etc and check for a match in the Offset database Coincidentally there is a UAOM in the Offset database that shows CQ Zone of 16 the default CQ Zone Asiatic Russia is Zone 19 You can see that by using this method all stations in Asiatic Russia with the Number 0 and the letter of the suffix as M i e VAOMxx RAOMxx EXOMxx RXOMxx etc can be identified as being in Zone 16 Easy huh If an Offset is found to match during the third step of the process the CQ Zone number the Latitude and Longitude of the are used in the calculations The above description is very simplified However it will hopefully help the user understand the fundamentals that are followed allow the user to keep the databases current as more and more new Calls
38. and others do Some cards may have an AGC or some other limiting system The popular Creative Labs copyright cards overdrive if the level is set too high Now that you see how the Overload Warning works go to Settings and set Overload Warning on Click on Tool Box Sound Card input level like this ToolBox View Mode Display Aur Ax window Fort Ax window Tx text color Rz window control codes color Rz window normal background Ax window paused background Ax window mouseover highlight Tx window Fort Tx window background Tx window buffer indicator color Waterfall colors Waterfall sensitivity Sound card inpet level Sound card output level RTTY sY Scope color CPU Power saver mode This brings up the Recording mixing console Note In Windows 95 this feature brings up the Volume Mixer From the volume click on Options then Properties then select the recording radio button Make sure the input s you are using Mic or Line are selected in the check boxes and then click OK This will bring up the Recording mixer window For the next adjustments arrange your Logger32 window and your Recording mixer Window so that you can easily see both windows and switch between the two Set your transceiver s audio listening volume to a comfortable listening level You should able to see both windows like this Depending on your setup adjust the mic or line level input controls and the overall recording level far left slider The best
39. and slope tuning or filter bandwidth settings Naturally there are many combinations of the above so the reader is left to his her own preferences but some of codes required to perform these functions are included here Codes for Filter Selection for the FT 990 The Yaesu FT 990 instruction code for this function is 8C and it uses a single parameter code for the desired filtering 00 2 4 kHz 01 2 0 kHz 02 500 Hz 03 250 Hz So the complete macro to select the 250 Hz filter would be hexcommand 00 00 00 03 8C or to select the 2 4 kHz Filter hexcommand 00 00 00 00 8C Macros for other filters follow this pattern If you send a command sequence to select a filter that is not actually installed in the radio that sequence Is ignored Codes for Filter Selection for the FT 1000MP In the case of the FT 1000MP there are two IF filters that can be controlled one at 8 215 mHz and the other at 455 KHz are some examples for filter selection for the FT 1000 hexcommand 02 00 00 03 8C Sets the 455 kHz filter to 250 Hz hexcommand 01 00 00 03 8C Sets the 8 215 mHz filter to 250 Hz hexcommand 02 00 00 02 8C Sets the 455 kHz filter to 500 Hz hexcommand 01 00 00 02 8C Sets the 8 215MHz filter to 500 Hz hexcommand 02 00 00 00 8C Sets the 455Khz filter to 2 4 kHz hexcommand 01 00 00 00 8C Sets the 8 215KHz filter to 2 4 kHz Both the FT 990 and the FT 1000MP have IF shift controls to move the passband center freque
40. click on ANY of the headings Prefix Country CQ ADIF or Cont in the table above the grid will sort on column This window displays a scrollable list of all DXCC Prefixes and associated q Country Name CQ Zone q ADIF Country number and Continent To edit a specific country or prefix double click anywhere on the row for that entry This will enable the doEdit window for that particular entry dbEdit Canada Ontario X pE C E fo Eer Siarad Te z Canada Howa Scotia Atlantic Stan Canada Quebec Eastern Stan Canada Ontaria Eastern Stan Canada Manitoba Central Stani Canada Saskatchewan Canada Cer The dbEdit window is divided into three sections the 1 1 1 Basic Information Alternative Prefixes and Large Country Prefix Offsets Basic Information Section Add a New Prefix To ADD a new prefix click on the BLANK line at the bottom of the Country Database window will display a blank dbEdit Window enabling the user to enter the required data Logger32 expects information in ALL blank edit boxes and will prompt the user if any are missing or contain invalid data The pull down list at lower right in this section enables the user to select the correct Time Zone for the new prefix Use the arrow in this pane to obtain a list of Time Zones available See the topic Standard Time Zones If you to know the relationship between the name time offset from GMT and if the time zone has DST
41. different strength signals look like on the waterfall Then you can estimate from the waterfall display what RST to give the other station Of course remember that strong signals in that broad bandwidth can desense your radio and that will change the appearance of the You might want to look over the table above and make your judgements based on the subjective R and S levels descriptions in table As for T well 0 Receiving PSK31 Randy Tipton WA5UFH and Jim Hargrave W5IFP Proposed frequencies for PSK31 QSOs 1838 150 3580 150 7035 15 for region 1 and region 3 and 7080 15 for region 2 10140 150 14070 150 lt Very active frequency for PSK 18100 150 21080 150 24920 150 28120 150 The 7 MHz band is much wider in region 2 the Americas and the IARU bandplan reflects this The plan for PSK31 activity has been to concentrate activity starting from the bottom edge of the IARU RTTY bandplan upwards as activity increased The exception is in the 10 meter band in order to give hams with less than full privileges a chance meet The recommendation is to begin 150 Hz above the bottom frequency Keep in mind that all you need is about 100 Hz as channel separation Receiving and displaying PSK31 signals involves several software options The best way to get familiar with the Receiving is to read this topic thoroughly Then while receiving live PSK31 transmissions change the options to become familiar with thei
42. ee ee ee 2 eee ae tmeees Hl XP c kt he GPa s Feros eA om EI g 7 of D D a a P fi ke b ai t Il T F f t 4 L it ah ed i i T ASC ook 127 ha the code DEL Onder MS DOS this ciodehas the sare effect as ASCI 3 BS The DEL code can be garer ged ty the CT EL BESF ke Baud A measure of how fast individual signal elements could be transmitted serially through a system Note It is not that same Bits per Second bps Callsign A default callsign to be used by Logger must be entered as part of the Initial Setup process Additional callsigns for other operators may also be entered Coordinated Universal Time Time zone of the Zero 0 or Greenwich meridian Sometimes GMT or Zulu DB 9 A nine pin connector used to connect to computer Seria COM ports DB 25 Seriol Port DB 9 pin Male Pin Signal DCD RxD TxD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS Clear To Send RI Ring Indicator Receive Data Transmit Data Signal Ground Ooms oc gt aha A 25 pin connector used to connect to computer Serial COM and Parallel LPT ports Data Corrier Detect Data Terminal Ready Data Set Ready Request To Send Serial Port DB 25 pin Male EF PP RAB be Bn BE be bee eee Pin N C not connected 20 b TxD Transmit Data 31 3 RxD a 22 4 Request To Send 23 5 To Send 24 i Data Set Ready 25 7 Signal Ground 8 Data Corrier Detect 9
43. for 500Hz with a passband centered on 950 Hz command FLO07009 SH03 Here is how to select the 270HZ 8 88 filter with a passband centered on 950Hz command FLO10007 SH03 Here is a set of three macros that provide a range of choices If you choose to operate at alx and Rx audio setting of 950 Hz here are three macros to control the rig filtering 2 kHz filter with no change in the passband control command FLO07007 500 Hz filter with a passband centered at 950 Hz command FLO09007 SH03 270 Hz filter with a passband centered at 950 Hz command FLO10007 SH03 Additional Kenwood Macros This material is by Gil Baron It is possible to extend control over many parameters in newer radios that now provide computer control The TS 870 is one such radio It uses IF DSP filtering rather than crystal or mechanical filtering Some amateurs have found it best to receive in CW mode and to transmit in USB mode This might seem too complicated to use during a QSO but you can implement these commands in macros and all it means is that your transmit and receive buttons will be macros instead of the transmit receive pane in Logger32 There is some preparation of your Kenwood radio for the following two commands Set the menu item 24 to 1000 on your radio Set RIT to 1 00 kHz Set the preset audio frequencies in Logger32 to 1000 Receive in CW mode RXCW command MD3 RD1 FW0005 This command script does the following three actions
44. for a long while Most of the information that hams receive is in LTRS shift with FIGS used only for the digits The other FIGS characters are relatively unused in modern ham RTTY operation It has become common practice to have the decoder perform an unshift on space UOS operation After a FIGS shift the decoder prints FIGS characters until it reaches a space character after which it automatically performs a LTRS shift whether or not it receives such a command To make things consistent many modern encoders automatically send a FIGS shift whenever they send a FIGS character after a space even if the last character before Space was a number The recommendation is that you set UOS on unless you have found a reason not to do this See Transmitting RT TY for a way to your transmit to help others who are using UOS FIGS LTRS Shift If you think that you have missed a LTRS or FIGS shift you can use these two buttons to force Logger32 to make the shift on receive This can only be done to characters that have not been decoded Once a character is printed it cannot be shifted AFC You have a choice of four AFC modes which can be set with Setup toolbar AFC ATC PLL Tab 1 Free Allow both mark and space to vary to copy the signal best Transmit with the receive mark space 2 Fixed Mark can change but shift is fixed at the default value 3 HAM The mark can change but the shift can only take the values of 170 200 220 240 Hz whicheve
45. general appearance of the Logbook Entry Window can be adjusted to suit individual tastes Select Setup Appearance here you can change a whole range of items such as background highlight and font colors as required You may also you require the callsign preview facility here Entry Window Tab Order Following the entry of a callsign you can arrange to Tab through the entry window in any order you wish Select tab order to reach the customizing window below Customize Tab Order a 4 E E 6 E E s E EE m E HE a E 12 E In the left hand box enter the order number for which you require that field to fall and if you require the field to be included in tab sequence place a check mark alongside left click in the box In the example above only three fields have been selected the order Callsign Name and User 5 which you have defined as the IOTA number Having completed your selection press OK button Note that your bandplan can set the default RST sent normally 599 and the RST received field will default to if nothing is entered In the above case having entered a callsign a single tab will take you to Name having filled in the reports of 599 on its way QSO Mask Logger32 has the facility to look at your logbook and extract information from the last QSO you had with someone and display this in the logbook entry window For example if you had worked Bob K4CY previously and you had correctly recorded his in the Name field then t
46. going to see white letters on a white background This creates a visual challenge not to be overcome by ordinary mortal human beings Try another font color besides white by using the Toolbox Rx Window font command My Rx or Tx screen shows no text Did you set the font color to be the same as the screen color so they cannot be distinguished from each other Go to Toolbox and fix it My waterfall display has problems sometimes after working properly for a while some waterfall problems appear to be related to the use of power management Windows automatically turns off the after a period of non use or screen savers Try turning off power management see Computer Tuneup and or the screen saver The fact that things work well for a while suggests that only when the Windows considers using these features problem make itself known There are problems with the screen print slow characters appear out of order wrong characters print or other video problems There are problems with some video cards and Windows Try using less hardware acceleration try one position lower at time by doing the following Click Windows Start Control Panel Display Settings Advanced Performance Tab and move the Hardware Acceleration slider to the left one position According to WOEB this may improve the performance of all your digital programs but stick with Logger32 Ifyou cannot change the waterfall colors then it is very likely that the D
47. has a scrollbar on the right hand side when the window becomes full of text Text will scroll from the top of the window downward until the window is full At that point text is scrolled off the top out of the user s view The user can see this again by doing the following 1 Press the lt Insert gt key on the keyboard one time 2 The Rx Window background will change to white or whatever you selected in the Toolbox and the text is frozen 3 The Scrollbar can now be clicked to scroll the buffered text through the Rx Window 4 Press the lt Insert gt key on the keyboard to again start receiving text no Rx text is lost Note When you use the pause function the background turns white If you are using a white font the whole Rx display will turn white and you won t be able to see the letters See the Receive Window Color instructions to change this color This technique works during transmit as well as in receive mode You can freeze and scroll the Rx Window while text you have already entered is being transmitted by Logger32 Warning If Logger382 becomes unstable in RTTY mode possibly operating slowly or failing to do something read the topic Computer Tuneup Advanced RTTY Receiving Now that you are receiving here are ways to fine tune the received signal First we will look at the RI TY toolbar that appears at top of the RTTY receive window RTTY Toolbar When you go to RT TY mode an additional toolbar will appear allowing
48. high tones Logger32 has automated method for transmitting with high tones as long as your radio is in communication with the computer using a serial The align macro or right click in the display does this Logger32 will do the following Move the receive passband to a preset audio frequency you should choose a high tone 1 Send a QSY command to your radio so whatever audio frequency you were receiving at is now at the preset audio frequency The result is that whatever station you were copying wherever it was in the receive range is now at the preset audio tone frequency and Logger32 is listening at that frequency Here is how to do the align operation First before trying to use align set a default audio frequency for mark Click Settings Preset Audio Frequencies In the second box down Default Main Rx Frequency put a high tone value 2125 sounds logical Turn AFC on To use this technique tune in a RT TY signal somewhere on the receive range away from the default Rx audio frequency Put the cursor in the middle of the receive passband lines and right click the mouse It may take a second or two but Logger32 will send frequency shift command S QSYxxxx to your radio so that the signal appears with the mark at the preset audio frequency At same time it will move its receive passband to that same area and retune the signal You can also use the align macro by putting the command on a macro button When you go to transm
49. isn t supported Error value out of range Invalid flag passed Invalid parameter passed Card doesn t support 16bit 83000Hz Mono format 0 Go to Settings on the Main Menu and change the way the figure zero prints to the screen Your display may not be able print with a slash Jan Ditzian KX2A cannot get Logger32 to work 1 1 Do you have the latest version of the dlls especially PSKcore dll Is there a Logger32 update that goes with the latest version of Logger32 Set all program names to the correct versions then reboot the computer then try Logger32 again Make sure that all desktop or other shortcuts point to the versions that you want to use If you are having problems go directly to the programs with My Computer or Windows Explorer and make sure that you start up exactly the program want to start the correct copy of Logger32 exe Some versions of Windows 2000 seem to have problems running Logger32 There are some files associated with Internet Explorer 5 that are needed for Logger82 Try installing a copy of IE 5 or onto your computer to see if this lets your system run Logger32 You do not have to use IE 5 as your browser Logger32 runs slowly or freezes or has other problems indicating a busy CPU Go to Toolbox and select CPU power saver mode cannot run Logger32 long enough to select the CPU power saver mode Open the Logger82 ini file with a text processor and add the following line at the end of t
50. its default value 1500 Hz if you have not changed it 7 a Cd BPSK 1500 0 Hz 14071 112 KHz 234 Simplex Receive NetOff AFC OF f Reset Abort CPL PTT Abort test A mouse click in the tenth pane clears the transmit buffers If Logger32 is transmitting it switches from transmit to receive as as possible P Cd Sere tt ace elated accra aber ead ced epee eee eee eee eer eae renee Gansu re en man uiccee ceo Rennes ar eter Benn Remmenceuaaee BPSK 1500 0 Hz 14071 112 KHz 234 Simplex Receive NetOff AFCOf Resell Abort CPU PTT CPU PTT Indicator Lights A green CPU LED indicates that there are enough CPU cycles available to service 100 of the sound card DSP and FFT needs Red CPU LED indicates the CPU apparently got busy doing something else and was unable to service the full requirements of Logger32 In order to avoid problems the Sound card is reset and the buffers are flushed A red PTT LED indicates PTT is off and Logger82 is in the receive mode A green PTT LED indicates PTT is on and Logger82 is in the transmit mode 14070 E I eels Reece ence creed eet een BPSK 1500 0Hz2 14071 112KHz 2302 Simplex Receive NetOr AFC OH Reset Abort Basic Operation test The following sections describe how to do basic Sound Card Data Window operations Switching the Radio Between Receive and Transmit Use the receive tran
51. means of level control Logger382 can be configured to connect the CAT PTT and CW functions using a single Serial port or they can be wired using a different port for each function CAT setup To setup the communication parameters in Logger32 click on Setup in the upper menu bar Click on Radio and select Radio port configuration Radio CD Rom Auto lookup Fre Radio Port configuration Show Radio debug window Use Narrow filters for Cis Close Radio port Select the Yaesu FT 920 and set the baud rate to 4800 8 databits 2 stopbits and parity to none You can adjust the poll rate to your liking A rate of 300ms seems to work well with Sound card functions Leave the DTR and RTS boxes blank You can ignore the Icom address RigControl setup i x Com port Com 1 Diatabits E Baudrate fas00 StopEits 2 Radic Yaesu FT 920 Parity None Data file Set DTR high T Polling interval m 200 Se RATS high D lcom address Hex OF Show Radio Debug Window PTT setup In the Sound card window select Settings and click on Radio PTT options Set the parameters to the desired port You can also select the Shared port option which will allow CAT and PTT on the same port This is the most efficient and simplest setup if you already have a separate PTT interface then you will need 2 ports The following shows the shared port configuration w Radio PTT select
52. mer E lt lt _f BPok 1551 9He 14077 552 KHz 25dB Simplex Transmitting Upper and Lower Case PSK can transmit all the letters on a computer keyboard both upper capital letters and lower case and the special characters You can force Logger32 to transmit only upper or only lower case letters by clicking Settings Typing Preference and making a selection The standard is to type as usual using upper and lower case With PSK31 uppercase letters are longer than lower case letters and if you select uppercase only your transmissions will be slower Changing the Transmit Receive Status of the Radio To see how to interface the rig with the computer for controlling the switching from Receive to Transmit see Interfacing a Radio to the PC Sound Card Methods of Switching from Receive to Transmit Click on the 6th pane from the left on the Statusbar Pane text will change from Receive blue to Transmit red Use the transmit macro invoked either by Buttons or Hot Keys See MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons Press the Pause Break key Methods of Switching from Transmit to Receive Click on the 6th pane from the left on the Statusbar Logger32 will type all the text in the Tx buffer and then go to The transmit receive pane will change from Transmit red to Receive blue when all the text is sent Press the Pause Break key This is the same as clicking transmit receive q Click on A
53. mgm aaa ipd gi p apap A bF iN F WiFeR a eg a ee ee e ii a din bal fi WHEA big ey I Gleek 11025 a ppm Here are pictures of some calibrations performed in Europe using MMTTY and different time standard stations This is GBR in Great Britain The time ticks are wide but you can pick any consistent spot on the time tick and use it as the focal point for clicking The arrows show possibilities for the first and second clicks i ll mir M Ryp madir Eni bball LTT he 1 il JLi j j F Hia 1 Tune your radio to WY to the carrier frequency 2 W ait for about three minutes Ifyou are using 11025 Hz calibration you should see two lines of marks vertical or slanted corresponding to the l second tick sound bursts transmitted by the time standard broadcast station You will see onb one line with 000 Hz or 6000 Hz 4 Right click to move the vertical green line to the tick line This allows you to compare the tick line to vertical Gait Clock 11028 E 272 ppm Mark 1000 E AGC oo Here are two pictures of Russian time standard station RWM The first shows a properly adjusted display The second illustrates error of 1000 ppm Note the slanted lines This will occur with any time standard if you have an error of 1000 ppm ih oe OP aN ia The green and yellow lines are provided by MMTTY as a vertical reference to compare to the tick line Ifthe tick line i
54. not be typed manually in the TX WIndows A few MMTTY macros work in the RTTY mode of the Sound Card Data Window diddle on diddle off pause T UTC time Yet UTC time D UTC date More Difficult Macros This section provides examples of how to use some of the more difficult or unusual Macro commands asciinnn This command inserts the ASCII code n nnn of a character than cannot be entered from a keyboard into the output text string For example the ASCII code 191 will display the symbol So the macro command ascii191 Que pasa Will Que pasa into the output text string If the first digit is a zero it is optional with this command you can use either three or characters In other words ascii0191 or ascii191 entered in a macro command will both generate the character The character tilde cannot be typed into a macro but if you need the tilde character use ascii0126 in its place and the tilde character will appear Example 1 Set up a Macro button say F12 that has the command ascii0176 and a button caption of chr 0176 and save it Simple enough Now with the cursor in the TxWindow enter the text The temp here today is 90 lt F12 gt F Bet you re wondering how did that upperorlower radiofreq rxtonefreq and radioandtone These commands are applicable to both PSK and RTTY Here is an example of how to use these them in PSK The following text is entered into the te
55. of four files with the file extensions of ISD ISF ISL and ISM All four files must be copied for each database The Country Prefix IOTA and US County databases are all maintainable by the user from within Logger32 These three may be accessed from the Logger32 menu bar using the sequence Tools Database Maintenance As a general note where Time Zone information is required use the included pull down menu OR alternatively where this does appear right click in the appropriate box to obtain the same list DO NOT TYPE IN THE TIMEZONE DETAILS YOURSELF unless you know the exact name and can get the spacing perfect Where Lat Long information is required this should be in the format of degrees and decimal degrees If you prefer to enter this data in degrees and minutes then right click in either of the Lat or Long panes or even in the tables to bring up this facility Country Prefix The Country Prefix database may be accessed from the Main Menu by selecting Tools Database Maintenance Country Prefix maintenance OR by clicking on the Country Prefix icon on the Tool Bar Selecting Country Prefix maintenance opens the Country database maintenance window Country database maintenance Namibia Federated States of Micronesia Marshall Iland Brunei Canada Ontario Australa Yictoria Heard sland Macquarie Island Cocos Keeling Island Termito of New Guinea Lord Howe Island Metllish Reet Papua Territory NOTE If you left
56. of how to use QSX for split operation in the Secion MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons These macros require computer radio communication Tx Rx Tuning window When Logger32 transmits there will be a histogram display in the small Tx Rx Tuning window This display represents the audio that is being sent from the sound card to the radio The Tx Rx Tuning window is not a display of your radio s actual output How Do Transmit a CWID If you wish to send a CW identification at the end of your text you can use the CW macros To change the CW speed in words per minute go to Settings Main Menu and select CW ID Speed on the drop down menu Picture txpsk10 bmp Considerations When Transmitting at Display Frequency Extremes The maximum displayed bandwidth in Logger82 is 4000 Hz You can transmit up to 3000 Hz from the frequency at which your transceiver is set since Logger82 can set a tone up to an audio frequency of 3000 Hz There are two considerations to keep in mind when you click on a signal to call a station and thereby select a transmit audio frequency Rolloff Consideration Since you are using AFSK in the SSB mode of your transceiver you should remember that the transmit audio rolls off below 300 and above 3000 Hz Those are just ballpark numbers and some transceivers have a low end rolloff above 300 Hz and some a high end rolloff lower than 3000 Hz This means that your signal will be attenuated when you are near thos
57. preventing a Runtime Error 13 error message Kenwood TS 850 Hew Lines VA3HU RigControl setup Kenwood TS 570 TS 870 Hew Lines VA3HU The procedure for Interfacing the Kenwood TS 570 and TS 870 transceivers to Logger82 is very simple and almost identical for both radios The COM connector on the rear panel of the transceiver allows you to directly connect your computer using a standard RS 232C cable You can still use all transceiver controls while under computer control The RS 232 cable must be a standard straight cable terminated with a 9 pin female connector at the radio end The computer must be either a 9 or 25 pin female connector to match your computer serial port If you wish to build an interface cable only the following signals wires are required 9 PIN CONNECTOR Pin 2 Transmit Data Pin 3 Receive Data Pin 5 Ground 25 PIN CONNECTOR Pin 2 Transmit Data Pin 3 Receive Data Pin 7 Signal Ground SETTING UP THE RADIO In order to use computer control with the radio you must set up the Communication Parameters section of the radios menu TS 570 From Menu Nr 35 Computer Interface select one of the eight options The recommended option is the Kenwood default of 96 1 or 9600 bps with 1 stop bit TS 870 From Menu Nr 56 COM RATE select one of the eight options The recommended option is the Kenwood default of 96 1 or 9600 bps with 1 stop bit After selecting the desired menu item the
58. returns in a macro are seen as if they were text They are transmitted when the buffer sent To get rid of them end the macro with the macro command cleartxbuffer This will clear only the transmit buffer The other way to eliminate the carriage returns is not to use them in the macro but just run everything together on one Logger32 is so broken have given up hope I want to start over but want the new Logger32 to know what the old one knew preferences macros and so forth If Logger32 will open and run Suggest you backup your user files and logbook This is the first and second block on the upper toolbar All of your settings preferences and Macros are kept in a single file named Logger32 ini Copy this file to another Then delete this file in your main Logger82 directory Reinstall a new Logger32 Logger32 will now start up in default condition Once you get it going you can then copy your old Logger32 ini back into the main directory and it will then have your original settings
59. risk of overdriving the mic input Overdriving the mic input circuit is a common cause of distorted and wide signals when using this type of sound card set up In fact any operation of the rig s ALC means that it is distorting your transmitted PSK31 is especially sensitive to these settings but all the digital modes will suffer Voice signals are not as distorted by the action ALC If vox does not seem to operate at low enough audio levels you may want to set the levels by manually putting your rig into then setting the levels to optimize your audio signal again you should just see your ALC indicator moving After this reset your vox circuit to trip at that level of input If you normally use vox then the voice setting should be OK but if you have not set your level you may have to do so You can do this by manually putting your rig into transmit adjusting the transmit level for the above no ALC level and then adjusting your vox gain so the rig goes into transmit when you send it a tone If your radio does not return to receive but keeps cycling between receive and transmit when you use vox then another input is operating the vox circuit Go back to the Volume control mixer bring up all the controls and mute every one Now uncheck the S you need to output a tone and the one you need to get a display on the Logger32 screen Leave all the others muted or all the way down Remember you can hear the output tone in your speakers The optim
60. set your computer to or UTC time and do not want a correction for daylight savings time use Monrovia which is in the same time zone but not use the correction for daylight savings time UTC time does not use the correction q All this would be moot if Bill Gates were a ham operator He would have realized the trouble he was causing Send him copy of the License Manual Logger32 prints everything except the figure zero 0 Go to Settings on the Main Menu and change the way the figure zero prints to the screen Your display may not be able to print with a slash am not comfortable with the fact that when Logger32 installs it changes system files Like most large programs Logger32 makes use of DLL and other files that must be located in places other than the target directory for Logger32 exe There are programs that allow you to restore your old files if you see a problem develop suggests SecondChance from PowerQuest q1 Go Back from Wild File Where can I find PSK31 operation Right here When I run MMTTY EXE from the Logger32 directory I get error messages Yes you will as not all the MMTTY files have been loaded into this directory If you are running MMTTY just to change RT TY parameters just ignore the error messages and press lt return gt until you reach the expected MMTTY opening installed Logger32 and use a Com port for t r PTT switching When I boot up the computer the t r switch is closed transmit positi
61. standby To change RTTY speed use the following instruction CONTROL Cn Where n speed baud 1 45 5 100 6 110 7 150 8 200 9 300 O ascbaud Hygain E Z Rotator Hal Miller KB1ZQ This section describes the setup for the HyGain Rotor EZ Rotator control x Com port Com2 Shopb its ho H Baudrate jso Parity None Set DTA high Databits 2 Set RTS high M Ok Hy Gain DCU 1 Com Port Set to serial port rotor is connected to Picture ez1 bmp Baudrate Set to 4800 for Rotor EZ StopBits Set to 1 Parity None Databits Set to 8 Rotor Emulation set to HyGain DCU 1 UDLinksOFF To control the rotor a call sign must be entered in the Logbook Entry Window then press the Control A keys together A the will swing to the direction of the station in the Logbook entry window Note If Rotor EZa is used the control chip must be the version allowing RS 232C communications Rotors without this option will not work with Logger32 Automatic Antenna Switch Jim Hargrave W5IFP Parallel port data lines are typical TTL logic levels of 0 and 5 VDC These signals must be isolated and converted to operate antenna switching relays The following interface will provide proper isolation of the parallel port data lines and supply sufficient power for most antenna switching relays The TIP120 transistor should be mounted on an adequate heat sink A duplicate should be
62. than a BPSK signal It will be easier to use the Rx Tx Tuning Window to tune a QPSK signal than to rely on the Waterfall display You should also note that the idle signals are the same for BPSK and QPSK When QPSK is sending data however it is quite different in appearance from BPSK QPSK Looks Like a Cross in the Phase Scope of the Tuning Window lair TTi urirg wa chery n ors cps i i RE A n A A QPSK signal tuned a few Hz low You can tune in a QPSK signal by using the same point and click methods you use for a BPSK QSO You will discover that you have to be a little more precise in clicking on the signal in the tuning scope or in the waterfall spectral display At first you may nothing but garbled text on the screen and may need to adjust the squelch and re point your mouse on the incoming signal Note Your rig s stability is more critical when using QPSK QPSK can perform better than BPSK when band conditions are poor due to polar flutter At such times you may be able to get copy from a QPSK signal even though the cross in the tuning window is poorly formed Note QPSK requires that BOTH stations in the QSO be using the same sideband While this is not important for BPSK QSOs it vital when using QPSK QPSK Reversed BPSK is demodulated the same way whether you are on upper or lower sideband This is not true for QPSK which operates like RTTY You must shift the signal in a way that the decoder expects or i
63. the map all of which are self explanatory You change the map itself to something more appropriate and or modify the island marker both for size and color US State The US State US County and Grid Square information windows all work in a similar way as described above Some are shown below G3NPA FL on 20Rp US County In the case of US Counties the information window has an additional facility in that the whole list of counties will be searched a match as you type in a name Clicking on any of the counties presented will give something similar to the info window shown on the right below US County GSNPS4 Pacific WA on 20M 55B X z Buey Panola MiS Grid Square w G3NPA 1082 on S AES Database Maintenance Geoff Anderson G3NPA Important Notes 1 Before making ANY modifications to ANY of the databases make back up copies before proceeding to make changes 2 If you are in the habit of sending updated databases to friends then you must send a copy of ALL the database files as one package On NO account should you expect an updated database file to work correctly without also sending the all of the database files of the set The database files are grouped into three database sets Country Prefix consisting of the following databases ALIAS32 COUNTRY32 and OFFSET32 IOTA consisting of the following databases IOTA32 and IOTAIsland US County consisting of COUNTY32 Each database consists
64. the output text string bpsk PSK RTTY Change the operational mode of the Sound Card Data Window to BPSK note 1 call CW PSK RTTY Inserts the callsign currently displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into the output text string clear CW An immediate command to clear the TX Buffer and callsign panel ONLY works if keyer is in a Manual Tx see Note 2 clearbuffers PSK RTTY Clears the TX Window and Buffer as well as the RX Window Stops transmission but DOES NOT return to RX clearlog PSK RTTY Clears the Logbook Entry Window cleartxbuffer CW PSK RTTY Clears the TX Buffer command PSK RTTY Sends the text string following the command to a radio controlled by Logger32 cw PSK Sends the text string following the command up to 40 characters on CW and switches to RX cwid PSK Transmits a CW ID string at the end of the current transmission and switches to RX down PSK RTTY Moves the main passband down 1 Hz If AFC is locked on this command will have no effect file PSK RTTY When followed on the same line with a fully qualified textfile name file C L OGGER32 MYFILE TXT this command will load the contents of that file into the TX buffer If only the filename is used the command will default to the Logger32 directory hexcommand PSK RTTY Sends the hexadecimal string following the command to the radio log CW PSK RTTY Enters the data currently displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into the Log lo
65. the tone frequency The frequency displayed on the radio will be at the left end of Sound Card Data Window s frequency bar A The Sound Card Data Window uses the radio frequency A along with the audio tone frequency B to display the actual frequency C you will receive transmit That is if your radio frequency is 14 070 A radio in LSB and you are listening to a 1500 Hz B tone The Card Data Window display the actual transmitted frequency of 14068 5 kHz C Pinnae aee ES l ab rom 10100 14068 14070 moa Down EF E AAE BPSK 500 0 H2 4068500 KHa Simplex Receive Net On ml AFC On Reset To turn this feature on select the View Frequency Display Display frequency from radio menu item You must do this to the frequency display on screen in the third pane from the left in the Statusbar but once you do it you can leave it on forever frequency information is unavailable the Sound Card Data Window will display nothing Select the View Frequency Display Display Audio Frequencies if you would rather see the audio frequencies of the tones Align There are situations in which you might want to retune your radio after you have begun to copy a station but you would not like to lose the station Here are some situations You want to transmit a high tone to reduce the chance that you will transmit distortion but the station you want to receive is low in your receive transmit range at the current radio fre
66. then click on Apply followed by OK 3 Reboot the computer to ensure that the operating system is correctly set and then call up the Date Time Properties once again 4 Set the date and time to your LOCAL time Click on Apply followed by OK or synchronize the computer clock to an atomic standard as described in section Atomic Clock 5 Logger32 displays UTC time in the bottom left hand corner of the Lower Status Bar If this is not right then check to make sure you have all the above settings correct 6 Asa final check place the mouse over the time pane in Logger32 see below to display the PC time Note that in the example below the two times are the same because the PC used was set to GMT and NO DST was being applied in January If you are using any other Time Zone and or DST is being applied then these times will be different You should not need to change your computer clock again apart from any small corrections necessary resulting from drift even when daylight saving times apply 5 Frequency Display Logger32 has the ability to display and log frequency in either MHz or kHz to a maximum resolution of 1 Hz From the MenuBar click on Setup and then select Frequency Click on the frequency display configuration of your choice You can now start to log your contacts but you may wish to refer to other sections on how to set up the Logbook Page the Logbook Entry window the Previously Worked windows and the B
67. then the same Hex address must be specified in both setup configurations CAUTION The Parallel port PTT only functions when using the CW machine You cannot share Radio PTT on a serial port and CW PTT ona parallel port at the same time NEVER connect a Serial and Parallel connection together Equipment failure could result lf the parallel port PTT is used for the CW machine then the PTT control from the Sound card would have to be by radio assuming that the rig has only one external PTT control point Otherwise the user must have an external PTT switching setup would provide complete isolation between the ports either by mechanical switch or electronic circuitry PTT using a Shared Radio port You may choose to operate a PTT line directly from a pin on a Com port and also have Logger32 communicate with the radio for frequency information and software command control on the same Com port In the Sound Card module Click Settings Radio Options and select PTT by Shared Radio Port NOTE The sound card in Logger32 allows the option to use DTR or RTS for PTT However if you plan on sharing a serial port the CW Transmit it is suggested that you use RTS so your PTT line will be compatible with the CW Transmit module which is coded for PTT on RTS line and CW data on the DTR line Both the PTT and CW can be shared on the same Com port used for Frequency and Mode information exchange between the radio and Logger32 When you set up your ports conf
68. to the DX Spots grid and refocusing you to the bottom After your done with the older uncheck the HOLD OFF DX SPOTS and the spots that came in while it was on hold will populate the grid You won t any NOTE While in freeze mode the colored background of the title bar will flash to alert you that it is frozen Stop Scrolling Cluster Window The same feature for pausing the scrolling of the DX Spot window is available here Simply right click and choose HOLD OFF RECEIVE TEXT Instant Prefix Identification See a callsign in the DX Spot window and you don t recognize the prefix Hold your over the callsign and a tool tip will pop up with the country name It will also tell you if or where that prefix is needed WWV Update WWV Updates are sent every 3 hours and most clusters transmit them When Logger32 sees the WWV report it writes the data to the toolbar at the bottom of the screen If you don t want to wait for the next report send a request to your cluster SH WW YV or add it to your logon script Like Logger you will when get around to it be able to activate the Cluster window simply by clicking on an TALK or whatever message in the DX Spot window Multiple Input Logger32 allows you to send data to the DX Spot window from both the Telnet amp VHF Cluster windows choosing a different font color for vhf and telnet spots you will be able to determine the spot origin when it s displayed in DX Spot window Grid Colors If usi
69. use color to distinguish between received and text When the Tx window is empty and Logger32 is still in transmit an idle signal is transmitted If you are asking another station for IMD report you should send five seconds of PSK idle The Tx Window can be resized using the Splitter Bar Use the mouse and move the cursor over the splitter bar slowly until the pointer changes to the splitter identifier up down arrow and left click the mouse and drag the Tx Window up or down to the width RE Sound Card Data H Re Window menu hidden File Settings ToolBox wie Methods to Enter Text in the Tx Window 1 1 User types text here using the keyboard User pastes text from Logger32 or another application using standard Windows copy cut and paste mouse right click or Ctrl C Ctrl V User invokes text by with buttons and hot keys see MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons User calls up a text file on a floppy or hard drive using File Send a text file on the Main Menu Methods to Correct Text in the Tx Window 1 1 If incorrect letters have not been transmitted backspace to erase then correct the letters Transmitted text will come as corrected If incorrect letters have been sent the receiving station will see the incorrect text then he will see the letters erased and replaced by whatever you type after erasing If a buffer e g a macro or typing ahead has incorrect text if you are fast enough you can
70. voltage reduction and isolation PTT isolation and other features http teleline terra es personal esteban1 ptteng htm http sanduskyohio com lectrokit http www westmountainradio com http www buxcommco com buxcat html htto www mfjenterprises com MMTTY MMTTY is used as a plug in engine to copy RI TY under control of Logger32 Here is the official MMTTY English language site http www qsl net mmhamsoft You can sign up for the MMTTY reflector which operates like Logger32 s reflector by going to Yahoogroups as you would for Logger32 or Logger32 When you get there sign up for MMTTY http www yahoogroups com Proposed frequencies for PSK31 QSOs 1838 150 3580 150 7035 15 for region 1 and region 3 and 7080 15 for region 2 10140 150 14070 150 lt Very active frequency for PSK 18100 150 21080 150 24920 150 28120 150 The 7 mHz band is much wider in region 2 the Americas and the IARU bandplan reflects this The plan for PSK31 activity has been to concentrate activity starting from the bottom edge of the IARU RTTY bandplan upwards as activity increased The exception is in the 10 meter band in order to give hams with less than full privileges a chance meet The recommendation is to begin 150 Hz above the bottom frequency Keep in mind that all you need is about 100 Hz as channel separation Icom IC 735 W5IfP Jim Hargrave The IC 735 radio comes with the following factory default settings H
71. want this profile to with AFC on just turn off your rig or turn the RF gain down so there is no noise or signal for the AFC to chase 4 Set the Demodulator to IIR click the Type button until IIR shows as the Demodulator 5 Change Shift to 23 Hz 6 Change BW to 20 Hz for the XY Scope display If Baud is showing click the word Baud to change it to BW 7 Change the Demodulator to PLL click the Type button 8 Change Loop to 40 Hz 9 Click Profiles Assign Menu and fill in a name for this Profile RTTY 23 Hz or any name you choose 10 Exit MMTTY exe and start Logger32 In RTTY mode you will see the word Profile at the far right of the button bar Click the down arrow next to the word Profile and can select your new mode If things vary press the Reset button and you will restore all the Demodulator Group parameters for this profile You may define up to nine Profiles although it is strongly recommended that you leave the first one RT TY default alone so you can get back to the standard RTTY parameters if you get lost You may make as many changes as you want and incorporate them into a single Profile Removing a Profile You can remove Profiles just as easily Again exit Logger32 and start MMTTY exe Click Profile Delete and choose the one want to delete The label will return to Profile with a number and will be grayed out because there are no longer any data associated with that label Tailoring a Profile It is possib
72. way to set these levels is to tune in digital mode activity with your transceiver and then click on the area of the strongest activity as in the spectrum display lower segment of Logger32 s main operating window to direct Logger32 s attention to that QSO Turn the Overload Warning Start by setting the overall recording volume in the center of its adjustment range Adjust the input level on the mic or line input you can clearly see the signals on the spectrum display but they do not turn the display red Signals will not reach the top of the spectrum display if they are adjusted properly Overdriving these inputs will severely degrade your copy Adjust for the minimum record levels while still providing a good in Logger382 It may be necessary to reduce the overall recording level as well as the mic or line inputs to achieve this It may be necessary to attenuate the signal between the transceiver and sound card especially if you re using the mic input of your card If you don t see any receive activity on Logger32 s displays make sure that your mic or line input control is not muted Mute is a check box next to the slider in your record mixer and also doublecheck all connections It is possible to overdrive the sound card and may need to attenuate the input signal It is also possible that the sound card is incompatible with Logger32 Some hams found that sound cards built into the motherboard do not work The only solution to this problem i
73. you to operate the following controls These appear from to right on the toolbar 1 1 Squelch set this as with PSK on the Tuning window vertical bar Bandpass Filter BPF Set your transceiver to a wide passband and turn this on and off to see its action This audio filter remains centered on the receive frequency Normal Reverse mode RT TY XY display on off UOS on off Unshift on Space FIGS shift see below LTRS shift see below Setup Bring up a set of screens that allow the user to control many receive and transmit parameters Net on off Transmit where you receive See Transmitting RTTY AFC on off Automatic Frequency Control track the received signal see below Reset The same as on the Statusbar reset to preset transmit and receive frequencies and shifts Abort TURN TRANSMIT OFF RIGHT NOW W Sound Card Data File Settings Toolbox YView Mode Display Aux Aux Clear eles ia t 4 Sele e O Rx Tx Tuning window To activate this window click on View Show Tuning window You will then see Main Tx Rx Tuning S 172 Hz Yate This Tuning window gives you several displays 1 1 1 1 Spectral display of the signal like that for PSK31 XY display of received mark and space tones Squelch display Digital readout of mark space shift in Hz Warning If you cannot find the XY scope or the tuning display it is very likely that you turned them off on the main RTTY too
74. your settings but it will NOT be all of them Do NOT attempt to transfer everything over from the original Zakanaka ini file to the new Logger32 ini file unless you are absolutely certain of what you are doing as in a number of instances the parameters are held under different names or in different named sections Windows ME users The com ports DTR becomes active as soon as the computer is switched on This means that if one is using the PTT line DTR to control a rig the rig will go straight into the transmit mode at this stage To resolve issue see the Microsoft Knowledgebase article Q285894 at support microsoft com default aspx scid kb EN US q285894 Right Click Auto Fill Data is not showing up in the Log The soundcard receive window has the ability to auto fill in in the Logbook Entry Window By simply right clicking text in the receive window you are presented with a list of fields choose from and the selected data is sent to that field see the soundcard section for detailed instructions on this For this feature to work the field you are selecting data for in the right click list must be one of the fields in the Logbook Entry Window for the data to properly transfer RADIO CONTROL Popup Window Error The BandPlan has no entries that match a frequency of xx The band has not been changed This error is caused by several things but the bottom line is that Logger32 wasn t able to read the frequency response from the radio corre
75. 0 means LSB 01 means USB Next 02 2 4 03 1 8 04 05 05 25 all are 6 3 mHz IF filter positions If you set the last value to 06 this toggles the narrow 9 mHz filter meaning if it is off it will go on and if it is on it will go we did not invent the code we just report it Here are some of the useful Omni VI commands LSB mode hexcommand FE FE 04 E0 06 00 FD USB mode hexcommand FE FE 04 E0 06 01 FD FSK mode hexcommand FE FE 04 E0 0604 FD If you use FSK rather than AFSK Each of these can be combined with filter selection codes In fact to set the filter you must specify a mode in the command The following all specify LSB LSB 2 4 kHz hexcommand FE FE 04 E0 06 00 02 FD LSB 1 8 kHz hexcommand FE FE 04 EO 06 00 03 FD LSB 0 5 kHz hexcommand FE FE 04 EO 06 00 04 FD LSB Narrow hexcommand FE FE 04 E0 06 00 06 FD Toggles the narrow 9 mHz IF filter on and off For an Omni VI with two narrow filters LSB Narrow 2 hexcommand FE FE 04 EO 06 00 07 FD Toggles the second narrow 9 mH filter Remember the QSX command works in all modes USB LSB and FSK so there is no need to call up special tricks to split Configuring Push To Talk PTT Scott E Thile K4SET and Jim Hargrave W5IFP This topic covers transmit receive T x Rx switching using PTT controlled by Logger32 If you want to set up PC control of your transceiver go to Interfacing a Radio for PC Control and if you need to interface your PC sou
76. 10 23 2001 231070 10 23 01 2a 102001 10 23 2001 W 23 Oct 01 Oct 23 01 23 Oct 2001 Oct 23 2001 23 October 01 October 23 01 23 October 2001 October 23 2001 The TIME FORMAT menu item allows the user to select the Time format to be used by Logger82 from a drop down menu list 2304 29 59 23 59 235959 ea od od ws The RADIO menu item allows the user to Setup the Radio Port Configuration Show the Radio Debug window Use Narrow filters for CW Open and Close toggle the Radio port The CD ROM menu item allows the user to select a CDROM Callbook to be used by Logger32 from the following list None RAC QRZ Hamcall The AUTO LOOKUP menu item allows the user to configure Logger 32 to automatically search for callsign data from one of the following selections when data is entered into the Logbook Entry window Auto www qrz com Lookup Auto CD ROM Lookup Auto Golist lookup The FREQUENCY menu item allows the user to select the Frequency format to be used by Logger32 from a drop down menu list w Show frequency Display amp Log frequency w Show frequency in MHz TOO0H2 resolution 14 200 Show frequency in MHz TOOK resolution 14 2000 Show frequency in MHz 10Hz resolution 1 4 20000 Show frequency in MHz TH2 resolution 14 200000 Show frequency in KHz TOO0HK2 resolution 14200 Show frequency in KHz 100H2z resolution 14200 0 Show frequency m KHz 10Hz resolution 14200 00 Show frequency in K
77. 13 00 H13 30 14 00 14 00 14 30 15 00 15 00 15 30 H15 45 16 00 06 00 16 00 16 30 00 anada Central Standard Time exico standard Time entral America Standard Time astern standard Time o Eastern standard Time 54 Pacific Standard Time Atlantic Standard Time of Westem Standard Time Pacific 54 Standard Time ewtaundland Standard Time E South America Standard Time 54 Eastern Standard Time Greenland Standard Time Mid Atlantic Standard Time zores standard Time ape Werde Standard Time MIT Standard Time reenwich Standard Time entral Europe Standard Time entral European Standard Time Romance Standard Time VY Europe Standard Time W Central Africa Standard Time Europe Standard Time Egypt Standard Time FLE Standard Time GITE Standard time erusalem Standard Time outh Africa Standard Time Russian Standard Time Arab Standard Time E Aftica Standard Time Arabic Standard Time ran Standard Time Arabian Standard Time included but is 5 00Hr diference a TILER ToS O O Z zZ D E Tn n o joala ma 1 T w jojg T 5 JABR 7 w foo oo 2 5 e Z z co z va S Z cL Ol o Aaea 3 2 2 oa S T D P anistan Standard Time Ekaterinburg Standard Time ndia Standard Time ri lanka Standard Time Central Asia Central Time anmar Standard Time E Asia Standard Time m CI man irai LU a a co a cal m CIE co x 1 SR in r a on Te T or i aS Jar i a Ta cJ aag 3 3
78. 2 you need to complete each of the following steps in order to transfer without problems Step 1 Save the Existing Logbook Load Logger16 and select the Print menu button to open the Print Backup Options dialog box Print Backup Options Print Labels 7 To Printer Print SWL labels Complete logbook E Print QSL labels Partial Logbook Print Blank labels I Clear Siw label file E Portrait O Landscape Clear QSL label file Select label style Complete logbook ee All Contig files From the Backup panel select Complete Logbook and then select ADIF format Logbook Backup selection x Unless you specity otherwise this selection will create a file with a ASC filename extension This i an internal Logger format this recommended wou use this format for backup of your Logbook or esport to other Logger programs ie Logs to a WSL manager also using Logger Ue ana Unless you specify otherwise this selection will create a file with a UGF filename extension This format ts for limited use The UGE format does not contain all the data from the Logbook Use this format for special puropses only ie export to on line website search engines ADIF format ness you specity othenwise this selection will feate a file with a ADI filename extension ized Logbook data importesport format To move m o from Logger to other Logging programs that support the ADIF format use this format This
79. 2M S56 59 405 05 Jan 02 23 16 00 474 OA 14 005 240M iy 399 406 0S Jan 02 23 58 00 ZFAMT ZF 14 082 20M RTTY 599 407 06 Jan 02 11 48 00 GD4KIN sD 14 070 20M PSK 399 406 OB Jan 02 16 37 14 JY9NMA J Y 20 099 10M RTTY 599 rE OB Jan 02 19 51 00 BVB JA E 14 165 20M SSB 59 Radio Rotor Keper Telnet 2 Jan 02 17 32 21 Cluster A list of the Standard Times names used in the database is shown in Table 1 Note that some Standard Time names are marked with a indicating those that are not within Win98 Win 98SE or Win NT and therefore if a local time is required from these zones some of the countries within the database will need to be modified Table 2 shows those prefixes effected and gives a suggested alternative Please note that these suggestions are considered the best alternative They will NOT necessarily give correct local time throughout the whole year See also an alternative suggestion below NOT in Win 98 98SE or NT Note No local time will be shown unless alternative selected Offset from DST GMT Applied Microsoft Standard Name 12 00 amoa Standard time awalan Standard Time laskan Standard Time 10 00 09 00 08 00 07 00 07 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 05 00 05 00 05 00 04 00 04 00 04 00 03 30 03 00 03 00 03 00 02 00 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 11 00 11 00 11 00 11 00 11 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 13 00 13 00 13 00
80. 3 Select the type of file you wish to produce Three types are available ADI CSV or CSV without header lines The CSV type file is useful if you wish to import the data into a spreadsheet like Excel and the CSV without header can be used as a mailmegre source in Microsoft Word for the generation of QSL labels 3 Click on Start 4 Either select a file name from those presented OR type in a new file name 5 Click on Ok in the file window 6 Select one of the three options to replace the file to append to the existing file or Cancel 7 You are then advised that XX QSO s have been copied into the QSL file Do you want to flag these QSOs as having been sent to QSL Yes No Logger32 will now have created the appropriate file NOTE If there are no appropriate QSOs flagged in the log a message to that effect will be displayed Changing Logbooks Geoff Anderson G3NPA As well as having the ability to use one log for multiple users Logger32 will also support multiple logs Using the menu item File Change Logbook additional logs may be entered EA Loggers Logbook selection GaNFA C Program Files Loggerd2 DEEI Lh a GL Using the Browse button will give the user the ability to swap to a different file Log file MUST have the name xxxx ISD Please note that files such as Country IOTA32 County and Alias ISD file are NOT logbook files these are database files used within Logger32 To create a new logbook file go
81. 4 1800 02 Aug 01 i 14 2021 03 Aug 01 l 14 2530 03 Aug 01 i 14 2000 11 Aug 01 IKL 14 2016 30 Aug 01 14 1929 Os Sep 01 14 1980 15 Sep 01 14 2252 u O m Dl nm h ri A A Ad T Observe that this action shows ALL the stations logged with the prefix 9K Left clicking on an empty grid in the Worked Confirmed window will display a Mixed Mode listing of all logbook entries for the selected band regardless of mode If you do not have an empty grid space in the Worked Confirmed window then the click on empty gray rectangle in the upper left hand corner of the table to achieve the same result as below 2 Oct O14 IKJ i 20 5461 30 Mar 02 26 5006 25 Sep l 9K 2US4 24 9550 11 Aug 01 SKALE 16 1152 16 Aug 01 15 1150 15 Sep OO er 14 0705 15 Mar 01 IKALE l 14 0532 22 Wiar 01 IKALE i 14 0837 i i oa ama d a aa rar a A Ad O A M Note Right clicking on the Show Country Worked window when it is visible will display the Grid Layout Setup window allowing user to customize the display in the same way as the Logbook and Previous QSOs windows Left clicking on any of the QSOs in window will bring up the Previous QSOs window and the Logbook Page window with appropriate data AND it will highlight the in the Logbook Previous QSOs Window B Charles Sutton W1MCP When you enter a full callsign in the LogBook Entry Window Logger32 queries your logbook and locates any previous QSOs had and displays them in the Previous QSOs wind
82. 4h This year 07 April 2002 Daylight Ends On The Last Sunday In October 4t 2 00 00 Atl This year 2 October 2002 The functionality of this feature is dependent on the availablility of the Atomic Time Server In the event the time server is down either temporarily or perminently there are changes you can make to reconnect The URL for the time server is stored in the Logger32 ini file which can be edited with any ASCII editor such as notepad for the Atom Clock section and edit the line ClockAddress time a timefreq bldrdoc gov replace the URL listed to the right of equal sign with a different time server URL iP Logger32_INI Notepad File Edit Search Help ComPot COM1 S600 n5 1 Radio Type Kenwoad all Foll Interval 1000 Jlcom Address U0 set DTR High 1 Poet RTS High 1 frmPretixPickList Window Top 46U5 Window Lett 5415 Atom Clock TimeOut 10 ClockSddress utcnist colorado edu The National Institute of Standards and Technology maintains a list of Time Servers on their webpage www boulder nist gov timefreq service time servers html Here is the list of time servers as of May 2002 Name IP Address Location time a nist gov time b nist gov time a timefreq bldrdoc gov time b timefreq bldrdoc gov time c timefreg bldrdoc gov utcnist colorado edu time nist govm time nw nist gov nist1 datum com nist1 dc glassey com nist1 ny glassey com nist1 sj glassey com nist1 aol c
83. 6 17 19 09 25 03 37 00 03 26 16 Time Off 00 00 76 16 46 17 19 09 23 03 37 00 03 26 16 Freg 20305 00 20496 00 20119 00 086 00 146560 00 Band 25L S Gs Date 95L R O R Date 04 Apr OU Aa toe n 10M ne Grid layout Grid Font highlight Grid background highlight He eae eee Hame 10 May OO Charlie 6 Sep 00 Charlie Charlie Charlie Charlie Choosing Grid font highlight will change the color of the font when you highlight a row as shown above in red Choosing Grid background highlight will change the background color of a row when you highlight it as shown above in Choosing the Grid layout will allow you to change the Column Header Names the justification of the columns and the order in which the columns are displayed Please refer to the section Grid Layout Setup for complete details Hal Miller KB1ZQ The Telnet Window consists of three 3 tab panels the VHF panel Telnet panel q Data Terminal panel Telnet Window Right clicking on any of the tabs displays the Telnet Tabs popup menu You have connected to the WC Utah D Packet CLA Cluster Mode HAPPY HOLIDAYS de WCT and Nosh For Internet Web Browser based access and USER MANUAL information point tw ctii grg cam kblzg de ncj 14 Jan 2002 001354 clx gt This menu allows the operator to select various font and color values The selected fonts and colors are the same for all three tab panels
84. 7 150 8 200 9 300 0 ascbaud CW MODE The CW mode selection macro is CONTROL C Return to command prompt Echo on See your transmitted text cw 15 CW speed of 15 wom The following KAM CW instructions can be used in Logger32 CONTROL_CE Returns to standby after transmit buffer is sent also puts If linked CONTROL_CL CONTROL_CR CONTROL_CT CONTROL_CU CONTROL_CX CONTROL Cn locks transmit and receive speeds Immediately returns to receive mode regardless of TX buffer state Enters transmit mode sending key strokes immediately Unlocks the speed to allow tracking Returns to command mode n CW speed as per manual 0 9 An example macro to call CQ is CONTROL_CT Enter transmit mode cq cq cq de mycall Call cq 3 times followed by my call cq cq cq de mycall and again cq cq cq de mycall and again CONTROL_CE Return to standby An example contest macro is CONTROL_CT call ur 599 oc001 serialnum de mycall CONTROL_CE Some TNCs require a short delay after issuing an CONTROL x instruction or TNC command For example the KAM TNC does like a CONTROL_CT instruction to put it in transmit mode immediately following a CW speed set command The KAM sequence CONTROL_CX CW speed CONTROL_CT does not work correctly The TNC takes several milliseconds to set the TNC speed before it is ready to receive input so the CONTROL_CT instruction must be delayed The Logger32 macro statement delay
85. A Like Zakanaka Logger32 and these Help files are the product of an experiment Bob Furzer K4CY decided that he would enlist assistance of other amateurs in creating the package Work started on the project in early July 2001 and the following coordinated via the Internet to assist in the development of the program and to create the Help files Development Team Geoff Anderson GBNPA Richard B Drake W3ZJ Joseph Edmonds N4NQY Robin Trebilcock GW3ZCF Bob Shaw WOIM Hal Miller KB1ZQ Charlie Sutton WiMCP Danny Conner KD5UJ Barry Gross N1EU Brian Mury VE7NGR Mike Mace VK38SU Hew Lines VASHU Jim Hargrave WSIFP Beta Test Team Arild Fredriksen LAS5WX Karel Karmasin OK2FD Joe White KE4TV Aki Yoshida JA1NLX Barry Winch VE3NAV Pawel Staszewski SP7PS Del Seay KL7HF Davide Lavelli IK2AGX John Bent GOFSM Andy McLellan VE9DX Jim Steel MOZAK Ivan Ivanov LZ1PJ Stan Engel WA2UET Jim Pickett K5LAD Haruo Hal Kojima JE4IVN Marek Niedzielski SP7DQR Polish translation Peter Velnet N8SYEL Villi Sigurjonsson TF38VS Mike Barrette N1GPV Jorge Enrique Knull LU4YAO Travis Fitzgerald VE8WO Yukito Kit Fukui JI1 ANI Per Einar Dahlen LA7DFA lan Morrison VESIEM Arne Andersson SM5CNQ Toni Perez EA1NK Palle Dall Larsen OZ1LHK Brian Bowers GOVAX Tomek Barbachowski SP5UAF Someday we will meet each other in person but for the moment we hope that we have continued the helping ham tradition that passed to us b
86. BUT occasionally especially where the prefix modifier is like FR T or KHO M the determined location CQZ etc can be incorrect if other formats of entry are used Logger32 has in fact 7 more input panes that the user can configure for him herself To do this right click on any of the entry to produce a menu Select Setup Show user fields Show all user fields This will activate all the user definable panes If you require one or a special combination of panes then these may be selected using the Show User option Change offset orl Antenna gitechon Etits Show all user held ej Logbook L Ls entre ema ea ote oaa 2 He eo z ee aia aR gE ner bare A on a S E E ON st yaa anlar a o che muah aoe ate ato 7 A F mE ridin Ee a LE E 7 A e ET i Ts i AF i Beene se lS LIS cE Pa mall EAT toa Tie are ee ato ee a u aTe Ts ee ae a as K a a s a a A E E ene E Opt Peay ae Sta N TESS p 2 a a ce one a PASE O ests i a erin tee aS 3 e A a Ceti ae T SFr F a a ALMA z PO S eta Cee ec aah Ra cio si om bee a a a a I acs a a E mgt y a s SRT O EO COFI e E a EE it erage Cl ee oe Seay eas Paon eee Sree a oe i AO oe ee ee T oe ae a User Take note of the location of the 7 user panes and their numbering Each one of these panes can be set up to accep
87. Backcolor uea Forecolor Mouseover Forecolar ROTOR OF Cancel Reset Backcolors Reset Cancel all settings Log Entry operation When the focus is on the Log Entry window and a callsign has been entered in the Call field entering a CTRL_ A will send the positioning information to the antenna controller Rotor Port status The status is displayed when the mouse is over the rotor box in the lower status bar HyGain QCU 1 Comm 2 Open Rotor Telnet Sntenna H Setup Date Time and Frequency Formats Hew Lines VA3HU Logger provides the capability for the user to select the display format of the Date Time and radio Frequencies from a pre defined list of formats These formats are selected by first selecting the Setup Menu then selecting the Date Format Time Format or Frequency menu items respectively Setup Radio Control Hew Lines VA3HU Many modern transceivers provide the capability to interface with the serial COM ports of computers to send and receive data software applications Interfacing your transceiver with Logger32 will provide you with the following features Automatic display and logging of the radio Frequency Band and Mode of operation Automatic setting of the radio Frequency and Mode to that of a station that is selected in the DX Spots window Setting up Logger382 to interface with a transceiver is very simple From the Main Menu select the Setup menu From the Setup Menu select the
88. C 735 uses 04 the IC 761 uses 1E See the topic Interfacing a Radio for PC Control for information The Omni VI address is 04 by default but it can be changed in the radio Setting a Frequency The following example commands use a default address of 4E IC 706MkIl Set LSB on 80 Meters Put the following in a macro button and execute the macro The commands are hexadecimal numbers so 0 is zero not the letter O hexcommand FE FE 4E E0 06 00 FD Set LSB do not select a filter use the one currently selected qsy3581 50 Change radio frequency to 3581 5 kHz Set USB on 20 meters qsy14069 50 Change radio frequency to 14069 50 kHz hexcommand FE FE 4E E0 06 01 01 FD Set USB with a wide filter The order of the qsy and hex commands is not important Some Filter Selection Commands USB wide hexcommand FE FE 4E E0 06 01 01 FD USB narrow hexcommand FE FE 4E EO 06 01 02 FD LSB wide hexcommand FE FE 4E EO 06 00 01 FD LSB narrow hexcommand FE FE 4E EO 06 00 02 FD FSK hexcommand FE FE 4E E0 06 04 FD FSK narrow hexcommand FE FE 4E EO 06 04 02 FD Ten Tec Omni VI commands Here is a similar example for the Omni VI LSB 0 5 kHz 6 3 IF filter hexcommand FE FE 04 EO 06 00 04 FD The Omni VI manual documents the mode but not the filter codes Here is what you need to know Each command begins with hexcommand FE FE 04 E0 assuming you left the radio address at the default Right after E0 06 means set mode filter Next 0
89. CONTROL_CT CONTROL_CX CONTROL_CO CONTROL_C1 CONTROL_C2 An example CQ macro is CONTROL_CT PACTOR listening mode for FEC and ARQ The following KAM PACTOR instructions can be used in Logger82 Abort link Break link and stay in standby Returns to standby after transmit buffer is sent also puts If linked Immediately returns to receive mode regardless of TX buffer Selects the next MARK SPACE shift hz Enters transmit mode Returns to command model Sets automatic baud rate Forces 100baud irs Forces 200baud irs Enter transmit mode CQ CQ CQ DE mycall mycall mycall PTOR PSE ARQ KKK CONTROL_CE RTTY MODE CONTROL_CX echo on rtty 45 CONTROL_CE CONTROL_Cl CONTROL_CL CONTROL_CN CONTROL_CR Return to standby The RTTY mode selection macro is Return to command prompt Display transmitted data Enter RTTY mode at 45 baud The following KAM RTTY instructions can be used in Logger32 Returns to standby after transmit buffer is sent also puts If linked Inverts MARK SPACE Sends letters shift characters sends numbers shift characters Immediately returns to receive mode regardless of TX buffer CONTROL_CS Selects the next MARK SPACE shift hz CONTROL CT Enters transmit mode CONTROL CX Returns to command mode CONTROL Cn n baud speed as per manual 0 9 An example CQ macro is CONTROL CT Enter transmit mode CQ CQ TEST DE mycall mycall mycall CONTROL CE Return to
90. Capacitors are 22uF 25W olgnal Mames in brackets for the FT100 refer to the pin names on page 4 of the user manual Free samples of the MAA 232 chip are available fram VVVVV MAAIWEIC COM The 13 8V can be obtained from the pig tail on the FT 100 however a word of caution be very careful that the 13 8v line is not shorted to ground there is no separate fuse on this line and a short WILL disable the transmitter know I ve done it If you are comfortable with this then suggest you use a separate 5v supply Should you manage to short out the 13 8v line drop me an e at barry email com and I ll send you the repair instructions 8 Pin Mini Din Connector An 8 pin mini din male connector is required to interface to the FT 100 The diagram below shows the pin connections FROM WIRING SIDE The pin names correspond with the bracketed names on the circuit diagram above DATA OUT GND DATA IN 13 8V DB9 Connector A female DB9 connector is required at the computer end of the cable The diagram below shows the pin connections FROM THE WIRING SIDE The pin names correspond with the bracketed names on the circuit diagram above TxD RxD Setting Up The Radio No Radio setup is required other than ensuring that the pig tail connector is at its default setting of CAT TUNER This is achieved through changing an internal hardware setting within the FT 100 page 19 of the user manual Setting Up Logger The FT 100 operates with No Parit
91. Computer Input Output IOTA Islands on the Air ITU International Telecommunication Union ITUZ ITU Zone number KEPS Keplerian Elements KHz Kilohertz LED Light Emitting Diode LOTW Logbook of the World an ARRL project LSB Lower SideBand Mb Megabyte MHz Megahertz MMTTY RTTY Encoding and Decoding engine written by Makoto Mori JH3HHT ms Millisecond PC Personal Computer Pfx Prefix PKT Packet PSK31 A digital mode of communications using Phase Shift Keying at 31 baud or about 50 wom PTT Push To Talk QPSK Quaternary Phase Shift Keying RAM Random Access Memory RIT Receiver Incremental Tuning RTTY Radioteletype RSGB The Radio Society of Great Britain RTS Request To Send an RS 232 hardware handshaking signal SSB Single Side Band SSTV Slow Scan Television Transistor Transistor Logic TNC Terminal Node Controller Tx Transmit UQF Some weird Log Format USB Upper Sideband or Universal Serial Bus UTC Coordinated Universal Time VHF Very High Frequency VOX Voice operated switch wpm Words per Minute ZULU Coordinated Universal Time Glossary Hew Lines VA3HU American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII The ASCII character set is used in data processing and communications systems It uses seven bits to represent letters and control characters ASCII Character Codes Chart 1 WS OO ce MO ms OT ee Ge Gs ee ee Be
92. Display Frequency From Radio Logger32 will if computer radio is operating display the frequency from your radio at the bottom of the Rx window The advantage of this feature is that the will change when you shift bands Logger32 will now display on screen information from your radio and use the information for your log and for transmitting information in a QSO Frequency Mode and Band are the primary features that your radio will share with Logger and Logger32 This information can then be used via the Macro feature Using a Commercial Computer Radio Interface You can build an interface to provide hardware isolation and signal reduction in the audio line from the computer to the radio The topic on Interfacing a Radio to the PC Sound Card provides the information you need This interface requires no power but only operates in the transmit audio line The topic Information on the World Wide Web can help you find a commercial interface to operate between your computer sound card and the radio Some interfaces have features such as providing extra connectors and switches to allow you to switch mickrophone and computer and adjustable signal levels so you can set the computer audio at exactly the same level as the microphone audio Each model of interface is different and you must read the instructions for the interface to see how to use it However if your radio interface gets its DC power from the computer over the RTS DSR or DTR lines it m
93. Hz THz resolution 14200 000 The ANTENNA SELECTOR menu item allows the user to configure Logger32 to use an electronic antenna switch to select different antennas for different bands The definition of what antennas to use for what bands is configured in the Setup and Modes section The ROTOR menu item allows the user to interface Logger82 to an antenna rotator using an RS 232 serial interface The DX Spot menu item allows the user to setup Logger32 to send DX Spots from the Logbook Entry Window The user can Select the DX cluster port that the spot will be sent to Enable a Prompt for Comments edit box to put a comment in the spot Format the frequency to be sent with the spot The MAIN MENU menu item allows the user to switch back to the Main Menu bar Toolbar Hew Lines VA3SHU The Logger32 Toolbar provides a set of quick access Tool Buttons allowing the user to select most commonly used Logger32 windows and functions The display of this toolbar is user selectable through the Main Menu View menu item bE Vf7See eS ASBHE 8e BSA Sile The Toolbar is divided into six general areas Toolbar Group One The first group of two buttons allows the user to save in compressed ZIP form Compress Logbooks Compress User Files and Databases Toolbar Group Two ENARE TS a The second group of nine buttons allows the user to display the DX Spots window Following windows as a group Logbook Entry windo
94. IF import summary zi 20505 read 1 records could not be loaded Please see the error file BAD ADI where they have been saved with comment about why they were not loaded The QSOs were loaded with KB1ESS as the default operator iF no OPERATOR Field was read In this example you can see that one QSO was found to be bad and could not be imported Logger32 will generate a file named BAD ADI You should open this file in a text editor such as notepad and make any corrections needed save the file with a name and then import the newly created ADI file Here is an example of the error reporting Error in the lt QSO_DATE xs field lt CALL 5 gt CA1LL lt QSO_DATE 8 D gt 04052002 lt TIME_ON 6 gt 230814 lt MODE 3 gt SSB lt EOR gt The ADIF standard requires the date to be in the format of YYYYMMDD and as you can see this record does not comply For additional information on importing logs please refer to the help topic Transferring Logs from Logger16 and Other Change Operator Geoff Anderson G3NPA If you right click on the Link to topic Logbook Entry Window Logbook Entry window and select Change Operator from the menu the Current Operator dialog box will be displayed Simply enter a new callsign into the edit box or using the drop down select a previously entered callsign and click the Apply button Snap Windows to Size Bob Furzer K4CY Snap Windows to Size is a function that attempts to align and resize all of th
95. In this case we should disconnect microphone when we operate AFSK and disconnect the computer or the interface when we operate phone QPSK Quaternary Phase Shift Keying Operation Andrew J O Brien KB2EOQ QPSK is referred to as an error correcting PSK mode Strictly speaking it is not error correcting in the traditional sense but we ll leave that for another discussion You will find it very useful in copying very weak signals You will also discover that it is used less than BPSK The usual convention among QPSK ers is to use BPSK to establish a QSO and then switch to QPSK You will rarely find someone calling CQ in QPSK mode Some radio amateurs will switch to QPSK if a BPSK QSO with weak signals is producing poor copy PSK veterans will point out however that while QPSK outperforms BPSK when weak signals are the issue QPSK will perform no better than BPSK if noise is the signal limiting condition In the ancient early days of PSK31 in the last century QPSK was used as the mode of choice for some PSK nets but that does appear to be the case in the 21st century Switch to QPSK with the mode pane at the left of the statusbar or with the mode menu selection capx cat cae Hasor op Align TEST OPSE 1922 0 Hz 14068 0768 KHz Simplex Tuning a QPSK Signal Now that you have selected QPSK as your mode you ll need a little practice in tuning in a QPSK signal A QPSK signal looks different in the tuning window
96. It s all automatic and you will scarcely notice it happening In fact the only reason to mention it at all is because we are using radio instead of wires and radio is susceptible to interference from various sources such as lightning static man made noise etc If a burst of static should happen to wipe out a LETTERS SHIFT or FIGURES SHIFT character the characters following will not print correctly until another LETTERS SHIFT or FIGURES SHIFT is received For example suppose you are sending a signal report of 599 but the FIGURES SHIFT character gets wiped by a burst of static Instead of printing 599 the other fellow s computer will print TOO TOO is exactly the same as 599 without FIGURES SHIFT So how can he read what you intended to send It s easy if he knows the secret Here it is look at the top row letter keys on your keyboard QWERTYUIOP Now look just above each key and to the left Each of those number keys is the same as the letter key below and to the right plus the FIGURES SHIFT In our example TOO 599 Likewise the word PIPE if the LETTERS SHIFT were missed would print as 0803 If 0803 lost its FIGURES SHIFT it would print as PIPE Bandwidth and Filters When the bands are nearly empty you can use practically any receiver bandwidth with good success Your SSB filters are between 2 1 and 3 0 kHz wide and as long as no other stations are nearby copy will be fine For optimum performance however less bandwidth is better in
97. Net and AFC are different animals Net controls the transmit frequency AFC controls the receive frequency Be careful about turning Net off in RTTY mode In PSK mode when you turn Net off you will transmit at the same audio that you last used for transmit In RT TY mode you will always transmit at your default HAM mark frequency no matter where you last transmitted The two modes do not operate in the same way Transmitted Characters RTTY has its own alphabet the Baudot code which differs from the newer Varicode used for PSK31 First transmitted text is always in UPPERCASE letters Second not all the characters on your computer keyboard are supported by RT TY s Baudot The supported characters are ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY2Z 1234567 89 0 amp You will not be able to use such characters as an asterisk ampersand amp or the symbol that is used in e mail addresses The symbol used in North America to denote number is also not supported The dollar sign and the sign are likewise not available If you enter characters that cannot be transmitted these characters will not change color if Settings Transmit buffer indicator is on This is because the characters are not transmitted in RI TY mode RT TY Basics has a discussion on the way that Baudot RTTY encodes letters and figures Most people type faster than Baudot is sent You can set the unsent and sent characters in the Tx buffer to be different colors so y
98. Notice QSO 1 the font color has changed to red and the cell background has changed to light blue Choosing the Grid layout will allow you to change the column header names the justification of the columns and the order in which the columns are displayed Please refer to the section Link to topic Grid Layout Setup Grid Layout Setup for details Modifying QSO information You can change the data in any cell by left clicking in that call and simply typing in the correct information To change QSL related information right click in the appropriate row and select Edit QSO info A pop up window will appear shown here CAILL at 02 Apr 00 00 00 on 10M SSB QSL Sent i Date Sent QSL Aevd r Date Acvd WSL Via Message You can change the data that is displayed add a QSL manager or bureau or add a QSL message The message section will appear in the ADIF QSL_Message field Many QSL printing programs will print any data entered in this field onto your card or label Another unique field is the Notes field Open the Notes window by clicking on its icon in the main toolbar Then enter a in the Logbook Entry Window Any notes associated with the callsign will be displayed along with the QSO date To enter a note for this particular QSO right click on the grid in the Notes window and choose Add Note Add your note to the pop up window then close it Finish entering your QSO in the Logbook Entry Window and press Enter whe
99. O10 AF 011 AF Mixed Mode jal Operators Amsterdam amp St Paul lslands Ascension Island Canary lelands Leeward Islands Diego Garcia lsland Comore leland Crozet Islanda Europa laland Bioco Fernando Poo laland Glorioso lalanda dauan De Bless lAr OTAS worked 17 4 J OTAS confirmed 15 2 2 Total of 19 0748 worked 18 confirmed on Mixed Mode CQ Zones Mixed Hode Mixed Mode 0 CO ones worked 0 confirmed US State Info Mixed Mode Alaska AL W4 Alabama E AR AS Arkansas C AY AF Arizona C CA WE California Ea Ea CO AA Colorado CT oo Connecticut C DE wis Delaware FL vid Florida Wy GA W4 Georgia E HI KHE Hawaii E Pe nnn S el el Ha x states worked 10 16 ae a1 27 States confirmed 4 17 ae 29 35 Mixed Mode Total of 43 US State worked 43 confirmed on Mixed Made Countries DXCC Continents DACC Mined Mode UES Countr CAZ TUZ 10M Tend 1 She ah 20h SOM 40h 50h Oh Miltary Order of Matta Zo Minerva Reef Spratly lslands 50 Monaco ot Aqeleqa amp St Brandan 53 Mauritius Is 53 Rodriguez 53 Equatorial Guinea 47 Pagalu leland 52 Fiji lslands 56 SDA Conway Reef 56 SNR Eat ima lelsanme SA Altime Countries Worked Altime Countries Confirmed Current Countries Worked Current Countries Contirmed All time Countries 393 0 Countries worked 0 are confirmed Current Countries 335 0 Co
100. QSO entered with a different callsign This allows you to maintain everything in one single log Logger32 checks the operator of each QSO to determine if it should be included when generating statistical info and award tracking information You can also export the entire logbook or a portion based on a single operator You change the current operator callsign by right clicking in the LogBook Entry Window and selecting Change operator If you prefer to use different logs you have the option to create multiple logs as in original Logger From the Main Menu select File select change Logbook A pop up window will appear requesting additional information You must supply a filename which be unique and the path you want the file stored in After switching logs you must run a recalculation to reset the statistic files to match the current log You can run a recalc by selecting Tools from the Main Menu then selecting Database maintenance then click on Recalculate statistics If you choose to maintain multiple log files you can change them by selecting File from the Main Menu NOTE Because of the way tracking and stats are handled you can only have one 1 instance of a log name per computer Just be sure each log has a different name There are 46 different ADIF compliant fields available for your use You have the option of displaying as many or as few as you wish as well as the order in which they appear Logbook Page Date Time On
101. R FEC BPSM CLOVER FEC OPoM CLOVER FEC 3PSM CLOVER FEC 8P2A CLO CRO CLO Cho CLO GLO PSK31 Pokoi SSTV DOL SOLV SOL SST DOLV FLN So LV SO LV S9 LV Do LV SSLN SSTV Do LY DO LV SOL SolV SST Sow So LV Sp Ly FEC 16P4A ARO BP M ARO QP SM ARO 8 PSM ARQ 8P2A ARQ 16P4A BPSK OPK Martinl Martin2 Scottiel ScottiezZ ScottieDX AVIBW AVT24 AVT9O AVT94 AVT188 HOL HOZ Po Ro E7 PD50 PDI PDILZAO PD160 PD180 PD240 CLOVER FEC 16P4A CLOVER ARO BPSM CLOVER ARQ BPSM CLOVER ARQ 8PSM CLOVER ARQ 8P2A CLOVER ARQ 16P4A Pokol Brook Poko OPok So Ly SSTV SIV DOL poly DOL SSTV SSTV SSTV Sow iad DOL ODEN SSTV SSTV SIV DOL DOLYy SOLV SSTV SSTV SSIV Martin Martin2 Scottiel Scottie2 ScottieDX AVT B amp W AVT24 AVT90 AVT94 AVT188 HOL HOZ PS eee P7 PDSO PD9Q PULZO PDEFOO PD LO PDZ40 So LV SSTV Sol V SSIV Solly SoLy oS IV DOL Galy oSoIV cog kay Do LY SSTV feats Tr 27 POQ Robot BW8 Robot BW12 Robot BW24 Robot BW36 Robot C12 Robot C24 Robot C36 Robot cC72 Wrasc2 30 WraSC2 60 WraSC2 120 WraSC2 1380 FAX480 AMF AX PMP AX SO LV DOL Doly SLV SOLV SSTV SOL
102. SConfig is running you will see a series of tabs Go to the rightmost tab Startup and write down every program that has a check mark next to it This is your insurance that you can restore the old setup You could create a backup the General tab but we will use the simple approach here q1 Nowclick on every program in Startup and you will remove each check mark Return to the General tab and click Selective Startup Press OK and reboot the computer The only programs that will appear in your system tray at the bottom right of the Windows display will be those that bypass Startup and still work themselves into the boot procedure Try Logger32 At this point you should run System Monitor and see how much CPU usage you have Begin a log of this usage and make notes about what uses a lot of CPU power At this point nothing is running in your computer except the operating system Windows This is a good time to exercise and see whether it runs Be sure to use all the features that you can use and do this for a while Especially try RI TY use BPF Notch transmit you do not have to actually put a signal on the air and move the cursor Switch among all modes BPSK QPSK Tune RTTY using both techniques Bring up some macros Restore Programs Go back to the Startup Tab and selectively add those programs that you really want to run all the time such as a virus checker sound card controls and possibly power saver monitoring software R
103. SK first go to RT TY mode and then set your AFC to Free To do this click Setup AFC ATC PLL Tab click Free in the AFC area at the left Click OK to save this value Now turn on AFC on the RTTY toolbar When you click a to copy it both the mark and space shift is the distance between them can vary and the computer will automatically adjust and shift so reception is as good as it can be There is no need for the XY display so you can turn it off at the RTTY toolbar to reduce CPU usage An interesting note is that the fast Fourier transform FFT processing that underlies the XY display continues to take place during transmit Turning off the XY display decreases the CPU load during both receive and transmit Note Be careful turning off the entire tuning window in the View menu does not stop the processing for the XY display You turn off the XY display at the RTTY toolbar Turn off RTTY Notch The RT TY Notch function is invoked by left clicking the mouse with the cursor in the analog frequency display area Examination with the Windows System Monitor reveals that Notch is a heavy user of CPU resources Turn Off RTTY Receive BPF The bandpass filter also is a heavy user of resources so if you can avoid this you will ease the CPU load You may want to between BPF and Notch if you occasionally have problems Turn Off RTTY Oversampling Turn off the oversampling mode of the limiter Click Setup Demodulator Tab and uncheck the Over Samplin
104. T TY 1 To copy a macro from PSK to RTTY mode 2 Open the macro for editing in PSK mode right click the macro button 3 Leave the macro open for editing 4 Switch modes to RTTY 5 Click OK to save it as a RTTY macro Example Macros Here are a few examples for you to cut and paste into the available RT TY macro buttons Returning aCQ call de mycall Smycall kn Starting conversation FB name The name here is Andy QTH is Fredonia New York Located about 45 miles south west of the city of Buffalo Over So name BTU call de mycall K My Station change to suit your need Station at this end is a Kenwood T2000 running 30 watts into two stacked 7 element Yagis at 150 feet Software is Logger32 version by Bob Furzer Also using MMTTY by Mako JE3HHT as the RTTY engine within Logger32 73 Log So name Thanks for the nice QSO Will say 73 now QSL via bureau call de mycall log 73 mycall sk Example RTTY QSO CQ CQ CQ de P5DX P5DX P5DX PSE K You would click on macro Returning a CQ which would send P5DX DE KB2EOQ KB2EQQ KN your own call sign would be inserted here Here is the response KB2EOQ DE P5DX HELLO THANKS FOR ANSWERING MY CALL BAND IS QUIET TODAY NAME HERE IS JAN JUST HERE IN P5 LAND ON BUSINESS You would then click on macro Starting conversation which would send FB JAN THE NAME HERE IS ANDY QTH IS FREDONIA NEW YORK LOCATED ABOUT 45 MILES SOUTHWEST OF THE CITY OF BUFFALO NY Y
105. TATS WINDOW Logbook usage gauge Logger32 calculates your total usage of the available space in the logbook based ob cluster usage Disk spaced is grabbed in blocks one at a time as needed up to a maximum of 16 380 blocks then the considered full Keep in mind that the logbook is dynamic which means that the more fields you store data in for a QSO the more room it uses in the logbook This is more efficient than a fixed format which would allocate the same amount of space for each QSO without regard for the amount of actual data you store LOGBOOK ENTRY WINDOW If you use Logger32 to control your radio and are manually changing the VFO you may see a popup warning window The band had no entries that match a frequency of 00 Mhz The Band and Mode have not been To resolve this issue make a catch all entry at the bottom of your Band Plan covering the frequency range 0000 to 100 000 or higher For example 10M USB 000000 100 000000 LSB N Can t access the Lookup Tables Only the user defined fields 2 3 5 6 amp 7 can be set to show a icon next to the field If for example your setting up the IOTA field be sure to use one of the field numbers listed above and activate Show Help Button option SOUND CARD DATA WINDOW Previous users of Zakanaka The macro s in Logger82 are the same as Zakanaka You can copy your macros from the Zakanaka ini file and paste them into the appropriate area of the Logger32 ini fi
106. Time Oft Frec Sent Recd Mode Submode O27 Apr 00 00 00 16 00 00 16 20305 00 59 59 SSB 05 Apr O00 23 06 14 2308 14 20443 00 oF 59 SoH T OF Apr 00 00 16 07 00 16 07 20305 00 59 59 SSH OF Apr OO 00 30 31 OO 30 31 20305 00 59 59 558 59 59 SSH 59 59 555 59 59 SSB oT 55 SSH G G r T OF Apr 00 00 31 08 00 31 08 20305 00 0S Apr 00 00 16 21 00 16 21 20305 00 OS Apr 00 12 18 57 121357 20459 00 0S Apr 00 22 21 16 2221 16 20391 00 jeee rod rod food ad ad al bod Many of the columns in the logbook can be sorted By clicking on a column heading Logger will display your QSOs in ascending order sorted on that column When you select a column sort that column s header will be displayed in red QSO in the example above When you select a column to sort Logger32 will only display QSOs with data in the sorted field For example if you sort IOTA then only QSOs with an IOTA entry will be displayed NOTE Change your sort to a mandatory field such as QSO or to show all QSOs in your logbook If you choose to display more fields than can be displayed in the window you will see a scrollbar at the bottom of the window your log exceeds the number of lines that can be displayed in the window you will notice a scrollbar on the right of the window There are 6 buttons that you can click on From top to bottom they are move to top of the logbook move up one page move up one line move down one line move down one page move to the botto
107. Tx tail Ww RITT Send word out PSK Send all lowercase Unshift On Space In the topic Receiving RTTY we discuss setting unshift on space UOS for receive It is possible for you to set your transmitted signals to be friendly to Someone receiving you with UOS The default for RTTY is to transmit numbers this way FIGS 599 599 LTRS good signal However if the other person has UOS on he or she will print 599 TOO good signal You can change your transmitted signal so you send FIGS 599 FIGS 599 LTRS good signal resulting in 599 599 good signal Here is how to set the RTTY engine to transmit this way Use the RTTY toolbar Setup and select the Tx Tab In the middle of the display there is a checkbox for UOS Check this box and you will transmit a FIGS character whenever you try to transmit a number after having sent a space PTT Watchdog Timer Logger82 incorporates a watchdog timer for RTTY transmit This timer works for all methods of transmit receive control because operates at the software level When the time is exceeded Logger32 leaves transmit mode This should drop your VOX send software command to put your radio in receive and or open or close the COM port connection you may be using for PTT control To set the timer click Settings RTTY Watchdog timer delay and put in the number of seconds that Logger32 can stay in mode A value of zero 0 turns off the timer and it will not operate The default value is 60 seconds If
108. V poly SoTVv So lV Doly oo LY So LV PD290 Robot Robot Robot Robot Robot Robot Robot Robot B amp W 8 B amp W 12 B amp W 24 BW36 Colour 12 CoLour 24 Colour36 Colour 72 Wraasesc 2 30 WraaseSC 2 60 WraaseSC 2 WraaseSC 2 FAX 480 AMF AX PMP AX 120 180 Tips Tricks and Troubleshooting B Charles Sutton W1MCP and Geoff Anderson G3NPA GLOBAL Snap There are 8 child windows that can be opened inside the main window Once you have positioned and sized them as you like click the SNAP button on the toolbar to fine tune their alignment Right click menus All of the windows have menus that are accessed by right clicking in them Even small items like clock in the lower left hand corner have a right click menu with options you can try Sharing Database Files It was common practice among users of Logger 16 to share their database files This is still possible with Logger32 but due to indexing restrictions it is absolutely imperative that ALL the files be kept and shared together These files include the Country Offset and Alias files They must ALWAYS be distributed as a COMPLELTE of 12 files and must NEVER be broken up NOTE If you use this group of files from another user you must run a recalculate on your logbook The reason is that the stats info is actually hidden in the Countries database files Sharing Database Files It was common practice among users o
109. Welcome Geoff Anderson G3NPA Logger32 hlp Version 18 dated 05 March 2003 WELCOME Welcome to Logger382 a 32 bit logging program written by Bob Furzer K4CY Bob is also the author of Zakanaka and a 16 bit version of Logger Logger382 runs under Windows 95 98 Windows 2000 Windows ME Windows NT and Windows XP these program names are all copyright by Microsoft Corporation At the present time Logger382 is free Logger32 software and Help File copyright information can be found in the Copyrights and License section ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Thanks and acknowledgements are given to Fred Lloyd AA7BQ the founder of QRZ COM who kindly arranged for special no frills access to the worldwide callsign database from this program along with his permission to use the QRZ Logo in Logger32 QRZ COM can be found at www qrz com John Shelton K1XN for his approval allowing the integration of the GoList QSL Manager Database with this program The GoList can be found at www golist net or via e mail at Ssupport golist net Makoto Mori JESHHT for his permission to include his RI TY encoding and decoding engine MMII Y within the Data window software Further information on MMI TY can be found at www qsl net mmhamsoft Aki Yoshida JA1NLX and Hal Kojima JE4IVN for their considerable assistance during the development of the radio control software for use under the Japanese versions of Microsoft Windows History Geoff Anderson G3NP
110. a truetime com nist1 aol va truetime com 129 6 15 28 129 6 15 29 132 163 4 101 132 163 4 102 132 163 4 103 128 138 140 44 192 43 244 18 131 107 1 10 63 149 208 50 216 200 93 8 208 184 49 9 207 126 103 204 207 200 811 113 205 188 185 333 NIST Gaithersburg MD NIST Gaithersburg MD NIST Boulder CO NIST Boulder CO NIST Boulder CO University of Colorado Boulder CO NCAR Boulder CO Microsoft Redmond WA Datum San Jose CA Abovenet VA Abovenet New York City NY Abovenet San Jose CA TrueTime AOL facility Sunnyvale CA TrueTime AOL facility VA There are technical limitations to Windows ability to adjust itself If your PC clock is off by more than a day or two you should manually set the clock as close as possible before running syncronizing your PC Depending on how close you are to a Standard Time Daylight Savings Time change you may have to syncronize twice Again this is only if your PC is drastically out of sync Geoff Anderson G3NPA Flag QSOs for QSLing Flag QSOs for QSLing This button determines whether your QSOs will be flagged for the QSL file If selected depressed all QSOs entered into the Logbook Entry Window will be flagged for export to the QSL file Note If you have the QSL highlight set under Setup Highlight QSL to be printed then you will immediately see this reflected the log once the QSO is entered Flag QSOs for eQSL This button determines whet
111. above is recommended Setup Menu Flags Windows XP Limitation There are several drop down menus located on the Main Setup Menu Bar that display your current settings These menus are the Date Format Time Format CDRom Frequency and DX Spot you are using Windows XP and select one of these menus you may not see the check mark next to the setting you chosen To refresh the menu and display the checkmark simply drag your mouse cursor down the list When you setting you had previously selected the check mark will reappear The check mark will remain until Logger32 is shut and restarted Stats window chopped off on bottom This problem has only been observed when running Logger82 on XP To fix open the screen display properties for XP then select Appearance and then select Advanced Click on the Title Bar or select Active Title bar under item and change the font size to 8 then OK or accept the change It seems they changed font size in the title bar to a 10 point font in XP while others used an 8 point font SYSTEM RELATED lt is recommended that the latest version of Internet Explorer be installed Files that may need to be updated to run Logger 32 COMDLG32 0CX Windows System32 v 6 0 84 18 MSCOMM32 0CX Windows System32 v 60 81 69 MSIMG32 DLL Windows System32 v 2 0 2600 0 MSWINSCK OCX Windows System32 v 6 0 89 88 RICHTX32 0CX Windows System32 v 6 0 88 4 SIZERONE OCX Windows System32 v 7 0 0 4 ARBUTTON OCX L32 Dir
112. aill stich comply with the Terms and Conditions of use Having noted what you have to do as part of the installation enter your callsign IN CAPITALS and then click on the bar containing the words I will strictly comply with the Terms and Conditions of use DO NOT FORGET TO RUN THE I O DRIVER PROGRAM Port95nt EXE If you do then control of the radio via a CAT interface the CW machine and the Antenna controller will NOT work 2 Windows On opening Logger32 for the first time it will default to a main window and eight smaller child windows Adjust the main window to your preferred size and then position and size the eight individual child windows within the main window Child windows may be turned off by using the X in the top right of each window and turned on again using the Toolbar icons at the top of the main window 3 Latitude and Longitude of your own location In order for some of the Logger features to work correctly Beam heading and distance and Grid Squares you must the Latitude and Longitude of your location using the Setup User Latitude Longitude dialog box 4 Computer clock Logger32 records times in UTC so it is important to ensure that your PC is set up correctly 1 Double click on the clock time in the Windows system tray to display the computer Date Time Properties 2 Select the appropriate Time Zone for your location and check the small box alongside the words Automatically adjust for daylight saving changes and
113. al setting when using the above interface will usually set your sound card output Volume and Wave Control settings low and your radio s mic gain control is at a little lower than normal for SSB operations If you are unable to control the audio these controls at reasonable levels you very likely need to add attenuation between the sound card output and the rig s mic You can also try using a direct audio input on your accessory jack or rear panel if your rig is so equipped This may avoid your pre amp circuit and be a better choice for signal matching however this may also make it impossible to use your VOX circuit for engaging your transmit and receive modes Some radios do not connect vox to the rear input Once you ve optimized these settings make a note of the positions of your rig controls as well as the Windows Volume and Recording mixer positions You may make changes for other software and operating modes and this makes it easier to reset for Logger32 There is an additional adjustment that you can make to tell Logger32 the actual value of the sound card clock This adjustment holds only for the RI TY mode See the topic Calibrating the Sound Card Note Some commercial interface units get their power from the computer via DIR DSR or RTS lines Logger32 may not work properly with this type of interface You must modify the interface so that it gets power directly from the radio or from some source but does not use the DTR DSR or RTS li
114. and RTTY In RTTY mode it is possible to operate AFSK or FSK FSK has certain advantages but some advanced features are only available using AFSK The Sound Card Data Window provides PSK31 BPSK and QPSK and RTTY capabilities to the operator with minimal hardware Most program settings made from the Sound Card Data Window menu remain the same in all modes when you set a feature in mode it remains that way for other modes Screen operations like fonts colors etc work this way However this is not true for the macro buttons Macro buttons are the same for PSK31 modes but you can have an entirely different set of buttons for RTTY See the section Macros Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons for more information The following screen captures have most of the Sound Card Data Window features implemented New users may want to look over to get an idea of where the controls and displays are located The Soundcard Data Window consists of eight sections The Title bar The Main Menu The RXWindow The Splitter bar The TXWindow The Radio Frequency Display The Tuning window The Programmable Buttons The Status bar T Sound Card Data ae ReWindow menu hidden File Settings Toolbox View Mode Display Aux1 Aux Clear TEE 07 Data The two Auxiliary Windows consist of The Title bar The Menu bar The RXWindow The Status bar Aux Ax Channel 1 EE fae Cs File TJoolBoxr View Mode Clear BPS 1402 0 Hz AFC On
115. and re loaded in the same way If you saved an ADIF file from Logger32 in Step 1 repeat the load process for this file to make the new log complete Step 6 Perform a recalculation lf you have carried out all the steps described above then this step should not be necessary However just to make sure that the log databases are set up correctly and the statistics that come from them are right it is recommended that you perform a recalculation Use Tools Recalculate statistics and then click on the Recalculate button in the Recalc Stats dialog box This step WILL be required if you have deleted some QSOs for any reason after you have loaded them into Logger32 Should you find that your statistics do not match up with those generated by Logger16 then look again at the point specifically raised in Step 2 The quickest way to do this is to look at the logbook and sort it on MODE click on the title and then scroll through the log looking for errors in the mode description Return your logbook to normal by clicking on the title for QSO or date Points to note about the transfer of Logger16 files 1 It has already been pointed out above that some fields exported from Logger16 might not conform to the correct ADIF specification In addition to this Logger16 did not have separate fields for Name QTH and Notes and such items were probably recorded in the Comment field The Logger32 import routine cannot sort this out for you and this has to be a
116. and the other station s display will backspace and erase the character When in conversation with hams for whom English is not their native tongue avoid use of slang colloquialisms and other speech habits that obscure your meaning How s things with you will not mean as much as How are you today Likewise the here is Dave just got home from the salt mine is not as clear as My name is Dave have just got home from work QRX go to the bog need a wicked slash will not have much meaning to non British hams A Discussion of RST RST is the standard READABILITY SIGNAL STRENGTH TONE system used by amateurs worldwide READABILITY 1 Unreadable 2 Barely readable occasional words distinguishable 3 Readable with considerable difficulty 4 Readable with practically no difficulty 5 Perfectly readable SIGNAL STRENGTH 1 Faint signals barely perceptible 2 Very weak signals 3 Weak signals 4 Fair signals 5 Fairly good signals 6 Good signals 7 Moderately strong signals 8 Strong signals 9 Extremely strong signals TONE 1 Sixty cycle AC or less very rough and broad 2 Very rough AC very harsh and broad 3 Rough AC tone rectified but not filtered 4 Rough note some trace of filtering 5 Filtered rectified AC but strongly ripple modulated 6 Filtered tone definite trace of ripple modulation 7 Near pure tone trace of ripple modulation 8 Near perfect tone slight trace of modulation 9 Perfe
117. andplan before doing so If you will be using either a Telnet a VHF packet cluster to gather DX spot information and or you are using a CAT interface to your transceiver then you may wish refer to these sections also 6 Importing your Log Data Import log data from your previous log program as described in the section Importing Logs Non English versions of Windows Non English versions of Windows seem to use the Comma as the decimal delimiter in numeric values like 2 3148 If this Regional Setting is not changed the Microsoft mathematical routines fail so it is MANDATORY that all users ENSURE that the Windows default for the Decimal Symbol is set to a period by 1 Opening the Windows Control Panel 2 Double clicking on the Regional Settings icon 3 Selecting the Numbers tab panel and 4 Ensuring that the Decimal Symbol is a period Setup User Latitude Longitude Geoff Anderson G3NPA In order to set up or change the Latitude and Longitude of your station right click on the Logbook Entry window and select Setup QTH Lat Long menu item to display the Setup Latitude Longitude dialog box dale amuoe i Latitude Longitude in BIA ii 2 of 40556 Enter your Latitude and Longitude in degrees and decimal degrees and chose the units in which you want distance to be then click OK Note that North and West are positive values while East and South are negative values If you prefer to enter Latitude a
118. anel 3 Double click on Display Below you see the Display Properties Window the layout might change from Windows 95 to 98 to 2000 The example Desktop area selected is 1024 X 768 with Small Fonts selected for Font Size Notice that the Desktop area can be resized by clicking on either side of the scale pointer If you re going to try different screen sizes you can check the box Show settings icon on task bar This box requires that you further to Settings and General By making the screen size resolution options available on the tool bar you can to quickly your settings Some configurations require restarting your computer which can take a lot of time Examples of Screen Configurations for Windows ME Display Properties Bi T 2j xj Background Screen Saver Appearance Effects web Setings J Display HEC MultiSync SY on Diamond Viper W550 for Windows 98 Colors True Color 4 bit nm if he OE Cancel Apply With every screen configuration there is an option in Display Settings to select either Large or Small Fonts After changing from Small to Large or Large to Small your system might ask you to restart Windows to make the change effective Note Different versions and releases of Windows and variations in setup may create variations in the exact sequence of commands you must use to get to a screen or display setting option These are Windows operations not Logger32 operations Resizing Wind
119. ansmitting with high or low tones When I use vox the vox line does not drop at the end of transmission it cycles on and off Go into the audio mixer and turn off any unused inputs to the sound card If you are using line input mute the microphone input or turn it down to zero The problem with this solution is that it may turn off your soeaker sound When I try to get Logger32 to copy a signal it jumps to a stronger signal nearby This is the action of the AFC You can turn off AFC in the Statusbar You may have to turn it on occasionally if you lose copy When the other station turns it over Logger32 changes frequency This is the action of the AFC You can turn off AFC in the Statusbar You may have to turn it on occasionally if you lose copy lost one of the windows tuning display or Aux Window If you changed screen resolution it might be off your screen Go back to the old screen resolution gather your windows the middle of your screen and then reconfigure back to the new resolution Some windows may be hidden behind other windows If a window disappears move other windows to see if it is hidden behind them When I press the lt Ins gt or lt Insert gt key to pause the Rx Window all the text disappears and I just see white The lt Ins gt key pauses the incoming Rx text but it turns the background white no choice is allowed This means that if normally view Rx as white letters on some background now you are
120. any value besides zero selected a check mark will appear next to the menu choice RTTY Watchdog timer delay Note The watchdog timer operates only in RT TY mode Setting Audio Levels As in transmitting PSK31 it is important that your transmitted AFSK RTTY tones are not overdriven and distorted Here is a quick adjustment procedure but you should read the topic on transmitting a clean signal It would also help to read the PSK31 transmitting topic Switch your rig to display ALC In transmit mode adjust your transmitted signal to the point where the ALC setting JUST begins to show a slight deflection You can do this with slight changes in your Mic gain and or your sound card volume controls lt is recommended that unless you are using true FSK you set your power output to around 50 If your rig is capable of 100 watts you should set the output to around 50 watts There is more information on this topic in Transmitting a Clean Signal in PSK31 and RTTY This section discusses both the interface hardware you should use and adjustment procedures for setting transmit levels These methods are not always obvious and some operators have had problems without realizing it Normal and Reverse Polarity There is one more important step you have to make sure that your transmitted RTTY signal is the right way up Whether it is right way up depends on two things the sideband selected and the normal inverted setting If you have chosen to trans
121. are displayed using the following columns which are user definable as to font color and size Grid Appearance DX Spot Call sign of the Spotted Station Pfx Country Freq Frequency Comment Free format comments Time Time the spot was posted Origin The Originating Stations Call sign a DX Spots TT a o AM WOLKE oP9YAUO we are too close we 23 07 00 DGBJF FGEAA1IDSH ANNOUNCE SPSXUD can you turn to JM6E 23 10 00 DGBJIF AMNOLME G55 7D what is ur locator y 23 09 00 HA UL Configuring the DX Spot Window makes extensive use of multiple pop up and linked menus Right clicking on the DX Spot window displays a pop up menu that provides the operator with four functions and access to pop up menus The first four menu items provide the following functionality Hold off DX Spots This item is toggled When checked the display of incoming spots is disabled and the DX Spot Window Title Bar will flash When un checked the display of incoming spots is enabled and the Title Bar will not flash Clear entries Clears all entries from the DX Spots Window Reset radio frequency Resets the radio to the last frequency used prior to selecting a spot For example you are on a net frequency when a needed country pops up on another frequency or even another band Click on the spot to change bands frequency work the DX then click on Reset radio frequency and you will be returned to the original net frequency Of course this function does requ
122. arify the fact that we are discussing the transmitted signal Reference to audio means the input to the modulator of the transmitter part of the transceiver from the card not to the audio output of the transceiver which is used by the computer to decode the digital signal How to Recognize Distortion When Receiving Another Station the Other Guy s Problem The most common effect of distortion during digital operation is the generation of extra audio tones If we transmit a tone of 1000 Hz nonlinearity in our transmitter can also cause us to generate tones of 2000 Hz 3000HZz and so forth We can also generate random tones that are not harmonically related to the fundamental tone If we use a wideband waterfall display during reception see these tones as additional lines which disappear as soon as the fundamental distorted signal stops Some PSK31 programs such as Logger32 have digital readout of the intermodulation distortion IMD of the received station transmitting station must idle for a few seconds to provide a stable reading on the receiving station s Logger32 IMD display Logger32 s rule of thumb is that one should try for at least of 23 dB more negative is better If the IMD is 23 dB or lower the reading will be in green Greater than that will be in red Basic Steps to a Cleaner Digital Signal The first step to take to keep the signal clean is to turn off the soeech compressor in the transmitter Speech compressors are desi
123. atchewan v Canada Cer Add an Alternative Prefix To ADD an alternative prefix first ensure that the Alternative Prefixes drop down list is blank then type in the new alternative prefix and click Add NOTE It is permissible to include specific callsigns in this section if required see KC4 A Antarctica Callsigns must be enclosed in the symbols lt and gt in the format lt G3NPA gt Delete an Alternative Prefix To delete an alternative prefix first open the pull down list select the appropriate prefix then click Modify an Alternative Prefix To modify an alternative prefix first open the pull down list select the appropriate prefix modify it as required and then click Modify Large Country Prefix Offsets Add an Offset To add a new offset select the first available blank row in the list usually the row at the bottom of the list The time details are entered from the Time Zone list presented when the operator right clicks on the UTC field of the selected row When an entry has been completed click the Add button to enter the data into the database Always add one line at a time Delete an Offset To delete an entry left click anywhere on the row to be deleted and click the Delete button Modify an Offset To modify an entry right click on the row to be modified make the required changes and then click on the Modify button IOTA To open the IOTA maintenance screen use the menu sequence To
124. audio frequency but you are not using Radio Control do the following Under Settings on the Main Menu select Preset Radio Frequencies Set four preset frequencies and modes USB or LSB These are the frequencies to which you should adjust your when operating on that band If you set 14070 00 USB then set your VFO to that frequency and mode when you are meters Now your VFO and Logger32 s display scale will agree 1 Under View on the Main Menu select Frequency Display and pick one of the Fixed Radio frequencies you entered in 2 When you have done the above the following macros will work properly and the radio frequency will be displayed on the third from the left on the Statusbar even though the radio and computer are not in communication q radioandtone q Sradiofrea q upperorlower 1 rxtonefreq Default audio frequency setup es Default Ts frequency I 100 00 Default main As frequency I 100 00 Default Aus 1 As frequency 300 00 ae Default Sus 2 Ax frequency I 300 00 Fixed radio freg 2 14070 00 USE i Start using these default frequencies W Fired radio freg 3 fi 4071 00 USB If this bos iz not checked the program will Fired radio freg 4 li 4071 00 USB start using the same Ts and Ax audia OF Cancel frequencies it was set to when it shut down Display Using Preset Audio Frequency Reading Fired Radio frequency setup OF Cancel If you wish to use the disp
125. ault in Logger32 s MMTTY RTTY engine makes it easy to return to a basic set of RTTY operating parameters However new modes contest conditions and other situations make it valuable for the operator to be able to define different operating parameters To make MMTTY flexible under these new and changing conditions the MMTTY engine has a feature Profiles which allows Logger32 MMT TY to remember different sets of starting conditions The Profiles Concept The idea behind the Profiles concept is to let the user set a number of parameters at one time When you define a Profile new parameters become the default and in addition if you or the AFC change these parameters a of the HAM button restores them to what they were when you started this Profile Using a Profile The defined profiles can be found only in RTTY mode Press the down arrow next to the Profile button at the far right of the menu and select a profile Defining a Profile You can vary the parameters in any way you choose you define a new profile and save it For example the new mode MTTY no relation to MMTTY is the same as RTTY but the shift width is 23 Hz instead of 170 Hz Here is the procedure to set up this new Profile we will call RT TY 23 Hz Note that you must leave Logger32 to define a new profile 1 Exit Logger32 2 Start MMTTY exe in the Logger382 default folder 3 Turn off AFC so the RTTY shift parameter will not change before you get a chance to save it If you
126. ay not work properly Logger32 You should try to provide power from the radio or from an external power source Radio Settings The interface settings for the following radios are found in the specific appendix for that radio q1 ICOM IC 746 Kenwood TS 440S Kenwood TS 570 Kenwood TS 870 1 Kachina 505 Ten Tec Paragon 1 Ten Tec Omni VI or Omni VI Plus If your radio is not in this list the following information may prove helpful Manufacturers often use the same communication for their complete line of amateur equipment If your radio is not in the above list the settings for a similar radio by the same manufacturer may work or prove a good starting point ofr experemintation A good example is the ICOM series of radios To date ICOM radios except the IC 735 will work with Logger82 by using the Icom not IC 735 radio setting As a result the settings specified for the IC 746 should work for all except the IC 735 Interfacing a Radio to the PC Soundcard Scott Thile KASET There are the two things you must do to interface the radio to the PC Sound Card Get audio from the radio to the computer so Logger32 can decode received signals and Get audio from the computer to the radio so you can transmit a PSK or RTTY signal All other interfacing PTT radio control interaction with Logger32 is covered elsewhere in this Help file Depending on your configuration and operating preferences you may want to refine this set up For insta
127. backspace and erase the wrong text is transmitted A correction can only be made to the last letter in the Tx buffer It is not possible to use the back arrow to correct text in middle of the buffer You must erase backwards from the last letter in the Tx buffer to the error Left click Abort pane 7 to clear all text in the Tx buffer and return to receive This is the panic button in case your radio starts to smoke during a transmission Left click Clear on the top menu and select Tx buffer To Call Up a Text File From a Floppy or Hard Drive ls 2 3 4 Click File on the Main Menu On the drop down menu select Send a text file Select the prepared file using the Windows Open dialog that appears When opened the file is entered as text in the Window This option can be used for a Brag File etc File Settings Toolbox vie Send a text Tile Open receive text file Close receive textile Exit To Clear All the Text in the Tx Window 1 Click on Clear on the Toolbar 2 From the drop down menu select Clear Tx It is also possible to use the clearbuffers and cleartxbuffer macros Note The Tx Window and Tx buffer are cleared but you will not switch to receive ara j Clear Rx Clear both To Abort All Text and Switch the Program to the Receive Mode single click on the Abort pane on the Statusbar This could be considered an Emergency Kill sc
128. bort 9th pane from the left on the Statusbar Logger32 will clear the Tx buffer immediately and go to receive q Press the lt Esc gt key This is the same as clicking Abort lt gt Use the receive macro invoked either by buttons or hot See MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons Select the Transmit Frequency There is no place to enter your frequency Hz within the sound card window Frequency selection is accomplished by clicking in Display Window by tuning your radio or by using the QSY and QSX macros You probably know how to tune your radio so we ll just tell you about Logger82 here 1 If you re going to transmit call CQ Tune click inside the display area in an open area not presently being used by another station and observe the frequency readout on the 2nd pane of the Statusbar 2 If you re going to be answering another station click inside the display area on top of the other station s received signal frequency will be displayed on the 2nd pane of the Statusbar The picture below of the display window indicates the following The display shows the audio frequency The user has clicked in the display to a clear part of the spectrum at an audio frequency of 991 9 Hz to transmit or listen q1 The mode is BPSK The Net feature is turned on Transmit frequency Receive frequency q The radio is in receive mode 14070 im 14069 7 LE ate am s sm i r T Fiais Cal C EFSK A 382 9 Hz 14069 427 KH
129. built for each antenna relay to be interfaced to Logger32 TYPICAL INTERFACE ONE FOR EACH ANTENNA HIA AGN ANS306 To Antenna Relay 14000 D Pins 18 29 GND Amateur Data Interchange Format 1 0 ADIF Hew Lines VA3HU The purpose of the ADIF is to provide a standard interchange independent of operating system or programming language for amateur data that will permit easy and direct transfer of data conforming to the standard between various amateur programs as awards and contest sponsors Ever since software has become a part of amateur radio there have been as many data formats as there have been ham radio software programmers Hams have struggled with converting data among various formats Several hams have been discussing a standard via an Internet discussion In early 1996 KK7A promoted the idea of a standard for exchange of ham data An internet reflector was set up for discussing such a standard WF1B and WN4AZY as publishers of commercial ham radio software have taken the best suggestions from this discussion and formed a proposal Ray introduced it at the 1996 Dayton Hamvention Within year this proposal has adapted adopted by most software publishers We wish to thank everyone who has contributed to this ADIF is infinitely extensible it will never be outgrown It can handle binary as well as text data New data elements may be added this specification without breaking older implementations It may be easily program
130. centered over Greenwich England The size of the map can be resized considerably without image quality degradation and may also improve program speed by using fewer resources LOGBOOK WINDOW Logbook Import Multiple Operators When importing an ADIF file Logger checks for an Operator field If it is blank Logger will import the log and assign the CURRENT operator call to all imported entries If you have held more than callsign you can export your current log in sections based on the dates you held a callsign Before importing your log entries change the operator callsign to reflect the call you had then import it Then change the operator to your current and import the rest Your operator field will now reflect the correct callsign you held when you made the contact Logbook Import SPEED Logger32 imports ADIF files rather quickly considering all the details it must analyze for QSO If you have a very large file to import you can increase the speed by having the grayline map in the foreground than the satellite tracking window or by even closing the tracking window altogether Sorted the logbook and my data is gone When clicking on the header cell of an individual column to sort your keep in mind it will only display entries with matching data If you sort by a column in which there is no data in that you will see a blank logbook To see all your data again simply resort by another column such as the QSO or DATE column header S
131. click away from receiving RI TY To make tuning set AFC on by clicking the AFC button on the RTTY toolbar or on the Statusbar at the bottom until it says AFC On AFC will automatically fine tune and will compensate for drift Tune the radio until you hear a RT TY signal and look at your waterfall As you tune the dial you will see the RTTY signal moving or right Tune so that the RTTY signal is completely in your waterfall display Logger32 has lots of features that make this easier we will save that for later With the RTTY signal close to the center of the waterfall you should see the following Figure 4 RTTY signal s two vertical lines Left click in the center of the signal between the two vertical lines and you should see copy printed on your screen That s it much to it If you have received PSK31 before it is simple for you If you do not copy successfully here are some points to consider Under weak signal conditions RTTY is a little less robust than PSK31 or MFSK16 so if you see garbled characters on screen it could be the result of a weak or noisy signal If nothing prints you may not be using the same sense as the received signal i e you are on the opposite sideband the RTTY toolbar above the Rx screen button that says Normal and it will become Reverse This reverses the sense whether mark is the high or low tone of the signal and allows you to copy as if you had switched sidebands your radio This button will a
132. commands can be used to program up to 36 programmable buttons in both the Soundcard Data Widnow and CW Each button can be programmed using MACROs and or text and can be given a label and color By using your imagination and working with the available list of MACROs you can create files which will make operating PSK RT TY and CW more enjoyable easier This section is intended to be a reference document for details on how to program the buttons using the MACRO language details on selecting the number of buttons to display and some suggested functionality to assign to those buttons for each of the windows can be found in the sections on the Sound Card Data Window and the CW Machine Programming the Buttons Default Hot Keys The programmable buttons may be displayed in up to three rows of 12 buttons Each button has a default hot key assigned to it follows q1 The top or first row of buttons defaults to the F keys F1 through F12 q The middle row of buttons defaults to Alt F keys hold down Alt and press the function key and The bottom row of buttons corresponds to Ctrl F keys hold down Ctrl and press the function key Pressing any of the hot key combinations will execute any script programmed for the corresponding button The default Hot Keys may be changed as part of the button programming process if you wish In addition to the User Definable Hot Keys the following Hot Keys have fixed functionality within the Sound Card Data Wind
133. ct tone no trace of ripple or modulation of any kind RST and PSK Since PSK s debut on the ham bands there has been much debate about the usefulness of the RST system Some have argued a new system that includes the percentage of text copied perfectly and the IMD readings However you will find that the majority PSKers still use the RST system and will give you your RST that can be clicked to put it in the log Readability is often a measure of the printed text Signal Strength is often from a rig s S meter but sometimes from the subjective indications that can viewed on the PSK waterfall Tone is almost always reported as a 9 but some PSKers have suggested that the 9 step system be used to indicate the quality cleanliness of the transmitted PSK signal Another issue to deal with is the measurement of signal readability and strength Logger32 uses a panoramic display You may have realized by now that the usual method of using Logger32 is to set the transceiver bandwidth as wide as possible and select signal with the mouse and cursor You let Logger32 s DSP do the work of filtering But when you look at the S meter on the you are not looking at the signal strength of the station you are working you are looking at the signal strength of the strongest in that 2000 Hz bandwidth Your QSO partner may be far weaker than the S meter indication The answer to this problem for many PSKers is to look at S meter readings on an empty band and learn what
134. cty If this happens often the popup window can become a nuisance To prevent the message create a catch all frequency range in your BandPlan with the range of 0 830MHz or higher You may wish also open up the file called ADIFBands TXT and ADD to the bottom of the list the word Gen for General You can use GEN as the BAND in the bandplan and it will show up in the log input window NOTE By using this tip it is log a contact that falls into this gray area Logger32 will log the file with a band of GEN If you then export the ADIF use elsewhere the entry will not be compliant If all of your operating frequencies are defined in your BandPlan this shouldn t be a problem as the only way the GEM band could enter your log would be by operating outside your frequency Using DTR or RTS to power a radio interface Many commercial interface circuits use the computer RTS or DTR lines power the interface circuitry If you are using a Radio Control interface that derives power from the computer you can the DTR and or RTS lines HIGH by placing a check mark in the box adjacent to them If you set either of these lines you will not be able to share the same Com port for CW operation However if your Interface will run on power from the DTR line you may still be able to share the RTS line for PTT operation of the Sound card OPERATING SYSTEM OR HARDWARE LIMITATIONS 16 Color vs 256 Color Running Logger82 in 16 color mode has not been tested 256 or
135. d colors displays a color selection box that allows the user to select individual background colors be used in the DX Spot Window for each spot that meets the specified selection The color displayed is based on the user s Band plan to determine bands and modes The color selection is made using a standard Windows Color Dialog Box by right clicking on the color to be selected wWorked Confirmed color selection Ed Selecting any of the other three menu items allows the user to set the text font color of any spot that comes from the selected source The color selection is made using a standard Windows Color Dialog Box m i TEHE Ei i min EHEEE m z EE L Bilt SHEER Bi SERA Bit SEA Bl HERAN j E E E m Ea E s Show Tips The show Tips selection is a toggle that when checked allows Windows Tool Tips to be displayed to the operator When the cursor is placed over a call sign in the DX Spot column the Country Prefix Country Name CQ Zone Continent and Status of the country Needed on Band New Country Not confirmed will be displayed as a Windows Tool Tip Play Ring tones for TALK messages This menu selection is a toggle When checked a telephone style ring tone will sound whenever a Talk message is from the DX cluster Color selection amp Audio alerts for this operator only This menu item enables the Color and Audio setup to be valid for the current operator only This functio
136. d if not present in the command line Logger32 will default to using the normal INI file An example of the shortcut properties for a second configuration in this case contest is given below Remember that you will to create a file called Contest ini and then to set it up as desired The easiest way to do this is to make a copy of your existing Logger ini file rename it and place it into the Logger32 default directory You can then modify it to suit Loggers Contest Properties CNPrograrn Files LoggerssLoggers2 ese contest C Program Files Loggers2 Ctrl Alt Noma window E Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s Jim Hargrave W5IFP Logger32 does not seem to work with my sound card which is built onto my motherboard Several hams have found that some on board sound cards do not work with Logger82 You can turn off the sound card with the System configuration of Windows Start Settings Control Panel System and then install a new sound card board that is not the motherboard In the U S surplus outlets sell usable boards for 20 to 50 Do not assume that your board does not work you have checked the mixer settings Something funny happened that did not happen before Please try the following steps in the order that they are presented Please give each step time to work Look over the rest of these troubleshooting files Go to the Help topic that discusses this function 1 Shut down the function and
137. de of the tones is critical Let s say you want transmit on 14080 kHz as in the previous example Remember your MARK signal has to be on 14080 kHz Here s how you get there with AFSK With your transmitter in the LSB mode Lower Side Band whatever frequency goes into the microphone input be subtracted from what your dial says and be transmitted on that frequency For example if your dial says 14080 kHz and you in a 1000 Hz audio tone your transmitter will put out an RF signal at 14079 kHz exactly 1000 Hz lower than your dial In this case If the 1000 Hz represented your MARK signal you would have to set your transmitter to 14081 on the dial and your MARK signal would be transmitted on 14080 just as you wanted OK so far Now what about SPACE Remember you want your SPACE signal to be transmitted 170 Hz lower on 14079 83 kHz What audio tone will give you 14079 83 Simple 14081 minus 14079 83 or 1170 Hz So the MARK audio frequency is 1000 Hz and SPACE is 1170 Hz There you have the basics of AFSK MMTTY generates the two audio frequencies and your transmitter converts them to two RF frequencies For technical reasons related to harmonic generation audio frequencies of 1000 Hz and 1170 Hz are NOT recommended They are used in this example just to keep the math simple The recommended audio frequencies are 2125 Hz the MARK audio frequency and 2295 Hz for the SPACE audio frequency Making the frequencies higher like this will reduce any
138. display characteristics color brightness smoothing IMD indication Slash zero option Operate RTTY including 23 Hz using MMTTY module written by Mako Mori Calibrate the sound card timing Operate split using audio tones or using radio control Save operating parameters in RTTY mode in a Profile Built in CW keyer but NO decoder with programmable buttons and a limited range of macros e Support for automatic control of your antenna rotator Contest serial number counter up to 999 999 contacts User selectable highlighting for worked confirmed QSL send QSL awaiting printing and general editing e Single button compression and saving of back up log files With Logger32 the answer is probably Yes Now what is the question Version History Geoff Anderson G3NPA Logger32 Main Program Changes Date Version Type of Revision Num ber Upgrade dd mmm wy 1 00 Full Install Initial release Logger32 Help File Changes Date Version Number Revision dd mmm wayyy 1 00 Initial release System Requirements Hal Miller KB1ZQ Logger 32 has been tested on the following MS Windows operating systems Windows 95 Windows 98 98SE Windows NT Windows ME Windows 2000 Windows XP These systems were primarily Pentium class machines with the lowest level of hardware having a 166 mHz cpu with of RAM Lower end machines will take a longer time to display and update some windo
139. dow in the Toolbox menu Tx Window font sets font size and font style 1 Tx Window background sets background color Tx Window buffer indicator color sets the color that text will change when it is transmitted There is an associated option in the Settings menu Transmit buffer indicator sets transmit buffer text to change color as it is transmitted so the operator can see what is left send ToolBox View Mode Display Aux Re window font Re window Tx text calcr Rex window control codes color Ry window normal batkground Rx window paused background Rx window mouseover highlight Tx window font Ts window background Ts window buffer indicator color waterfall colors Waterfall sensitivity sound card input leve gound card output lewzl RTTY sr Scope color CPU Power saver mode The Tx Window will have a scrollbar on the right hand side when the window becomes full of text It fills from top to bottom When the Tx window is full text scrolls off the top out of the user s view The user can view this text again by using the scroll down bar the right side of the window Transmit text is buffer size limited Transmitted text is echoed in the receive window This allows the user to see what text has been transmitted and to monitor the other station s transmission and his or her own transmissions in context You can change the color of the echoed text by using Toolbox Rx Window Tx Text Color In this way you can
140. dow and uncheck Show complex information to obtain the display as shown below s56 s56 ice 550 PS5K31 RTTY to give In this presentation only W and C indications are given and only the band in use at the time is shown Once the full callsign of your QSO partner has been entered in the Log Input Window further information may be available if you have worked that station before and you have set the complex mode of display The background colors in the individual band mode combinations now indicate specific details for the particular callsign entered In the example below the red indicates that 9K2ZZ has confirmed QSOs on 20m SSB PSK31 and RTTY and 17m SSB and the light yellow background that he has been worked on 10m SSB The entry for 12m SSB which is not highlighted indicates that the prefix 9K has been worked in band mode combination but it was not with 9K2ZZ The specific colors for these highlights may be selected form the Setup Highlight menu option Note It is advisable to perform a logbook recalculation occasionally to ensure that this table is correct Ei Logbook Entry G3NPA B FPSK31 RTTY Additional Information Left clicking on any grid of the Worked Confirmed Window will display a pop up Show Country window listing all log entries for the Band Mode selected For example clicking on the 20m SSB grid as circled above could display the following details from the logbook 0E Apr 95 1
141. e the way information is displayed In summary the use of comment is quick and easy to use but not so easy to retrieve the information whereas the use of Notes is perhaps a little more time consuming but the presentation of the information is done on callsign basis Either or both method s may be used at will Comments Comments are entered into the logbook via the Cmnt filed in the Logbook Entry window Click on the button as shown below rotate the field round so that the title Cmnt appears on the left of the entry pane Use the TAB key to place the cursor into this pane and enter the required text If you need to return to another pane for the entry of other data use the TAB key again Anything typed in here will be stored in the Comment field in the logbook following the entry of all the data on pressing the lt Return gt key jlo TUA Operate G3NPA The ae button will cause the fields on this line to toggle between Comment QTH and Address To view any comment you will have make sure that the comments column in the logbook is made visible see Grid Layout Setup and you will have to scroll through the Logbook Notes Notes are entered into the logbook via the Notes window This window is opened by clicking on the Notes icon on the toolbar lf there is no callsign entered in the Logbook Entry window or the particular callsign does not have any notes associated with
142. e appropriate command At the present time Icom radios support many commands see Direct Control of Radios but the transmit receive changeover Ten Tec uses the lcom command set but includes a Tx Rx changeover command Since the following discussion tells how to configure the interface so you can talk to your radio you may want to do this for your Icom so you can exchange mode frequency filter and other information between the computer and the radio Radio Debug Window You can monitor the commands sent between Logger32 and your radio Click Setup Radio Sow Radio Debug Window Here is what you will see an nane ag E J 1 ofl lt n Dele oo gang x 50 Ul hae atl ge M FREG 14070 21 MODE USB DSR CTS FE FE 04 E0 03 FO FE FE EO 0403 100207 14 FD Tx FE FE 04 E004 FD Fe FE FE OF EO 04 FO FE FE EO 04 04 01 FO Tx FE FE 04 E003 FD RAs FE FE OF EO Os FO FE FE EO 0405 1002 OF 14 FD Tx FE FE 04 EQ 04 FD Fix FE FE 04 E004 FO FE FE EO 04 04 01 FD Tx FE FE 04 EQ 03 FD Rs FE FE OF E0 OS FO FE FE EO 0405 100207 14 FD Tx FE FE 04 E004 FD A Radio debug monitor Notes About Radio Control of Transmit Receive q With some radios Yaesu FT1000MP Kenwood if you operate PTT by sending a command over the serial port the microphone input remains active q Ifyou have a problem controlling Tx Rx try speeding up or slowing down polling Specifically try the values 500 msec 1000 msec It is possible to be too sl
143. e limits If you output power meter the display will show that you are running lower power for the same transceiver microphone gain setting you transmit very high or very low tones You should be especially careful that you do not set your transmit audio mic gain with very high or low tone and then operate in the middle because you may be overdriving in the middle since the gain is higher Harmonic Consideration If you do happen to overdrive one type of distortion you will generate is harmonics If you transmit a tone at 600 Hz then you can also transmit a harmonic at 1200 Hz 1800 Hz 2400 Hz and 3000 Hz Above that your transmitter audio rolls off and your harmonics will be attenuated However if you were to choose a transmit audio frequency of 2000 Hz or above and overdrive the audio your first harmonic 4000 Hz is already well into the rolloff region of your transceiver transmit audio stage and it will be attenuated along with the higher harmonics Clearly you are safer operating at a tone above 2000 Hz For more on this topic Transmitting a Clean Signal The feature that allows you to transceive on your default Rx frequency can make it easier to transmit high tones even though you initially receive a station at a low frequency in your receive range Invoke this align function with a right click of the mouse Align requires that you have computer control over your radio s frequency Communitcating with RTTY William R Turne
144. e main logging windows to the nearest 25 pixels on screen It is difficult to drag and resize all windows to be exactly the same size at the same width and all neatly at the same height using mouse One can get close but often not exact Snap Windows to Size is based on the nearest 25 pixels to each window top left height and width Let s assume a simple case only two windows With the mouse you have dragged the Logbook Entry Window to a location where its top is 20 pixels below top of the Logger32 main window and the Previous QSOs Window is moved with the mouse to a position 2 pixels from the top of Logger32 main window You re almost there but the windows are still not exactly in line they are in fact 18 pixels apart Tey a Loggers T Ei Logbook Entry YA3HU x p RL SEc E cen one oC OL i i m si Select Snap Windows to Size and the top of the Logbook Entry Window will snap down to 25 pixels from the top of the Logger32 main window and the top of the Previous QSOs Window will snap to the top 0 pixels of the Logger32 main window File Tools Wlew Stats Cw E Help ce oe ss PE E SSB Band S0 a Call Le sent Revd J 0 Harme po GTH P Comments 7 The tops of the two windows are now 25 pixels apart worse than before However the tops of the two windows are now set at magic 25 pixel positions apart on the Logger32 main window Which position do you prefer Let s assu
145. e output for a speaker The control and the sound card were not designed to be adjusted so precisely as to be reliably set at 5 millivolts Use an Attenuator to Reduce the Output of the Sound Card The answer is a hardware solution build an external attenuator to fit between the sound card output and the microphone input Build a 100 1 voltage divider out of 1 4 or 1 8 watt resistors to reduce the voltage reaching our transmitter audio stage A practical design consists of a 10 000 ohm 10 kilohm resistor in series with the audio output from the sound card and a 100 ohm resistor connected across the audio output from the hot wire to the ground wire If we build such a divider we will probably find that the microphone gain control on our transceiver now needs to be closer to we normally keep it for phone operation because we are feeding it a signal more in line with a microphone level signal If you to get really fancy you can replace one resistor with a potentiometer to adjust the attenuation Ground Loop Problems Even after doing these things we may still have ground loop hum problems An isolation transformer will reduce ground loops a 1 1 isolation transformer between the voltage divider and the computer Radio Shack sells one as part number 273 1374 the connectors for the attenuation isolation network on an insulator to keep the computer and the radio isolated from each other When we test this interface there should be no DC path be
146. e shifts rather than two to create the basic scheme Peter Martinez G3PLX Description of QPSK The QPSK mode used in PSK31 takes the binary data stream at the point where it would otherwise go direct to the BPSK modulator and feeds that through a 5 bit shift register A logic operation then forms the parity function of the 1st 2nd and 5th stages and another forms the parity function of the 1st 3rd and 5th giving two bit streams at the same 31 25 bps rate as the Original data These two bits form a binary number the four values of which are mapped to the four possible phase shifts in the QPSK modulation Thus a single data bit from the source results in a 5 bit long predictable sequence of 90 degree and 180 ohase shifts interleaved with those of following and preceding bits In the receiver a Viterbi decoder is used to keep track of all 32 possible combinations of guesses at the transmitted datastream a running total of how well the received pattern of phase shifts matches each guess The clever thing about the Viterbi decoder is that it can be sure that if it throws out the worst 16 guesses before it receives the next signal which doubles the number of to 32 again it can never get it wrong and after about 20 more signals it can be pretty certain that its guess 20 signals ago was right The snag is that it can only output its best guess after a delay of 20 signals or 640mS in the case of PSK31 Longer Viterbi decoders are possible
147. e the Lower Status Bar turned on you will find in the bottom left hand corner of the Main Window is Logger32 s clock Logger32 provides the capability to set the computers clock from an Atomic Time standard via the internet The clock will show GMT Zulu time Logger32 reads the timezone settings you have defined in Windows and adjusts itself accordingly There is no manual intervention required to allow for Standard Time or Daylight Savings Time If you hold the mouse over the time a tooltip will popup to show the time your PC is set to If you right click on the clock a small menu will popup with two selectable options Eee Get atomic clock time Ferrer Show PC time contig f Kever Era Get Atomic Clock Time This option will query an Atomic Clock via the internet and set your computer time accordingly NOTE You must be connected to the internet for this feature to work Any adjustments made will be displayed i Clock sync EJ May OF U2 01 1754 UTC System Updated on May 6 2002 at 09 17 49 PM 124 seconds Show PC time config This option will display the settings you have set up in Windows GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada E Normal Bias 5 hour s to convert local time ta UTE Standard Hame Eastern Standard Time Standard Bias 0 hourfs to add to Normal Bias Daylight Name Eastern Daylight Time Daylight Bias 1 hour s to add to Normal Bias Daylight Begins On The First Sunday In April At 2 00 00
148. eQSL Record export Send LOTW This option will flag the QSO so that it is included with the next Link to topic Exporting Files LOTW Record export QSL Sent This option will set the field QSL_Sent to Yes Below is a table of the ADIF fields used in your Logbook along with the type of data a description of the field s intended use and any special features within Logger82 Field Definitions ame Type Logger Auto fill in AS twill appear on the mailing label Age ofthe operator atthe other station THOM SOM 40M SOM 20m1 17M Toh Yes based on your bandplan 12M 10M 6M 2h FOCM 230M Call sign of the other station US County in the format STATE COUNTY Pres Ifyou are using a callbook CD and For example GA BARROW Use ca have it setto automatically import data County list T Comment field for 250 i a a EI m l O Te GE BAND h C C CALL T CNTY COMMENT CONT T Continent MA SA EL AF OG AS Yes based on info in your Country database T Contest Identifier 55 ARRLVHF Yes ARRLOS etc Coz Cl one Yes based on info in your Country Yes based on info in your Country database Yes if radio control is on or you selected a Dx Spot 4 6 ore or however many characters Yes Ifvou are using a callbook CD and D T D 1 0 p m Ea E 4 Mm ez Co a h i DACE h h FREG ea have it setto automatically import data IOTA T HYFHEN MUST BE INCLUDED E
149. eboot again Run the System Monitor to see the level of CPU usage This program itself uses CPU power of course but not too much However once you have done the measurements you need to do you can stop running it There is no need to run this program the time If you have enough time you might want to add programs slowly You might choose to add only your virus program at first since you will almost certainly want that back in position if it can run at all Try things with that program and Zakanaka for a day then another program If you find that your computer does not operate as it should scrounge around on your desk for that piece of paper telling you all processes that used to run and put checks next to them again with MSConfig You can do this for one program at a time if you unsure what they do Restore only those programs you need Each of these programs has a purpose the question for you is do you need them as much as you need Logger382 Of course know the answer to that question Turn Off XY Display in RTTY Mode The XY display mimics the old oscilloscope phase display that once was needed for RT TY operators to adjust mark and space to proper value You are properly tuned to mark and space frequencies when the ellipses are vertical and horizontal The XY display is a big consumer of computer resources but has less importance than it used to have because the AFC feature can tune in signals for you If you are operating AF
150. ect Tune on the drop down menu or simply left click the Mode pane on the status bar first pane it usually reads BPSK until word Tune appears When you are in tune mode you can click on the Transmit Receive pane fifth pane and you will have a steady carrier for tuning Tune can be used for the following operations Making adjustments to your sound card controls see Interfacing a Radio to the PC Sound Card Self test of Our Own Signal Making adjustments to your radio q1 Checking SWR Note When making adjustments pick a clear frequency or use a dummy load PSK is a weak signal mode and users are encouraged to run barefoot Reasonable output power for this mode is between 10 and 40 watts After completing your adjustments in Tune mode remember to change back to a regular operating mode probably BPSK Tx Transmit Window The Tx window serves as an area to view text that is to be transmitted The Tx window also allows the user to type what he or she wants to send while they are still in the receive mode This is referred to as a type ahead buffer The text is transmitted in the it is displayed in the window This is also true for macro keys if you have text in the buffer and press a macro key the macro will take effect after the text already in the buffer is sent The Clear Tx and Abort functions operate immediately without waiting for text to be sent The following are user selected options for the Tx Window transmit win
151. een as too impersonal Do not have long brag macros that describe everything in your shack including the manufacturer of the carpeting in your room By all means use macros for the obvious name QTH antenna rig and a return macro i e one that automatically puts out his call and your call e g 0d5dx de ko2eoq A couple of basic macros to use at each exchange will give enough time for even the slowest typist to type comfortably in real conversation mode Here are some examples The word in brackets is the macro Macro 1 return call de mycall Macro 2 FB Name FB name Macro 3 solid Solid copy that time OR Macro 4 fair Fair copy that time Some garbled characters The above will give you about 15 20 seconds of delay time You can then comfortably hunt and peck and even pause for a few seconds of thinking time without feeling like you are too slow Here are two different macros that take care of transmit receive switching along with some of the typing Macro 5 transmit call de mycall Macro 6 BTU name call de mycall K receive Other conversation tips Do not worry about typing errors or spelling mistakes Yes you can backspace and delete the error before it is transmitted if you are fast enough but it is really not necessary Most hams will be able to figure out your original meaning If you do backspace remember that backspace is a PSK character and you can even erase after the letter has been transmitted
152. el 1 ae i x File Toolbox iew Mode Clear ftr Catnh you again some time 73 73 K9 T T4 DE WWSHF SKK GL oe tee BPSk 917 1 Hz 14069163 KHz 22d8 AFL On E Cheers B poron Mee dim 1408 9 Hz 14068 670 KHz ol aaa EE Net OY AFCOn Reset Abot CPU PI Operating Split by Transmitting at the Main Window Passband Frequency and Receiving with an Aux Window 1 Turn Net On 2 Receive the station you are trying to work with Aux 1 or Aux2 3 Left click the cursor where you want to transmit and the Main red passband indicator will go to that spot 4 At this point you will transmit where the red indicator main passband is and you can receive in the Aux window Manual Split Operation Manual split is straightforward If your radio has two VFOs just go to split operation with your radio and set the transmit VFO to operate where you want This is the same method you would use for SSB or CW split Leave Net On in Logger82 and you will be shifted an amount exactly equal to the difference between your two VFOs Tuning Display and Controls After adjusting the input volume to your sound card see Link to topic Interfacing the Radio to a PC Sound Card Interfacing the Radio to a PC Sound Card you are ready to set up your display If the background of your screen becomes red then the sound card is overdriving the computer Readjust the soundcard input level Logger32 has two types
153. ely The aaa bbb codes are 000 No select 002 FM wide 003 FM Narrow 005 AM 007 SSB 2 7 kHz 009 CW 500 Hz 010 CW narrow 270 Hz So the Logger32 Link to topic MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons macro to set up the filters for 2 7 kKHz 2 7 8 83 455 would be command FLO07007 For 500 Hz 500 Hz the macro is command FLO09009 Macros for other filter combinations follow this pattern Codes for Filter Passband Slope Tuning for the TS 850 The Kenwood TS 850 command for this function is SHaa NOTE this assumes you are using USB and is only really the 500 or 270 Hz filters are selected where SH is the command for Slope High aa Is the code for the tuning position in the range 00 to 20 The following codes set the nominal filter center frequency as noted 00 1450 Hz 01 1300 Hz 02 1100 Hz 03 950 Hz 04 800 Hz 05 600 Hz So for a passband centered on 950 Hz the full macro would be command SH03 Example Codes for the filter bandwidth adjustment for the TS 870 and TS 570 TS 870 command FW0100 1S 1400 Sets low to 1000 Hz and high to 1400 Hz for 400 Hz filter width command FW0030 1IS 3400 Sets low to 300 Hz and high to 3400 Hz for normal use TS 570 command SH19 SL19 Sets a 200 Hz bandpass centered on 1 kHz command SH00 SL00 Sets a normal bandwidth VFO Memory Channel Selection for All Kenwood Rigs Selecting VFO or Memory Channel The command t
154. entering the callsign in the Logbook Entry Window you must click on the icon under the menu bar 88 From QRZ com A similar panel will be produced if you wish to use the QRZ com facility but YOU MUST be connected to the internet before this work If you wish an automated QRZ com lookup then check the menu item under Setup Auto lookup Auto www qrz com otherwise click on the QRZ com icon under the menu bar PR Auto lookup Frequency Antenn Y w Auto wa grz cam lookup Es 3 a gt B Auto CD AOFi lookup Adta role antes E Facilities are built in to allow for the transfer of fields from the CDROM or the online QRZ com site lookup tables into the Log window either automatically or manually Check one or a combination of menu options to achieve the desired results Note that both the QRZ and the CDROM lookups have their own display windows and therefore different options may be set up for each Address State Country Great Britain Grid Old call e Mail URL Call G3NP4 From the GO List Like the CDROM and QRZ com lookup system for obtaining individual QTH data Logger32 also has the ability to search for QSL manager information using GoList There is a built in database which was current when Logger32 was first released and you are reminded that this will quickly go out of date The Web database is open to non subscribers of the GoList database for limited monthly lookups currently 30 lookups p
155. equency If you click higher in frequency than your Default Main Rx Frequency your radio will tune up in frequency if you click lower in frequency than your Default Rx Frequency your radio will tune down Many people find that it is difficult to right click just the right place on the received signal The align macro takes care of that problem Instead of retuning where you Click it moves the current signal that is being received to the default Rx frequency Just dedicate a programmable button to contain the text align only and when you select that button it will be is as if you right clicked the correct place Operating Split Frequency with Computer Control There are two ways that Logger382 can operate split frequency 1 using different audio tones for transmit and receive and 2 changing your radio frequency as it switches between transmit and receive The audio frequency method is described in PSK31 and only works in that mode Here is how you can operate split with computer control for either PSK31 or RTTY You must have computer radio communication On the Statusbar in the Simplex panel the Simplex Split status is displayed It probably says Simplex oaa a BB 14070 test SPSS ESE ES SS SSS ES ESS ES SS re ear eres ceed eee Perera Perera Peer Perera eee Ea ee re eee need eee Pee Meee BPSK 15000H2 14071 112KHz 234b Simplex f Receive NetOt AFCO Reset Abot cru PTT 1 Left click on the Simpl
156. er Subscribers have Unlimited lookups for a year More information may be found on the GoList web site www GoList net To obtain the QSL manager information enter the callsign into the Log Input page and click on the GoList icon Alternatively click on the icon first enter the callsign and either press lt Enter gt to get the information from the local source or assuming that you are already connected to the internet click on Web lookup to collect from the GoList database Lookup from web site GoList Lookup Manager YYWaCNL Raymond H Mc Clure 5 Mc Kenzie Cir Morth Augusta SC 29641 USA Direct Only Lookup from local database GoList Lookup Goin QSL Manager List lssue 264 4PRIL 02 2002 WWE AL A route tor WOCHL was not found Look in the latest call book for an address If you are a licensed user of the Web based GoList service then the facility to enter your User ID can be found under the Config menu Please note that there are no automatic facilities for the transfer of information from the GoList window into the Log Input window The normal cut and paste techniques however will work should you need them Notes and Comments Window Geoff Anderson G3NPA In Logger32 there are two log columns in which additional information connected with a QSO may be kept One is known as Comments and the other as Notes There is a subtle difference in the way these two functions work and a considerable differenc
157. ertical line as shown here The more the phase scope deviates from vertical the lower the signal quality Note A good quality signal is by definition a combination of many factors including but not limited to Quality and linearity of original transmitted signal q Propagation path attenuation distortion etc Receiver distortion noise linearity etc Interference Using Receiver Filters Audio DSP Logger32 uses audio DSP to select one signal from many that are in the receive range If you set your receiver selectivity to wide you can still copy a single signal as long as no signal is very strong However DSP in Logger32 works only on the audio into the sound card so if the transceiver receive passband is wide noise and interference come through If some of the signals are very strong they may affect the receiver AGC which reduces the amplitude of a weaker signal that you are trying to Copy Audio DSP in your radio will be of little benefit to Logger32 The narrower audio signal may sound nicer to you in the speaker but you have not improved copy by using audio filtering or DSP Logger32 in either PSK31 or RTTY modes already has about all audio DSP it needs some radios use IF DSP and which may provide the filtering you need to prevent distortion from occurring in the IF stage of the receiver see the next section Transceiver IF Filtering PSK31 is a narrow signal mode and the best results in terms o
158. es etc The number of files backed up during this operation will depend on you use Logger32 As an example my current version contains 32 files Backup user files Ed This utility will backup all user fles and databases not Logbook into a single ip file kis strongly recommended pou periodically backup all Loggers user tiles into this ip file CHAM RADIOSLOGGERSASUSER BUP AIP Browse Start Exit Verty In the first line provide the path and name of the ZIP file you wish to create NOTE If you select the A drive Logger32 will automatically span multiple floppy disks if necessary Press Start to begin the backup Exit to leave this window without backing up the logbook Verify to check if the archive was created error free and Abort to abort a backup in progress The very bottom of the window will show the status of the backup and any instructions necessary 3 Do it yourself You can also copy your entire Logger32 directory to another drive networked computer or burn a copy to a Logger382 does not store any configuration settings in the registry at all RESTORING YOUR FILES If you need to restore your backed up files you will need a program such as WinZip or PKUnzip or many of the other programs capable of reading a ZIP file Simply uncompress the files back into the Logger32 directory Compressing Logbooks User Files and Databases Geoff Anderson G3NPA Zip Logbooks This utility will backup the Logb
159. etails required and click on OK The current frequency format is is dependent on your frequency resolution settings from the main window setup menus w BandMode Selection Band Mode W Band from BandPlan Frequency i 4 0700 W Mode from BandPlan Current frequenct format is Automatic entry If you wish to automate these functions and you have a computer interface to your radio then place a check mark in Band from BandPlan and Mode from BandPlan The frequency will be obtained from the radio and the band and mode will be dependent your setting in the BandPlan The mode and band will change automatically as you move through the bands If Mode from BandPlan is left unchecked and you are using a CAT interface then the mode displayed in the Log input window will be that of rig not necessarily the actual mode of operation Logbook Page Window B Charles Sutton W1MCP The LogBook Page holds all the information pertaining to your individual QSOs One of the biggest changes in Logger382 is how it handles multiple operators In prior versions of Logger if you wanted to keep separate logs for separate callsigns you were required to have multiple logs In Logger32 you can still have multiple logs but you may not find it necessary Tracking is based on setting the operator callsign for individual contacts as they are entered You do need to change the operator callsign with each QSO you enter but you must change it for the first
160. ex address 04 Baud rate 1200 Transceive function Enabled Although the default settings work very well with Logger382 it is suggested that you use 2 Stop Bits It seems to work better lf desired for faster performance the baud rate can be changed to 9600 by moving jumper D4 to position D5 on J 22 J 22 is located inside the radio under the PA unit To gain access you need to remove the top cover and the 4 screws attaching the PA You can set aside the PA unit by disconnecting the power cable to the PA unit NOTE Contrary to other Icom series radios the IC 735 will not communicate properly with Logger82 if you disable the function It muat be left in the factory default position The following shows a Logger32 setup for the IC 735 using factory default settings RigControl setup E X ni Com port Com 1 Databits E an A rz Shope ike e gt Parity None gt Lata tile CO Set OTR high Poling interval ms foo SetRATS high Icom address Hex o4 i LE NOTE DO NOT set the Polling Interval less than 250 ms as the IC 735 cannot respond to the Logger32 polling at an interval less than trhis NOTE Many commercial interface circuits use the computer RTS or DTR lines to power the interface circuitry If you are using a Radio Control interface that derives power from the computer you can set the DTR and or RTS lines HIGH by placing a check mark in the box adjacent to them If yo
161. ex panel and the Simplex Split dialof box will pop up dae x A HNR f Simples Tx Rx on the same frequency C DS Up Ts frequency higher than Fix C OS Down Tx frequency lower the Fix Simplex Split OF Cancel 1 Select QSX up if you want to transmit higher than your receive frequency or QSX down if you want to transmit lower than your receive frequency This choice will depend which way the other station tells you he is listening It does matter if you are in USB or LSB QSX up will always take you higher in frequency when you transmit q After you make your selection an edit box will appear Simples Split Simples Tx As on the same frequency f OS Up Ts frequency higher than Aw C OS Down Tx frequency lower the Ax Split Frequency Hz OK Cancel Enter a frequency in Hz in this window If you want to transmit 1 KHz from your receive frequency enter 1000 q Click OK The Simplex Status panel will now display the word Split instead of Simplex Make your calls and we hope work the rare DX station who is listening split 1 When you are finished click the Simplex Status panel select Simplex and you will be back to regular operation You can also use a macro to do this but it is no easier unless you integrate it with some other commands The macro is qsx is described in the section Macros Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons There is a simplex macro as well t
162. ext Ok packet is pretty straightforward to most people said with tongue in cheek This mode is the default mode of the Kam The Kam is dual port in this mode default switch STREAMSW 7E 7C Which are the tiled and pipe keys Some commands will affect both ports and some will affect VHF port only so we do need to specify port paths for either connect requests or beacon traffic HF is port 1 VHF is port 2 As the default mode is packet the CONTROL_C instruction is not required in the macro s However there does need to be a return at the end of the last command to instruct the TNC to execute the macro statements Macros to switch between VHF and HF with the TNC using the default settings are a HF streamswitch character 7e or what you have set your switch to la VHF streamswitch character 7c or what you have set your switch to NOTE The a can be any letter down to j that is 10 user ports to use An example macro to connect to a VHF Dx cluster is le callsign of the cluster station or if its on HF callsign of the cluster station The following may be looked at if you are in the situation where your network is shared by Dx clusters BBS s and APRS traffic The commands below are examples only you will need to enter your own callsign and calls of the high site digi peaters with appropriate pathing 3748 33S1T14520 11E should be replaced with your Lat long co ordinates in the format degmin sec Remembe the KAM is dual
163. f Logger 16 to share their database files This is still possible with Logger32 but due to indexing restrictions it is absolutely imperative that ALL the files be kept and shared together These files include the Country Offset and Alias files They must ALWAYS be distributed as a COMPLELTE of 12 files and must NEVER be broken up NOTE If you use this group of files from another user you must run a recalculate on your logbook The reason is that the stats info is actually hidden in the Countries database files don t know what Bob will be doing about the stats refresh within the Countries database If this is done automatically perhaps a note is not necessary Time will tell Anyhow agree with you that a note of it at this stage is prudent even if required in the finality of time Scroll wheel on mouse isn t working Be sure the correct drivers were installed with your mouse and if so check with the manufacturer for updated drivers Need to see a calandar quick Right click in the Logbook Window select Add QSO and right click on the arrow next to the date This will pop up a calandar be sure to click exit when you are done so as not to add a bad QSO record CLUSTER DX SPOT WINDOW Stop Scrolling DX Spot Window Having trouble scrolling back to a previous spot New spots coming in so quick you can t get back to an older one Right click in the DX Spot window and choose HOLD OFF DX SPOTS This will new spots from being written
164. f removing interference and in terms of getting the best signal to noise ratio S N come from setting the IF selectivity as narrow as the signal For PSK31 this IF bandwidth is about 50 Hz You may not have a filter this narrow but you may have some filtering that you can bring into play Normally IF filtering is in play you select a narrow crystal or mechanical filter when you use the passband or IF shift controls when you use an IF notch filter or when you implement IF DSP A Combined Approach One tactic is to set your radio s selectivity to a wide setting while tuning the band so you can see many signals Once you have found a signal and you want to make a QSO narrow your radio bandwidth If your radio uses passband tuning PBT IF shift or some other passband modification scheme you may be able to adjust it to reduce interference With Logger32 s spectrum you can see the effect of making filter and other IF changes at your radio Sometimes all the filters are not exactly centered at same frequency and you may have to adjust the passband tuning control to ensure that you have the signal of interest in the passband With the hexcommand and command macros you may be able to set macro buttons that allow you to control bandwidth right from the Logger32 screen See Direct Control of Radios lt is also possible to use your radio s manual IF notch filter to remove interference Again you will see the effect of this filter by watchi
165. f that callsign has been entered into the log previously Some elements of the way this information is displayed are configurable by the user A typical basic empty window is shown below The bands and modes displayed are derived from your BandPlan and whether you have the Stats column marked with a Y The more bands and modes you have so marked the larger will be the table shown above The table becomes active as soon as a recognized prefix is entered into the Call pane of the Log Input Window The table will remain blank if the particular country has not been logged before but if the prefix has been recorded previously then the band mode combinations will be activated as shown in the example below Note that the Worked Confirmed window title has changed to that of the prefix entered 2an gt 58 S56 Soo Posto RTTY The text and background colors in the table have the following meanings Red text Band Mode worked AND confirmed Blue text Band Mode worked but NOT confirmed The Yellow Band and Mode highlights along the top and left hand edge of the table show the currently selected band mode as shown by the information in the Log Input Window The color of these highlights may be changed from the menu accomplished right click anywhere within the Worked Confirmed window The data in the Worked Confirmed window can be changed to show a simplified worked confirmed format if desired Right click anywhere within the win
166. fact MUCH better 170 Hz shift RT TY only needs about 250 Hz for proper copy If you don t have a Hz filter 500 Hz will do pretty well but anything wider than that will not be satisfactory in the long run You may wonder why if the shift is 170 Hz do you need a 250 Hz filter Why not 170 The reason is that shifting the frequency generates sidebands adjacent to the actual signal and if the sidebands are attenuated the signal will be degraded RTTY is a form of FM and if you d like to understand more FM theory there are a large number of books available For amateurs the Handbook is a good source Depending on your transceiver you may or may not be able to use a narrow filter for RT TY Some of the less expensive transceivers do not have an FSK mode and also are unable to select a narrow filter while in the LSB mode Some improvement be made by using an outboard audio filter between the speaker output and the sound card input but unfortunately that will not prevent a strong adjacent signal from causing the receiver s AGC circuit to reduce gain often to the point where the desired signal disappears The best solution is to upgrade to a transceiver which has an FSK mode built in AND which allows you to select a narrow filter while in that mode Band Plans It s easy to remember the band plans for RT TY Most activity will be found between 80 and 100 kHz up from the bottom edge of band except for 80 meters which goes an additional 40 o
167. fference is the way your transmitter generates the RF signal With FSK your transmitter receives a simple on off signal which causes the carrier frequency to shift back and forth Since you be using MMTTY the on off signal will come from a COM port on your computer Other stations which do not have a sound card program like MMTTY would use a separate box called a TNC Terminal Node Controller The TNC does the same job that does with your sound card FSK is simpler easier and more foolproof than AFSK and is highly recommended if your transmitter supports FSK input Check your owner s manual if you re not sure Since not all transmitters support FSK input there is another method available with MMTTY You guessed it AFSK AFSK can used with any SSB transmitter AFSK is a bit trickier to set up and use but when it is done correctly it works just as well as FSK and will transmit a perfect RTTY signal Also AFSK can do some things FSK can not such as Automatic Frequency Control of the transmitter To operate with AFSK you put your transmitter in the SSB mode instead of FSK mode and you put an audio signal into the microphone input Some transceivers have a rear connector for data input When you transmit MMTTY causes your sound card put out a pair of audio tones which cause your transmitter to send the required RF output Sounds simple right Here s the tricky part the tones are two sine waves nothing fancy but the frequency and amplitu
168. for hex values Both macros allow for multiple commands For example filter selection and mode selection can all be achieved using one instruction For Yaesu rigs the HEX version is required Applying Macro Control to Select a Filter In the case of the Yaesu rigs all commands sent from the computer to the transceiver consist of blocks of five bytes each last byte in each block is the instruction code while the first four bytes of each block are arguments either parameters for the instruction or dummy values It should be noted that the block MUST be five bytes long no matter how many bytes are required in the argument unused bytes should be filled with dummy values It is suggested that one uses Byte 00 as a although this is not essential and the fill can be any hex value No terminator is used For example 00 00 00 01 OC will command the transceiver to switch to USB OC zero C represents the instruction code and 01 denotes USB The remaining parameter bytes are filled with a dummy code of 00 because there is nothing else to tell the radio for this operation When constructing your own commands it might be easier to create the code sequence from the right end i e Instruction parameter and then REVERSE it when writing the macro In any event take note that the least significant parameter digit side should be first in the actual code The most useful commands for rig control in connection with Logger32 are filter selection
169. format can be used for backup You are now given the opportunity to give a name to the file you are about to create It is suggested that you name the file YOURCALL ADI When ready select OK If this file already exists then either select NO and start again OR select YES overwrite the file You are now returned to the Print Backup Options window where it is necessary to select OK to actually save the file You should see a counter increasing rapidly as the file is saved Please note two things at this point Frinting QSO 534 a Your existing log in Logger16 will not have been effected by this export and b The file YOURCALL ADI just created will be found in the Logger16 directory If you have valued contacts already within the Logger32 logbook and you need to retain these then it is recommended that also Link to topic Exporting Logs export these to an ADIF file at this stage for import again at a later stage Use Tools Export Logs ADIF file and follow the prompts given Step 2 Make any Corrections Necessary to the ADIF File lt is Important to note that if you have used some digital modes in Logger16 or another log program your program may not used a correct ADIF mode format Although the log file created in Step 1 will load you may find that the new statistics created Logger32 do not match up with what you observed in Logger16 or another program As an example of this you may have the term PSK instead of the f
170. g box in the middle Avoid the RTTY FIR Demodulator Filter The default filter is IIR The FIR filter seems to use more resources than either the IIR or PLL filter Do Not Use RTTY Tx Filters The Tx BPF bandpass and Tx LPF lowpass filters work to keep your transmit audio signal narrow and clean However they take processing power during transmit If you have problems during RI TY transmit try clicking Setup TX Tab and uncheck two items at the lower left However if CPU usage during transmit is not a problem leave these filters in place Reduce Sound Card Buffer Size in RTTY Mode This recommendation can have profound effects on the transmitted signal and should probably be a last ditch effort to get to operate in RTTY transmit Other changes should be tried first You can reduce the size of the sound card buffer as long as the transmit audio does not begin to break up This is tricky to adjust Click Setup Misc Tab and look to the left for the window labeled Buff The default is 1024 bytes Too low a number can chop the transmitted audio Too high a number can create transmit delays Calibrating the Sound Card Jan Ditzian KX2A Calibration for RTTY and for PSK31 Computer sound cards are supposed to run at a given clock frequency which controls the sampling frequency most often 11025 Hz However most cards are not that accurate and errors of a few to many Hertz are common It is possible to measure the sampling frequency of the co
171. ger program Polling Speed You must set the speed at which the software polls the radio for information The slower you set it the more delay you will see you change frequencies but the less likely it is that you will overload your computer In Logger32 standalone mode click Settings Radio control options to set the polling speed in milliseconds 500 msec is fairly A larger number will slow down polling Logger32 communicates with a connected radio under the following conditions Auto Poll The auto poll option is enabled on the Logbook Config window accessed from the Logbook entry window FREQ Clicking the Freq Button on the Logbook data entry window will read the radio frequency and mode This will set the Band Mode of the Logbook DX Clicking the DX Button on the Logbook data entry window will if you have a Callsign entered automatically read the frequency and make a DX spot on a Packet Cluster You select where to send the automatic DX Spot to the Packet port to a Telnet connection or to a Data port or any combination DX Spot Clicking on a DX Spot in the DX Cluster window will read the radio frequency for later reference and set the to the frequency mode of the DX Spot Reset Clicking the Reset button if it is active on the DX Cluster window will return the radio to its previous frequency mode before you clicked on a DX Spot Display Frequency from Radio Click View and then select Frequency Display then
172. ger32 main window rd Loggers X EH Previous Q502 LODRESS 7FL mE A reminder Snap Windows to Size adjusts all four dimensions of the windows Top Left Height and Width so the same for aligning windows side by side and one above another Easy huh Radio Debug Window Hew Lines VA3HU From the Setup Menu selecting the Radio Show Radio debug window menu item will display the Radio Debug Window The following picture displays communications between Logger32 and a Kenwood TS 870 Radio debug monitor Reply IF00002655000 001500 0103100008 Foll IF Bepi IFOOO03655000 001500 0102100008 Poll IF Reply IFOOOO3655000 007500 0103100008 Foll IF Repl IFODOOS655000 001500 0103100008 Poll IF 001500 0103100008 This window monitors the serial link between Logger32 and the radio and displays The hardware status of the serial port using two LEDs to show the current state of the DSR and CTS hardware signals Transmitted data from Logger to the radio in blue Received data from the radio in black and if the serial link is correctly configured the radio frequency and mode of operation Grid Square Calculator Geoff Anderson G3NPA Should you have the need to calculate a Grid Square reference then a simple converter is provided which will accept a latitude longitude reference and produce the appropriate Grid Square identifier On the top button bar click on nele
173. ght hand side when the window becomes full of text Text will scroll from the top of the window downward until the window is full At that point text is scrolled off the top out of the user s view The user can see this again by doing the following Press the lt Insert gt key on the keyboard one time 1 The Rx Window background will change to white or whatever color you have selected in the Toolbox menu item and the text is frozen The Scrollbar can now be clicked to scroll the buffered text through the Rx Window Press the lt Insert gt Key on the Keyboard to again start receiving text No Rx text is lost This technique works during transmit as well as in receive mode You can freeze and scroll the Rx Window while text you have already entered is being transmitted by Logger32 Note When you use the pause function the background turns white If you are using a white font the whole Rx display will turn white and you won t be able to see the letters Use the Receive Window Tx text Color menu item to change this color Aux 1 and Aux 2 Windows P LY Fa none ai ey ait fos ante 7 pce hes TE Sound Card Data 0 e A pees RxvWindow menu hidden File Settings ToolBox View Mode Display uxt Aux2 gt Clear The two Aux Rx windows are user selectable By clicking on Aux 1 or Aux 2 on the toolbar the Auxiliary Receive windows will be opened displayed sized and positioned on your screen If you have trouble fit
174. gimmediate PSK RTTY Logs the QSO and clears the buffer immediately longdate PSK RTTY Inserts the current date into the output text string in the form dd mm yy longdateandtime PSK RTTY Inserts the current date and time into the output text string in the form dd mm yyyy hh mm ss longtime PSK RTTY Inserts the current time into the output text string in the form hh mm ss loop PSK RTTY Causes a five 5 second delay after the macro has completed then re starts the macro see the section on More Difficult mode PSK RTTY Inserts the mode currently displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into the output text string mycall CW PSK RTTY Inserts the call of the current logbook into the output text stream name CW PSK RTTY Inserts the contents of the Name field currently displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into the output text stream net PSK RTTY Toggles the Net function on or off qpsk PSK RTTY Changes the mode to QPSK See Note 1 qpsk PSK RTTY Changes the mode to QPSK Inverted See Note 1 qsx nnnn PSK RTTY Shifts the transmit frequency of the radio up or down by nnnn Hz qsx 2000 shifts the frequency transmit frequency down by 2 kHz qsx 1500 shifts it up by 1 5 kHz This shift is terminated by the simplex command qsy nn nnn nn PSK RTTY Immediately changes the radio frequency to the specified value nnnnn nn For example qsy7070 or qsy14070 22 qth PSK RTTY Inserts the conten
175. gned to give a high average signal level during speech to give the voice more punch This may be acceptable on phone is it disastrous with digital signals transmitted with AFSK The second step is to barely give the automatic level control ALC anything to do If possible set the microphone gain low that the ALC indicator meter or light shows little activity Modulation of the Transmitter By a Sound Card With a sound card based digital system such as Logger32 MMTTY DigiPan or any of the SSTV computer programs connect the output of the sound card to the input of the audio modulation in the transmitter This input may be the microphone input or it may a separate connection intended for input of non voice signals Either way the sensitivity of the input is usually high This means that it takes a very low ac voltage generally around tens of millivolts to properly modulate the microphone input stage of the transmitter A sound card speaker output typically generates 100 millivolts to 5 volts because it is intended to drive an unamplified speaker so that the computer operator can clearly hear the sounds Therefore the sound card output voltage can be 100 or more times as as the microphone input was designed to handle The next few sections discuss how to deal with this problem Transmitter Audio Input Stage Microphone Gain Control When a ham who operates phone thinks of preventing overmodulation the first thought is to reduce the input
176. h Tab Set the taps at 256 to start this gives a relatively narrow deep notch and click the box next to Notch You can also invoke two notches but they will be at the same frequency resulting in a deeper notch Click OK You turn the notch on by left clicking in the graphic frequency display A bar appears at the notch frequency Right click in the frequency display and the notch turns off Note If you click in the waterfall you will move the receive passband you must click in the frequency display to operate the Display Smoothing You can set the spectrum display to be smoothed as you can for PSK31 the effect is the same Click Settings Display Smoothing and check the choice you want Fast Display No Smoothing When using Fast Display the signals are displayed in real time In real time you see the noise spikes and the signals jump up down in strength There is no damping Medium and Slow Display Little or Heavy Smoothing By selecting Medium or Slow Display options the displayed signals are averaged over a period of time The effect of these is to reduce the noise spikes lower the overall background noise and prevent the signal from jumping up and down on the The effect of the smoothing is easily seen on the display It is easy to experiment on received signals and determine which best suits the band conditions Align When you transmit there is less likelihood of your transmitting harmonic distortion products if you use
177. he Settings section EnergySaver On q If there is already an EnergySaver Off change it to EnergySaver On Before you make these changes copy this file so if there is a problem you can restore the old one have a problem setting the back colors for a macro key Reset the back colors with the key at the bottom then try again received an error message during Logger32 installation q1 Try installing Logger32 again Make CERTAIN that you close all programs before beginning the installation Be cautious to close any modem connection Sometimes Logger82 installs just fine despite other programs already running Logger32 requires the use of some DLL files dynamic linked libraries and provides them These may be older or newer than some you may have on your system The Windows recommendation is to keep the newer DLL but Windows will you to decide I try to start Logger32 from an icon and I receive a message that one or more files did not load and the program fails to run Check to make sure that you have ONLY ONE COPY each of DWSPYDLL DLL and SBC VBX on the c drive and that are in the directory containing LOGGER3z2 have an error in the time reported by Logger32 and my computer time is set to GMT There is an error caused by the fact that the Windows time at zero degrees longitude Greenwich England for England includes a correction for daylight savings time which that country uses However if you want to
178. he Logger32 folder Look for and delete the eight 8 files named Logbook32 isd isf is and ism and Stats32 isd isf isl and ism Go Name _ Modified pee City E BEE Logbook 321d ABE EB ISD File 0170372002 2 Logbook 32 ist 11 KE ISF File 01709372002 2 Logbook 32 1s OKB ISL File 01708 2002 21 Tptior Logbook 32 1300 2EB SM File 01709 72002 2 Ae Loggers ese 2464 EB Application 26 08 2002 11 A Logger32 HLF 32 745 EB Help File 05 08 2002 21 ER i laa ik 1A FM Daimi Fete AAAA AnA d HRING Way 12KB Wave Sound 04 09 1997 0 al STBUNS TL LOG 4KB LOG File e200 Stats32 isd 452KB ISD File 01 09 2002 2 E Stats32 ist 13KB ISF File 01709 2002 2 E Stats32 isl OKE ISL File 03 05 2002 2 E Stats ism 2KB ISM File 01709 2002 2 E RE Conhguration settings EIEE ey en oe Arl EB Tad rO M1 Cil 0D ee i o Step 4 Make Sure You Have Entered Your Callsign into the Current User Area You callsign should have been configured during the first opening of Logger32 However it is advisable at this stage to check that the callsign configured is the one you want Open Logger32 and make sure that the Logbook Entry window is visible If it not visible then click on the second icon from the left under the menu bar Right click on the grey area in the middle of this window NOT in one of the small panes and you will bring up the appropriate menu Select Change Operator and enter your callsign here If in Logger16 you have differen
179. he next time you enter his callsign this information can be retrieved and put in the log input window automatically To set up this facility select Setup Setup QSO Mask and select those items that you wish to be carried In the example below Name QSL via QTH and State will all be transferred from the previous contact record to the new you know how Bob is so quick on coming back with your name if you work him twice Which fields to copy from previous Q50s with a station rc L G Iv Gridsquares in proper case If this option is checked then captured or directly input information will appear in the form lO82nd _ If unchecked the format remain as typed or captured Name field in proper case If this option is checked then captured or directly input information will have the initial letter of the name capitalized and the remainder in lower case E g Geoff If unchecked the format will remain as typed or captured QSO Start time A QSO is transferred from the Log Input window into the logbook following an lt Enter gt or CTL L This action also stamps the QSO end time Two options to automatically stamp the start time are available these being when the callsign field loses its focus or when the QSO is entered into the log Callsign field loses focus What this means is that the QSO start time will be taken to be the moment you strike the TAB key to move away from the callsign entry to add further information into the
180. her your QSO s will be flagged for the eQSL file QSOs flagged for eQSL are not immediately recognisable but a left click on a QSO in the Logbook Page Window will indicate the flag from the pop up menu Flag QSOs for LOTW This button determines whether your QSO s will be flagged for the LOTW file If selected depressed all QSOs entered into the Logbook Entry Window will be flagged for export to the LOTW file BEG QSOs flagged for the LOTW are not immediately recognisable but a left click on a QSO in the Logbook Page Window will indicate the flag from the pop up menu Note At present the LOTW files are only dummies as the format has yet to be announced QSL File Creation Geoff Anderson G3NPA eQSL Files The eQSL file is a standard text txt file To create an eQSL file 1 Click on the Create eQSL File button on the Toolbar to produce the Export eQSL records Dlalog Box Export eQSL records Only WSU by jal Operators Start Stop 2 Select the appropriate operator s 3 Click on Start NOTE If there are no appropriate QSOs flagged in the log a message to that effect will be displayed and the opertaion will terminate 4 Either select a file name from those presented OR type in a new file name and click on Ok 5 Respond to the appropriate prompt to either Create a new file Replace or Append to the existing file or Cancel the file creation activity 6 If you do not Cancel at
181. his right click step Move to the window where you want to paste probably Tx and press the right mouse key and select paste Resizing the Tx Window Move the cursor slowly over the separation line between the Tx window and the Rx Window and when the cursor changes shape into a double arrow hold down the left mouse button to resize the window to your operating preference Operating On the Other Station s Frequency Net Operation Turn Net on and you will transmit on the other station s frequency If you turn Net off you will transmit where you last See the section on Audio Split Frequency Operation for more details a a TT 200 BPSK iassgHe O Simpe Reve Tran T el Using the Sound Card Data Window With or Without Radio Computer Communication The Sound Card Data Window will work without any direct radio interface You can operate PSK31 or RTTY as long as you have way to operate the transmit receive switching and get tones to and from the computer soundcard All the functions that are discussed here also work with radio computer communication Here are some functions that you have Display of your audio frequency Split operation using audio frequency split in PSK mode Data capture for use by macros and logging q Automatic data entry into the Logbook Entry Window q1 CD callsign lookup q Audio split frequency in PSK mode Logging From the Sound Card Jim Hargrave W5IFP Logger 32 has enhanced Logging proced
182. ifferent screen configurations to find the one comfortable It isn t our intent to tell you to use any particular configuration Instead we want to make you feel comfortable manipulating windows so you can decide how you want to use Logger32 Logger32 screens can be configured to be as simple or as complicated as you desire You decide the level of complexity If you only plan to use Logger32 without any other application start Logger32 and operate it full screen size Pick the resolution which best suits you Go to Toolbox for a variety of color settings for PSK31 and RTTY You can set font colors background colors for different colors for the waterfall and colors for the RT TY XY scope You can set colors for the audio frequency markers when you set markers using the Settings Audio frequency markers menu Color Set your screen display Settings Control Panel Display Settings to a value more than 16 colors High color 16 bit is acceptable Failure to set the color setting to a high enough value will cause problems with viewing the waterfall display Ways to Manipulate and View the Screens Depending on how much of the Logger32 screen you wish to view select a screen resolution starting with 800 X 600 If you wish see more of the Logger32 windows try 1024 X 768 or 1152 X 864 You need to go to Settings Control Panel Display to set these values for all of Windows 95 98 With this configuration when you click on a call you see it re
183. igns and Aliases are used Grid Appearance Setup B Charles Sutton W1MCP Four windows in Logger are setup in a grid format They are the Logbook Page Previous QSOs Worked Confirmed and DX windows Any changes in the Grid Appearance Setup will affect all four windows equally You access the grid appearance menu by choosing View Grid Appearance from the Main Menu RE Logger32 Fie Tools wiew windows Stats Setup Help F i Grid appearance d Row height i 150 pixels Background color Show grid lines 165 pixels Show grids alternating colors 180 pixels w Show Toolbar 165 cixel w Show upper statusbar Grids Font color 210 pixels w Show lower statusbar Grids background color 295 pixels Grids background color alternate rows 240 pixels w 255 pixels Row Height provides eight choices ranging from 150 to 255 pixels in height The following examples show how you could customize the Grid Appearance EE Stats x gx FMI 55B CW RTTY Paki Example 1 Example 2 Show grid lines will toggle the gridlines thin lines separating the rows and columns on and off Example 1 shows gridlines on Example 2 shows them off Show grids alternating colors will apply two alternating colors to each row in the grid Both examples use this feature Grids background color This has two effects If you are not choosing to show your grid with alternating colors this will be the background color of every row in your grid If you have chosen to d
184. igurations you need to check and make sure you do not have any conflicts between Modules Port configurations can be found in the following five locations within Logger32 Abbreviations Hew Lines VA3HU ADIF Automated Data Interchange Format AFC Automatic Frequency Correction AM Amplitude Modulation ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange BBS Bulletin Board System bps The number of binary digits transferred per second on a Serial link BPSK Biphase shift keying CAT Computer Assisted Transceiver CPU Central Processing Unit the heart of a computer CQZ CQ DX Zone number CR ASCII Carraige Control charatcer or the Enter or Return key on a PC keyboard CSV A standard data file format where fields of a data record are separated by commas CTS Clear To Send an RS 232 hardware handshaking signal CW Continuous Wave DSP Digital Signal Processing DSR Data Set Ready an RS 232 hardware handshaking signal DST Daylight Savings Time DTR Data Terminal Ready an RS 232 hardware handshaking signal DXCC DX Century Club eQSL An electronic QSL capability using the internet Visit www egsl cc for more information FM Frequency Modulation Freq Frequency FSK Frequency Shift Keying GMT Greenwich Mean Time HEX Hexadecimal numbering system that uses base 16 with digits from 0 F HF High Frequency Hz Hertz Intermediate Frequency IMD Intermodulation Distortion I O
185. ill become visible to the right of the End Time field Address amp Select ADIF Fields These two fields operate together When you change the Select ADIF Field the name on field immediately to its left will change to match your choice This allows you access to every field in your logbook As you change fields any data you entered in a previous field is retained and will be added to your QSO entry Several fields are sticky in that they remember the last data entered This should make adding several QSOs much easier especially if there are several on the same day or band Placing a check in QSL Sent or QSL Revd will update the corresponding ADIF fields Placing a check in Send to eQSL or Send to LOTW will flag the QSOs to be included in your next corresponding log export The Clear button will clear any data from the non sticky fields The Exit window will close the Add QSOs manually window If there is data in the fields it will not be logged If you try to enter a QSO with the same time as a QSO already in your logbook a pop up window will alert you click OK and either change the time or you will notice a red button labeled Increment time appear to the right of the Clear button on this will increment the time and log the QSO To delete a QSO right click in the appropriate row and select Delete QSO A confirmation pop up window will be displayed You must click Yes to delete the QSO or click No if you made an error To sea
186. ing received There are several ways to operate split in this way but only work in PSK mode With this method you can operate a limited split even if your radio is not capable of two VFO split operation Operating Split With Only the Main Window 1 We will assume that you know where the station you will call is operating and have that station in the receive range 2 Turn Net On This will cause you to transmit where you are receiving 3 Put the cursor on the spot where you want to transmit 4 Make avery brief transmission at that location click transmit on and off This will move the transmit frequency to that location 5 Turn Net Off This will leave the transmit frequency where you last transmitted 6 Click on the station you are trying to work so you can receive him At this point you will transmit where you last transmitted because Net is off You will receive where you click Here are pictures of two successive Logger32 screens The first is at the beginning of this operation the second is at the end You will note that the Transmit audio frequency is 1179 9 and the Receive audio freq is 825 9 You are now ready to give a call CQ Split Listening 350hz down de W5IFP You can program a macro to repeat this CQ with the following macro text transmit CQ Split CQ Split listening 350hz down de mycall mycall transmit CQ Split CQ Split listening 350hz down de mycall mycall pse k receive EST ROTOR Cheer
187. ins information about 1 The US State 1 The US County 1 The latitude and longitude of the approximate centre of the County or its most major city or town This information is contained in the four files COUNTY ISD ISF ISL and ISM These files must ALWAYS be treated as a set four The IOTA Database The full IOTA database is copyright of the Radio Society of Great Britain and is not provided as part of this program Information has been collected from various public domain sources Internet BBSs Packet Clusters and on air QSOs and input into a database provided with this program and it is provided for your reference only The accuracy and validity of this data is Entry window This information is provided to assist the user in correctly modifying the Country Alias and Offset databases ina manner that will increase the possibility of identifying the correct country from a callsign e First strip the callsign down to essential parts only Does the callsign appear in the Alias database If it does then the first part is complete This is done so that for certain callsigns i e SV8ASP A in Mt Athos rather than the normal A meaning of operating from an alternate QTH you would put SV8ASP A as an Alias for Mt Athos This check would find a match and not proceed to the check below that would remove the A Now strip off the M P A MM AG AA AE This information has nothing to do with the Country which we determined above
188. inserts a 250 msec delay before executing the next macro statement The following correctly sets the CW speed for the KAM CONTROL_CX CW speed delay CONTROL_CT To change CW speed use the following instruction CONTROL Cn Where n speed baud tS 2 10 3 15 4 20 9 25 6 30 G TOR The G TOR mode selection macros are CONTROL_CX Return to command prompt echo on See your transmitted text gtor Sets G TOR Standby mode or CONTROL_CX echo on gtor call Sets G TOR mode calling the specified station The following KAM G TOR instructions can be used in Logger32 CONTROL_CA Abort link CONTROL_CB Enter transparency mode binary CONTROL_CD Break link and stay in standby CONTROL_CE Returns to standby after transmit buffer is sent also puts If linked CONTROL_CR Immediately returns to receive mode regardless of TX buffer CONTROL_CS Selects the next MARK SPACE shift hz CONTROL_CT Enters transmit mode CONTROL CX Returns to command model CONTROL CO Sets automatic baud rate CONTROL C1 Forces 100baud irs CONTROL C2 Forces 200baud irs CONTROL C3 Forces 300baud irs An example G TOR CQ macro is CONTROL CT Enter transmit mode CQ CQ CQ DE mycall mycall mycall Send CQ followed by my call PSE ARQ IN GTOR MODE ONLY Aditional text transmitted KKK i CONTROL_CE Return to standby Packet mode AX25 The Packet mode selection macros is CONTROL_CX Return to command prompt echo off Do not view transmitted t
189. invoke it again 1 Shut down Logger82 and restart it Shut down Windows and restart it Review the archives of the Hamlogger reflector Ask for help on the Hamlogger reflector http yahoogroups com Logger82 to sign up Gripe and complain Macros do not work properly or consistently q Are the macros typed with before and after Example MYCALLS q Check the spelling of the long macros like upperorlower Do you have the latest PSKcore dll q If a macro using receive fails to transmit text before going to receive add three carriage returns to the beginning of the macro Special characters do not appear when enter alt ASCIl code The characters MUST be entered on the NUMERIC keyboard not the alphabetic keyboard 1 The alt key must be held down while you enter the entire four digit ASCII code See Macros for information on this subject When I type lose the mouse cursor Go to your mouse control software panel and see if you have Hide cursor when typing checked and uncheck it Logger32 does not show any signals on the spectrum display Goto Toolbox Sound card input level and make sure that you have not muted a control or set it too low The word in this sentence includes any software that takes control of the audio Check to see that your dog did not disconnect the connection from your rig s audio out to the computer The XY display does not appear in RTTY mode 1 Turn XY on 1 Click View Show T
190. ion Pid Reving tine ATS Keying only C DTA Keying only C ATS DTA Keping senal Pork None C Comi C Com C Com2 C Com C Com3 Com C Com 4 keping options f PTT by Serial Port C FTT by Radio Command f PTT by Shared Radio Fort CW setup Open the CW module click on Config and select Keyer setup This setup provides the option of using a Parallel or Serial port You must provide the address of the parallel or serial port you expect to use If you have CAT capability then It is suggested you use a serial port and configure it for Shared port In either case the interface needed will be the same You can also share the PTT functions on the same port Port setup Serial port address RH3FS Use shared serial port for Cw fo Parallel port address eHave Use dedicated serial port for Ca 7 Ts delay in me i 00 Use parallel port for Cw T A word space 6 dotz iat E P Slow typing Ea E mae PTT on selected port W co e ar n o o epee eet eee eee eee eee eee LETETT errr OK es Dot length n milliseconds Keying speed 12 2w PM Sound Card Interface Any commercial sound card interface should work on the FT 920 with appropriate wiring The following is a suggested interface provides complete isolation between the computer and the radio The potentiometers will provide external level adjustments so sound card settings can be left in a compatible setting for all soft
191. ire radio controlled by Logger32 Setup The setup menu item displays an additional pop up menu that provides the operator with the ability to select four more pop up menus and three additional functions ch Coo ar iu ma a 0m Ce BAND FREQ MODE Audio Alerts In this pop up menu the different audio alerts can be selected to sound when individual audio WAV files used in the DX Spot Window for each spot that meets the specified selection The WAV File played is based on the user s Band plan to determine bands and modes Selections will only play when the small box is checked DS Spot Audio Alert setup O New Band Country Brows New Mode Country Browse O New Band Mode Country Browse Country not confirmed Brows Band County not confirmed Browse Mode Count not confirmed Browse Band Mode Country not confirmed Apply Columns These four menu items are toggles that when checked display the specified column in the DX Spot Window If a menu item not checked that column is not displayed Filters The first menu item of this menu allows the user to display yet another pop up menu in order to set a call sign to be used by Telnet Cluster and Data Terminal Tab Panels of the Cluster Window pan ca ar Mdek2ywe 280406 J1RXG ee ee 22 20 00 WH2Ds le de wey BU O OO OAASS not oad Clearenties nnn js de delmus 24001000 0 WBF OGP 57 via 40 40 no taker Reset radio freque
192. isplay Performance Hardware Acceleration is too high Logger32 uses a lot of processor power and display acceleration may have to be reduces markedly I can run PSK31 but Logger32 gets slow or freezes in RTTY mode 1 You may be running out of computer resources with the extra load from the MMTTY engine Try running only the you need or just Logger32 q Try eliminating the Tuning Window It is also possible to eliminate just the XY display right click in the circle Use the CPU Power Saver Mode at the bottom of the Toolbox menu Check the topic Computer Tuneup in this Help file Everything appears in lowercase or UPPERCASE in PSK31 Go to Settings Typing preferences and choose whether you want all UPPERCASE all lowercase or if you want the shift key to work as typed cannot find my transmitted text in the Rx window It transmits and disappears from the Tx window Did you set the Rx Window font color Tx to the same color as the Tx background Go to Toolbox and fix it cannot see the frequency markers even though I set frequencies in the Settings Audio Frequency Markers menu Remember to turn on individual frequency markers with the View Frequency Markers menu received a Soundcard Error 12 message 1 1 Here is a list of conditions that can trigger this Windows message Input buffers overflowed Timed out waiting for inout buffers Output buffers Underflowed Timed out waiting for output buffers Function
193. isplay the grid with alternating colors this will be the primary background color Grids background color alternating rows If you have chosen to display the grid with alternating colors this will be the secondary background color Grids font color This will allow you to choose the font size and color for the data displayed in the grid Example 1 is using the Arial font in 8pt type and Example 2 the Times New Roman Font in 9pt type You can change a column s width by placing your mouse cursor in the header row between two columns directly over the grid line for example between FM and SSB in the examples above the mouse cursor will change shape to two opposing arrowheads Simply click and hold the left mouse button and drag the column to the width of your choice This will only change the width of single column and will not affect columns in other grid windows Grid Layout Setup B Charles Sutton W1MCP When choosing Grid Layout by right clicking from either the Logbook Page Previous QSOs or Worked Confirmed Window the following will be displayed Show Logbook Page column layout ca M OXCC DCC CiM GRIDSQUARE GRIDSQUAR vr F GSC_NUMBER OSO F CALL Call af 050_DATE tr F TIME_ON wy e TIME_OFF ty F FREQ tr F BAND tr F OSL_SENT 3 A OSL_ACVD ty F RST_SENT tr F RST_ACVD te F MODE 3 F SUBMODE tr F NAME tr F ADDRESS ty F AGE tr 4 ARRL_SECT tr E CNTY tr F COMMENT
194. it with Net On you will be transmitting zero beat with the received signal but using high tones CPU Resources The MMTTY RTTY engine is able to detect a lack of CPU resources during receive Click Settings Overload Warning to turn feature on if this feature is turned on for PSK31 mode it will also be on for RTTY mode The CPU light at the lower right will red for a few seconds if there is a lack of resources If this happens consider the solutions proposed in the Computer Tuneup section Profiles Logger32 has a special feature whereby you can set a number of parameters and remember them as a Profile When you want to operate with these parameters instead of looking them up in a book and changing things you can invoke the Profile Profiles only work for RT TY mode not for PSK Transmitting RTTY Andrew J O Brien KB2EOQ Logger32 uses MMTTY high end RTTY software modem as its RTTY encoding decoding engine Basic RTTY features are settings for Logger32 MMTTY Here is how to start transmitting RTTY using Logger32 Basic Procedures Hardware Setup If you have successfully transmitted PSK31 you already have all the hardware hook ups and radio interfacing ready to go If you have not yet set up your computer and rig please see the topic Interfacing the Radio to a PC Sound Card Enter RT TY Mode You enter RTTY mode by one of the following methods q Click on the mode pane at the left of the Statusbar Click Mode RTTY on the mai
195. k3 Logbook statistics There are 7999 QSOs tn the Logbook Logbook is 1 12942 full eee E mit Setup digital modes w Digital Modes S56 PSK31 CW OF Cancel Recalculate statistics Recalculate Stats ee xj pear fF Fr ov C Recalculate Abort Reformat QSO numbers Reformat 050 Numbers GSO number 633 Start Abort Maintain the IOTA database Maintain the US County database Maintain the Country Prefix database Import Logs in ADIF format Export Logs in one of the following formats ADIF Comma delimited CSV UQF text Export files in one of the following formats QSL eQsL LOTW The VIEW menu item allows the user to Display the DX Spots window Display the Notes window Display the Logbook Entry window Display the Logbook Page window Display the Previous QSOs window Display the Cluster Window Display the Sound Card Data window Display the Tracking window Display the Worked Confirmed window Modify the Grid Appearance Modify the Form Background Color Display or Hide the Toolbar Display or Hide the Status Bars The AWARDS menu item enables the operator to display the following Award statistics The Islands IOTA IOTA Mixed Mode with All Operators islands rond 42nal1stal4zh om som 40m som 160M a Aqaleqa Islands CQ Zones US States AF O02 AF O03 AF O04 AF O05 AF O06 AF OOF AF 008 AF O09 AF
196. ke 5 changes and then select cancel all five changes will be lost Placing a check mark before Check to show ADIF DXCC field as Country name will show the Country name in the DXCC of your Logbook unchecked will show the DXCC Number NOTE the field only contains the DXCC number and regardless of this setting Log Exports will ONLY contain the DXCC number this is to maintain ADIF compliance Also if you sort the Logbook on the column it will sort numerically not alphabetically Standard Time Zones Geoff Anderson G3NPA The Date and Time panel in the Upper Status Bar gives the local time for the prefix entered in the Logbook Entry Window The generation of this time information relies on the Standard Time names used within the Microsoft operating system in use It has found that there are some differences between the various Windows systems and in earlier versions some of the Standard Time names which have been set within the Logger32 countries database are not present If you are using Win 98 Win 98SE or Win a local time will not be shown for some prefixes unless steps are take to correct this problem Logbook Page I OSa Date Start Callsign Mode RST 5 wena j 400 26 Oct 01 18 51 00 GIAA 14 210 SSH 59 ey nee 401 Ar Oct 01 07 39 00 9K97 JK 25 546 10M S58 59 402 27 Oct Ol 27 16 00 WP2E VPE 20 590 10M H 59 403 30 Oct 01 11 46 00 A52D4 AS 21 071 15M PSK 599 404 28 Dec 01 19 4542 KAC yy 24 939 1
197. ked on BAND but need on MODE Need IOTA on BAND Need IOTA on any Band Mode Clicking More detailed information will bring up and populate the IOTA list as set up in your IOTA database for the band and mode being used at the time An example is given below for EU 006 EU 006 Need on 20M 55B Operator GSNPA OTE 7 Pix lsland groug Lat EU 002 OHO Aland lelands 60 1417 EU 003 CUL Eastern group of 4167 ELI 004 E46 Balearic lslands 39 3333 EU 005 aibi Great Britain Main lsland Only 54 2500 Elo Aran lalandas 000 EU 007 El Blasket Izlanda 52 0833 EU 008 hitit Inner Hebrides 56 6667 EU 009 GMA Orkney 59 0667 FL 0110 hitit ter Hebrides r gSA EU O06 Brannock Isles EU O06 Inisheer EU U06 Inishmore EU O06 Inishmaan Note that the IOTA search has been set to EU 006 and the highlight placed in the correct position in the table The window shown above may be used to carry out searches for islands or groups Typing in a word in the Island search will give island names that most closely match what you have entered in the left hand pane Alternatively one can enter the island IOTA code and all the known islands in that group will be displayed note that this will depend on what you have into the main database In the picture below the Island of Belli has been entered and by clicking on the name in the left two things will happen First all the islands listed in that group will appear in the right hand pane and second
198. lay scaled in Audio Frequencies go to View Frequency Display and select Display Audio Display Using Radio Frequency From Your Radio If you have radio computer communication you can configure Logger32 to display beginning at your radio s frequency Under Settings on the Main Menu select Preset Radio Frequency Select mode USB or LSB If your radio sends sideband information to Logger32 then this setting will be ignored Under View on the Main Menu select Frequency Display Select Display Frequency From Radio When you have completed the above the following macros will work properly and the radio frequency will be displayed on the pane from the left on the Statusbar q radioandtone q radiofreq upperorlower 1 rxtonefregqs View Mode Display Aux1 Aux Clear Shaw Tuning Window RE AEN RN RAN A w Show Tuning display Show statusbar show Raley toolbar Show Radio debug window 14077 Frequency markers H a w Display frequency from radio Macro buttons Display audio frequency Rx window options d Frequency display Fixed Radio on 14070 00 USB la jaog2 7 Fixed Radio on 14070 00 L56 Ae Wi im TE z Fixed Radio on 14071 00 USB 170 818 KHz TORZE j Simples 5 Fece Fixed Radio on 14071 00 LSB Logger32 can display a maximum of 4000 Hz of receive bandwidth receive range however it will only receive and transmit over 3000 Hz bandwidth from 0 Hz to 3000 Hz of audio Display Sensitivity
199. lbar Squelch Squelch works in RTTY as it works in PSK31 If the signal does not reach the preset squelch level it will not be decoded This decrease the amount of garbage characters that appear on your screen but setting the squelch level high can also fail to some letters Change the squelch level by View Show Tuning window and then left clicking in the vertical area with the yellow or red bar low for an open squelch print everything and high for a tight squelch print only strong signals The black line shows where the squelch is set and the bar shows signal strength The bar is red when the signal is below the squelch threshold and yellow when it is above the squelch threshold Bandpass Filter BPF The bandpass filter narrows the receive bandpass using AF DSP This filter remains centered on the RTTY passband when the passband moves Normal Reverse Sense This switch reverses the relative positions of the mark and space tones Normal operation is with the radio set to LSB and the switch set to Normal In this case the mark signal is higher in radio frequency than the space signal since for LSB a higher tone means a lower radio frequency If you want to speak to a station that is upside down or backwards in sense then press this button to reverse your mark and space tones Your transmit will change to be the same sense as your receive setup XY Display RTTY Tuning Scope In the past a standard tool for receiving RT
200. le Be sure to back up your Logger32 ini file before attempting this Many of the user settings within the Zakanaka and Logger32 INI files are identical and with a little cut and paste work the most significant of one s original settings can be transferred to work from within Logger32 without the to type them all in again This procedure is not for the faint hearted and if you are in any doubt or have concerns just set up the sound card window as though it was all new It is recommended that the following procedure be adopted should you wish you utilise your favoured settings 1 Make backup copies of the Logger32 AND Mmity INI files to be found in your default Logger32 directory Do same with your Zakanaka ini 2 Delete the Mmity INI file from your default Logger382 directory 3 Copy the Mmtty ini file from your default Zakanaka directory to your default Logger32 directory Now for the more complex bit 4 Open the Logger382 ini file in your default Logger32 directory in Notepad or WordPad 5 At the same time open the Zakanaka ini file from your default Zakanaka directory also in Notepad or and arrange for BOTH sets of open files to be visible on the screen at the same time 6 Using cut and paste transfer the following sections from the original Zakanaka ini to the new Logger32 ini removing the original contents of course Waterfall Color RTTY Macro RTTY Macro Markers This will set up the most significant of
201. le to preset every parameter in the MMTTY engine except for the following which are set on the main display q FIG LTR on off Mark frequency All MMTTY parameters are stored in a file called UserPara ini in the Logger32 folder You can edit this file with a text editor as Notepad but it must be saved in TXT format with exactly the same name You can change any parameter to any legal Furthermore if you do not want to save a parameter but instead you want MMTTY to keep the parameter at whatever value it before you call the profile delete the line for that parameter from UserPara ini For example if you want to define a new Profile to change the number of taps in the BPF but you do not want the shift width to change you intend to use this on the fly under QRM conditions you can erase the line in that particular profile that reads DefShift 1 700000e 02 This means that DefShift is no longer defined in this Profile and it remains unchanged When you set the new tap value in MMTTY the parameter RXBPFTAP will change The new value should stay in the Profile because this the reason you are making this Profile Note At this time there is no published lexicon of the names and definitions of the values You should back up your original UserPara ini in case you have a problem You will have to guess at which parameter controls which actual MMTTY value if you to work directly with UserPara ini Additional Information Windows Geoff Anders
202. lect QSL Via and left click This field requires user setup with the definition of QSL_VIA Aux lear ITH VWwdofca Mame vidotca Callsign WWDOSFCA QSL Via WWOSF CA Grid square VWWOSFCA Each time you click on the above elements they will automatically appear in the LOG ENTRY window Here is a sample of the Log entry showing all the above entries Ej Logbook Entry W5IFP Freq 3579 34 Mode PSK31 Band 80M Call WSIFP gata pees ee Sent 599 10 10 10530 J Revd 599 QSL WDSFCA Mame Jim SRX 219 IOTA NA 067 9 ATH Bulverde State T 2 GRID Emo9ss When you complete the QSO you can automatically log the data into the main LOGBOOK by using macros within the sound card window You can include log in your signoff macro or you can also have a dedicated macro for that purpose Here is an of the log included in the signoff macro w Macro Setup for F 3 s name TN for the nice PSK GSG Hope to catch you on the waterfall again soon God Bless you and your family callf de mycall SK SK freceives log setup Macro button appearance Backcolor Forecolor Ok Cancel Reset Backcolors The following is an example of a dedicated logimmediate macro This macro will log the QSO with the current time of the computer Mouseover Backcolor Button Caption Mouseover Forecolor fds Reset Cancel all settings w Macro Setup for F
203. ler f Rotor Setup a es Com port Com 2 Stopite 1 Baudrate 4800 Parity Hone Set DTR high Databits E Set RTS high M ft OF Wain OCL 1 Ho Rotor Band 15M Yaesu G5 23 G5 2352 ACZ8O00 Me Rotors HyGain DEU elpro SAK 232 a The Set DTR high and Set RTS high are used to set interface power on from the RTS DTR lines Selection of Path The user can determine whether to use short or long path The system will remember the user setting and use it for the default direction Right click on the Rotor box in the bottom status line A pop up menu will appear giving you the two path options Just click on the one you desire A check mark will show the user selection ame Close port Set default to long path mee Set default to short path Change antenna direction Open and closing the Rotor port This can also be accomplished by right clicking on the rotor box at the bottom and selecting Close Port from the pop up menu Sound Card operation When the focus is on the Sound Card the antenna rotor can be controlled by the use of a macro with the command rotor in it This macro will automatically position the antenna once a callsign has been entered into the Logbook Entry window Call field callsign may be entered manually or by left clicking on a callsign in the Sound Card receive text w Macro Setup for CTRL F5 Setup Macro button appearance ee Backcolor Mouseover
204. lines to do so in some programs To export your log From the Main Toolbar select the Tools Menu then the Export Logs option then choose ADIF file ae Lorfers Fie Tools View Awards CW Setup Help GridSquare calculator a Fd Ea Fe B6 gt Snap windows bo size Setup Bands amp Modes Database maintenance F Import logs Export logs d Export files d Export Q5L File Export eS File Create QSL File Export LOT File Logger32 will prompt you for the filename you wish to export your QSO records to You can choose an existing file doing this will overwrite all data in that file or you can create a new file A popup window will then prompt you for some additional information oso 8 CALL FFY GDATE a4 CALL Add O50 ggs CALL O36 CALL Delete O50 qs CASLL ase Cea Search For Q50 geo CALL eee Miika ggz CALL Send eQs5L w Send LOTW OSL Sent Edit QSL info Setup Select the appropriate operator you wish to export QSO records for or choose All Operators If you place a check in the Partial Log box you will then be asked for the starting and ending dates for the range of QSO you wish to export When you click Start Logger32 will begin exporting your QSOs You can click Abort any time after this point to stop the Importing Logs B Charles Sutton W1MCP For specific instructions on transferring your logs from Logger16 to Logger32 please refer to the help topic Logs from Logger16 a
205. log input window The CTL S key combination will override the start time it is used before the first time the callsign field loses focus When QSO entered in log If this option is selected then by default the start time will be the same as the end time Even with this option selected the S key combination will still record the start time if pressed Please note that both the start and end times can be recorded automatically if the starttime and endtime macros are in the shortcut key definitions in the soundcard window PSK amp RT TY These macros are NOT available for use in the CW machine Other Menu Items Copy text Paste text De Spot Ctrl D Log O50 Chrl L Clear entries Ctrl C Change prefix Ctrl F Change offset Chrl O CD ROM lookup Ctril R WAZ COM lookup Ctri O Antenna direction Ctrl 4 Set QSO end tine Ctrl E Set QSO start time Ctrl 5 Change operator Setup Change operator The Logger32 logbook is designed to be used by one or more operators if required If you wish to change the operator who is using the log at the time select this option and change the callsign Control Letter functions You will see from the above menu that there are a number of functions that can be accessed using shortcut keystrokes All reasonably self explanatory except perhaps the two that are grayed out in the above example Antenna direction is gray because in this case the antenna rotator function is not set up and or the comm
206. lso change the sense of your transmitted signal so you can work the other station this MMTTY the RTTY engine within Logger32 has numerous advanced features for selecting filters that improve weak signal performance See the MMTTY help files for details Toolbox Dropdown Menu Note The Toolbox menu works the same as it does when you receive PSK31 The information from that topic is copied here The following are user selected options for the Rx window ToolBox View Mode Display Aux Rx window font Rx window Tx text color Rx window control codes color Rx window normal background Re window paused background R window mouseover highlight Rx Window Colors As seen on the above drop down Toolbox menu we find the following user options 1 Rx window font sets print style and text color 2 Rx window Tx text color sets color for echoed text Echoed text is enabled disabled with the View Rx Window Options menu 3 Rx window control codes color Control codes are enabled disabled with the View Show Control Codes menu item 4 Rx window normal background 5 Rx window paused background sets the background color when all Rx windows are paused with the lt Insert gt key 6 Rx window mouseover highlight sets color for text change when you put the mouse on it This is useful when you are selecting text to right click for the comment field of Logger32 or when selecting a callsign or RST for a log Rx Window Pause The Rx Window
207. lso reset your radio frequency the proper amount so that the signal is now at the default Rx frequency You should still be copying the signal Here is an example Set your default Rx frequency to 2000 Hz which is high within the range of your narrow filter so if you overmodulate you will probably not generate harmonics since they fall outside your transmit passband The radio is currently tuned to 14 070 MHz Left click to receive someone at 14 0705 MHz This means that you will be transmitting a 500 Hz tone which is quite low and may cause distortion q Use align function right click or macro q1 Logger32 will retune the radio to 14 068 MHZ which is now the low end of the Soundcard Data Window frequency display You are still receiving and transmitting at 14 0705 MHz The station is now at 2000 Hz in your Rx and Tx transceiver range which is pretty high and not subject to as much distortion as the 500 Hz tone lt may be useful to know where on the display your signal is going to end up so set a colored frequency marker at your default Rx frequency Every time you right click the mouse the radio will retune so that the frequency under the mouse will become the Rx frequency where you have a colored marker Read about how to use this marker feature in Screen Control Operation lt is possible to tune your radio using this feature click anywhere in the display and that spot will move to the Default Main Rx Fr
208. m Bulverde TX Grid EM igss RST RST 4599 SR 599 QTH 599 Name 4599 eE SS Callsign 599 Pepe MSL Vig 544 Grig square Tag TEN_TEN number Right click on the Ten_Ten select 10X then left click This field requires user setup with the ADIF of TEN_TEN it fe ound Card Data RaWindow menu hidden File Settings Toolbox View Mode Displey Aune 4 f de W5ifp Jim Bulverde TX Grid EM 9ss RST 599 19 1 gt 10530 IOTA MAMET SEWE 711 SRX 10530 LTH 10530 Name 10530 108 10530 Calista 10530 QSL Via 10530 Grid square 10530 IOTA island designation Right click on the IOTA number select IOTA then left click This field requires user setup with the definition of IOTA i sound Card Data a RxWindow menu hidden File Settings ToolBox View Mode Display AUR 1 AUR 2 Clear d fe Wiis ifp Jim Bulverde TH Gri d Et ZS gss RST 599 18 4 iat 15 535 IOTA a OTH Maer IOTA NA DG7 Name Na 067 Callsign NA 067 QSL Via MA 067 Grid square NA OB ao pe Wann Ieee Ca Contest QSO report number Right click on the QSO contest report number select QSO number then left click This field user setup with the ADIF definition of SRX Mode Display Aun RS Clear 30 IOTA NA GIBT SRKP IIT OC vin temeren RST 319 SRX 719 ATH 2714 MHame 219 10x 219 Callsign 219 QSL Via 3219 Grid square 219 QSL manager Right click on the QSL manager s callsign Se
209. m of the logbook With focus on the window the Page Up and Page Down keys will also scroll the log one page The sort you have selected is maintained when scrolling through the logbook Changing the appearance of the logbook grid You can change the appearance of the grid such as displaying the grid lines changing the row height and column width alternating grid background colors and much more Please refer to the section Link to topic Grid Appearance Setup Grid Appearance Setup for complete details Setting up the grid and choosing the fields to display When you right click anywhere inside the Logbook Page window a pop up menu will appear allowing you to modify it These changes apply only to the logbook page E Logbook Page Beeb lore alts EDS y we WW a GEL AAMO tS a Bi M Bi Eames mL CAILL 02 Aproo of Add aso 2o0305 00 TOM nt i 54 59 SSH 05 Apr OO 2 20445 00 10h Jit Sie 59 SSH g OF Aproo ol Delete 950 20305 00 10h ne iit 54 5y SSH OF Apr OO Ol Search For Q50 20305 00 10M Si ai 5y 54 oSA OF Apr Oo Ol 20305 00 10h T Y 59 59 SSH 0S ADPOO Ol send OSL 20305 00 10M SE ha 5y 5y SSH Us Anr 0l 1 20305 00 TOM at E 59 54 SSA BSA Of Apr 2 5endeQsl 20305 00 10M ui R aF 55 SoH ami EAM Send LOTW gt z QSL Sent Edit QSL info Setup i rid layout Cell text color edit Cell background color redit Choosing Cell text color edit and Cell background color edit will change the color of the cell you have chosen to edit
210. manual editing labor of love if you require your log to look correct or you could try using CONVERSION EXE 2 There is a minor bug in Logger16 when exporting a PARTIAL log in that it will not output QSO data for the final date selected It will output all QSOs up to the date but not for the final date itself In order to overcome this problem select a date as one day AFTER the selection required In other words if you require QSOs between 1 Jan 2000 and 31 Dec enter the start date as 01012000 and the end date as 01022002 This bug is NOT apparent if you export the whole log Use of Conversion Exe Only to be used to convert Logger16 ADI files to Logger32 ADI files In an attempt to assist with the problems described in points to Note 1 above a small routine has been included with Logger32 which will look at the Comments and Mode fields from Logger16 This routine cannot cater to every situation that could arise your Logger16 ADIF file so it is far from perfect The routine does two things a It will assume that the first word in the Comments field is a NAME and generate a name field with this word in it This has been selected as if one was using Zakanaka with Logger16 Zakanaka would place a name as the first item in the Comments field b Any words in the original Comments field can be either placed in a new QTH or new Comments field OR discarded at user s option c An attempt will be made to convert the old MODE field t
211. me the Logbook Entry Window at 25 pixels from the top Drag the Previous QSOs with the mouse so the top is very to being aligned to the top of the Logbook Entry Window let s say it s at 27 pixels just a little higher File Tools iew Stats CW Setup Help wy EO amp 8 Ganee BSP j Logbook Entry YA3HU sha ne ae vious 50s Freq EE SSB Band S0 AGE RRL Call H oent o Revd E Marne po GTH P Comments Select Snap Windows to Size and the top of the Previous QSOs Window will snap to 25 pixels and the tops of both Windows are now exactly aligned File Tools Wiew Stats CW Setup Help e me G e HEE 38 BEA aj Logbook Entry YA3HU AN Presi lous ae FEL SE Sar i Band E0 Call FO oent o Revd fo Harme po ITH Comments 7 The above example was worst case If you were lucky when you first aligned the Logbook Entry Window and the Previous QSOs Window you would have gotten closer than we did above Assume the top of the Logbook Entry Window was at 10 Pixels and Previous QSOs Window was at 12 pixels from the top of the Logger32 main window File Tools Yiew Stats Cw Setup Help SS a o gt EEA Ei Previous O50s Fes Made SSB Band 80 AGE RRL Call a gent J 0 Ricvd J 0 Mame J 0 ATH oooO OS comments PO al selecting Snap Windows to Size would have aligned the tops of both Windows at exactly the same height 0 pixels from the top of the Log
212. med in any language The data itself is easily read by eye and may implemented so as to be transferred via Internet without any encoding Many Logger32 Fields are being validated in accordance with the ADIF specifications and may only contain valid ADIF defined The applicable ADIF data tables are detailed here for reference purposes The ADIF specification is subject to change and the current version may always be found at http www hosenose com adif VALID BAND ENTRIES 160M 15M 70CM 3CM 80M 12M 35CM 1 25CM 40M 30M 20M 17M 10M 6M 2M 1 25M 23CM 13CM 9CM 6CM 6MM 4MM 2 5MM 1MM VALID MODE and SUB MODE ENTRIES MODE SUB MODE HELL HELL HELL HELL HELL HELL HELL HELL TOR TOR TOR PAC PAC PAC2 PAC2 PAC2 PAC2 PAC2 CLO CLO CLO CLO CLO FH PoRH DH FMH PORE SFH CMT SMT FEG SB LF EC AARQ UNP PARQ UNP2 DBP SK DOPSK SDP Sk 1LODPSK FEC ZDP5M PEC BPSM PEC OPSM FEC SPsoM FEC 8P2A Description lt lt lt What MODE is used for the last three gt gt gt Feld Hell PSK Hell DUPLO Hell FM Hell FSK Hell SLOW FELD Hell Concurrent Multi Tone Hell Sequential Multi Tone Hell AMTOR FEC AMTOR SELFEC AMTOR ARQ PACTOR 1 UNPROTO PACTOR ARO PACTOR2 UNPROTO DPSK PACTOR 2 ARQ DPSK PACTOR 2 ARQ DQPSK PACTOR 2 ARO BDPOR PACTOR 2 ARQ 16DPSK CLOVER FEC 2DPSM CLOVE
213. mit lower sideband have your RTTY set to NORMAL default If you transmit RTTY using upper sideband set Logger32 s RT TY to reverse inverse or inverted polarity See the RTTY Basics topic for more information on what this means You can set the polarity with the RTTY toolbar Normal Reverse button Switch Modes Using a Hotkey Logger32 provides hotkeys that can be programmed as a macro in RTTY mode for this purpose rttyreverse is the macro command to invert the signal and rttynormal is the macro command to change back into normal setting see the Macros topic full instruction on how to program macros You can also use the macros rtty or rtty i These two macros can be used from any mode and they will switch the Logger32 RTTY mode normal or inverted respectively If you want to enter the RT TY engine and set up normal or inverted mode use the RT TY Setup button on the toolbar On the Demodulator tab in this display there is a box at the extreme lower left labeled reverse Put a check in this box to operate polarity MMTTY always receives and transmits with the same polarity so when this box is checked you will transmit and inverse polarity Picture txrtty6 omp Transmitting With Macros In RTTY mode Logger32 clears the PSK macros and starts fresh Many macros work with both PSK and RTTY the basic ones transmit and receive are the same Macros with rtty in them are specifically for RTTY mode Copy Macros from PSK to R
214. mm to 3 5mm stereo audio cable and a 3 5mm to 1 4 stereo adapter for the transceiver side lt To PC Soundcard MIC LINE IN fe 3 5mm to 3 5mm Shielded Audio Cable 3 5mm to 1 4 Adaptor To Transceiver Headphone Jack gt In some setups with the headphone jack part of the way in you can monitor transceiver audio through the radio speaker while sending the audio to the sound card This is a great aid in tuning signals by ear while monitoring them on Logger32 s tuning With this simple cable no soldering required you re ready to try to receive digital mode signals with Logger32 Set Receive Audio Levels It is important to adjust your sound input and output levels This is done with the Volume and Recording controls in Windows 98 95 and NT Logger32 enables you to get to these controls from within the program First let s look at a warning feature by Logger32 Receive Overload Warning Logger32 has an overload warning to let you know if audio from the receiver is overdriving the computer sound card The background of the spectrum waterfall display turns red when input audio level is too high However if you reduce the audio too much this is like turning down the RF gain on your transceiver and weak signals are not detected You can see how this works by bringing up the Sound Card Input Level control Toolbox on top of Logger32 and sliding the control up until you see the display turn red Some sound cards do not overdrive easily
215. mmand These commands are used to send strings of commands to the radio serial port in either ASCII 6command or hexadecimal hexcommand You can see these codes being sent to the radio in the Radio Data window The topic Direct Control of Radios shows how to use these codes for some radios Normally control of the radio is handled by Logger82 but these commands can be used to implement functions not already in Logger32 Program them into macro buttons so you can invoke a command sequence with a script assigned to a single macro button For example you could program a macro button to select filters in your radio A Warning About Callsigns When you use macros to send your callsign at the end of a transmission especially in RTTY mode it is wise to put some spaces and the letter K after your callsign When the receiving station displays or prints your transmission there may be garbage characters that appear immediately after you end your transmission This is because the receiving station s squelch could take a second or two to adjust to the no signal condition If your callsign was sent as the last item of text before you turn off the carrier other station may add some garbage characters to it For example de KX2A may become de KX2AP because a garbage P was displayed when the carrier went off However de KX2A K would be displayed as de KX2A KP and it unlikely that the receiving station will confuse the callsign
216. mn shows a symbol that represents the alignment of the data in that column lt indicates Left Justified indicates Centered and gt indicates Right Justified To change the alignment of a column right click on the symbol and choose from the three options or simply overtype the symbol In the Logbook Page example in the first example at the top of this page The QSO number column is right justified the Call column is left justified and the Mode is centered Rearranging the order the columns will be displayed in is a little tricky and may take a few attempts to get the hang of it The top header is the first column displayed in your LogBook page and the bottom right header is the last column displayed To move a column left click on the yellow arrow to the left of the field name you wish to move and hold the mouse button down Drag that to the appropriate yellow box and release the mouse Notice that the yellow boxes are positioned offset between two field names releasing the mouse will move that field to a position between those two fields For example if you wanted to move the STATE to a position after the ADDRESS field you would left click and hold on the arrow to the left of STATE shown above in red then the field to the box between ADDRESS and AGE shown above in green and release the mouse NOTE If you make a mistake choose cancel and the changes will not be applied as changes are only applied when you OK Bear in mind that if you ma
217. mputer sound card and then to put this information into Logger32 Logger32 will then know for instance if the sound card sampling frequency is 11028 Hz and will use this in its calculations instead of 11025 The sound card frequency is not changed The next few sections discuss two ways of calibrating Logger32 in RT TY mode Once you have done this you can use the value you have found to modify the Logger32 ini file to improve PSK31 operation The PSK procedure will be found following the RTTY calibration procedure Calibration Using a Frequency Counter 1 Set the frequency meter to measure the audio frequency of the audio output from the sound card the line that goes from sound card to the audio input of the radio 2 Turn off AFC on the RTTY toolbar 3 Click Setup Misc Tab and make sure that the clock at the lower left is set to 11025 Hz 4 Turn off diddle on the Tx Tab 5 Set the mark frequency to 2000 Hz on the Demodulator Tab 6 Click OK to close this display 7 Goto transmit Do not put the transmitter on turn off vox or disconnect the PTT line and do not send characters You want to transmit only the mark tone of 2000 Hz 8 Measure the frequency of the tone The actual sampling frequency which is supposed to be 11025 Hz can be calculated from the measured tone The proportion of error of the tone shows how far the frequency is off For example with a mark frequency of 2000 Hz and a measured tone of Hz the act
218. n a space occurs between character and 69 Logger32 generates a carriage return line feed CR LF the text wraps to the next line and when you reach the end of word this CR LF is also transmitted to the receiving station If all goes well his line will wrap when yours wraps Remember in RT TY mode you must have word out enabled If there is no space between character 63 and 69 Logger32 inserts a CR LF after character 69 and puts what would have been 70th character on the next line as the first character This CR LF is also transmitted to the receiving station This means that if see that words are being split between lines you should try to type a carriage return Enter key on the keyboard before you reach that point If you would rather send text without Logger32 putting in line wrap turn line wrap off in the Settings menu by clicking it the check mark disappears Colored Frequency Markers Logger382 provides a way to mark the frequency display scale for you to keep track of specific audio frequencies even when you using a radio frequency display This feature is useful in conjunction with the align feature Here is how you can put frequency markers on the display Goto Settings Audio Frequency Markers and specify an audio frequency for one of the four markers 1 Goto View Frequency Markers and click on one of the markers to make it appear on the frequency display at its audio frequency You can also go to Settings Audio Frequenc
219. n allows for differing setups for each individual operator Logbook Entry Window Geoff Anderson G3NPA Basic Setup As the name implies this is the window through which the main entries are made to the logbook It is quite complex and highly configurable so you are well advised to take time to study this section to fully understand what facilities are available from here picture shown below is the most basic Logbook Entry Window The top line shows the frequency the mode and the band that will be logged The frequency will be derived from your radio if you have CAT control and it is set up and activated If you do not have computer control then the frequency can be set manually The Mode and Band will be derived from your Band Plan or if desired these also can be set manually more later on this Below top line are entry panes for Callsign RST sent RST received Name and QTH You MUST enter a callsign at the very least you can transfer anything to the log To change between panes use the lt TAB gt key on the keyboard To transfer the QSO information to the logbook then use the key combination CTL L or the lt Enter gt key If you wish to clear the whole entry window for any reason then use the key CTL C Logbook Entry G3NPA coreg T4000 sso Made PORT Band 20M When using this basic arrangement or indeed more complex set ups aS soon as you enter a callsign prefix that is recognized following will occur Logbook Entry
220. n finished The notes will saved to the ADIF Notes field and an internal database Adding or Deleting a QSO To add a QSO right click anywhere in the Logbook Page Window and select Add QSO The following menu will appear ADD OS0s manually g Date Time Callsign Pri jaugoz02 ozs SP Band Mode Freg as 14200 00 AST Sent AST Acwd 23CM FM 1281000 00 59 59 Mame ITH ee Operator ADDRESS Select ADIF field WMCP ADDRESS US State US County End Time 00 00 00 m OSL Sent OSL Revd SendtoeQSl Sendto LOTW 400 O50 Clear E mit Navigation Use Tab to move between main fields use CTRL_TAB or your arrow keys to move between sections of a field Use your up amp down arrow keys to scroll through any field with a list like Band Date Field This field will default to the current date You can change the date by highlighting any of the three sections day or year and increase or decrease the field by using the and keys on the numeric pad or by using the up and down arrows You can also select a date by clicking on the arrow to the right of the date and accessing the calendar Time Field This field works very similar to the date field Band and Mode As you enter data here you will notice the frequency will change to approximately the middle of that section of the band The frequency can then be manually changed If you enter a mode that has a submode associated like the submode field w
221. n menu q1 Use a macro such as rtty or rtty i from PSK mode These must be programmed on a macro button see Link to MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons Be sure to read the macro topic It is useful in RTTY mode Warning If Logger32 becomes unstable in RT TY mode operating slowly or failing to do something read the topic Computer Tuneup RTTY mode is very demanding of computer resources Switch to Transmit Transmitting in RTTY mode is mostly the same as transmitting in PSK31 mode You can click on the RECEIVE button and it will switch to Transmit and Logger32 will begin to transmit You can also use macros such as transmit and receive o 1403 A HITY 1905 0 Hz 14088 095 KHz 172 Hz Simplex Receive NetOn AFC On Reset Abort RTTY Toolbar and Statusbar RTTY Toolbar There is a special toolbar that controls both transmit and receive functions in RTTY Mode Here is the toolbar TE Sound Card Data File Settings Toolbox View Mode Display Aux Aux Clear ely Ss Biel t Aldi VOD Most of these items are presented in Receiving RTTY There are two that pertain directly to transmitting Net On Off covered and Setup which brings up a set of displays that have both receive and transmit parameters RT TY Statusbar There are other important items on the Statusbar File Settings Toolbox vie Send a text Tile Open receive text file Close recei
222. nce you may want to buy a commercial interface that takes care of some of the connections that will be explained in this topic Check these additional resources for more involved Information on the WWW See Help Topic System Requirements for information on what is needed within your PC to allow operation of the software and Interfacing A Radio for PC Control for information on connecting your radio to use Logger32 s PC control features Note It is VERY important that you have installed the latest Microsoft patches and upgrades to your version of Windows Go http www microsoft com downloads search asp Receive Interface To receive and decode digital mode signals connect the receive audio to either the PC sound card line in or mic in port The simplest way to do this is to use three conductor shielded audio cable between the receiver s headphone jack usually a 1 4 PHONO Jack and the sound card s line or mic in jack most often a 3 5mm stereo mini phone jack The sound card s line in is a better choice than the mic in jack because the line input is harder to overload but either will work Some sound cards only have a mic in jack You must adjust the Windows Recording Volume for the correct input levels as described below lt is also possible to purchase a commercial interface that will tailor your input and output sound card audio to your radio See Information on the WWW Here is a receive audio cable using a pre made Radio Shack 3 5
223. ncy Ma de K 1 B a6 11 0 z Me OM ee a 2226 IM de jnlilk 140515 CYONIM WEKO UPA PPP afi Setup Audio alerts eeeoe Columns 0 9 HOSA eee Filters d Callsigns Telnet callsign Appearance row Show talk messages Cluster callsign i Show Wy messages Data terminal callsign w Show tips w Show Ww messages W Shon announce Messages Play Ring Tones for TALE messages D W Color selection amp Audio alerts for this operator only Clicking on any one of the selections will display a dialog box allowing the user to enter a call sign to be used for the selected Tal Panel Please enter your Telnet Cluster Callsign TOK essa The next four items of this pop up menu are toggles that when checked activate the following functions If a menu item is not checked that function is not available Show talk messages Talk messages will be displayed in the DX Spot Window Show WCY messages WCY messages will be displayed in the DX Spot Window Show WWV messages WWV messages will be displayed in the DX Spot Window Show Announce messages Announce messages will be displayed in the DX Spot Window Appearance This menu allows the user to select different color schemes to individualize the DX Spot Window i de wOaih 210499 JAYNE IA de veids 21019 7 WEA VA de ra 1831 8 UTFZRT Mdenbpn 210860 4 T4ok eo 14014 7 R1AMF 025 9 Cash urns o 3512 2 UXOFF FREG MODE i o 7037 3 OHAR BAND ELI a Selecting Worked Confirme
224. ncy when the narrow IF filters are selected but there are no control codes to perform this function With the IF shift control in its central position the passband is centered on 1 kHz in the USB mode and 2 kHz in the Packet mode In the FT 1000MP there are control codes for the setting the EDSP with which the user can experiment For those who like to experiment some examples are given below HP Filter USB mode The upper frequency of the filter remains fixed on 2300 Hz but the lower frequency may be changed to reduce the bandwidth follows hexcommand 00 00 50 42 75 produces a filter with the range 1500 2300 Hz hexcommand 00 00 60 42 75 produces a filter with the range 1800 2300 Hz hexcommand 00 00 67 42 75 produces a filter with the range 2050 2300 Hz LP Filter USB mode In this case the lower frequency of the filter remains fixed on 2Khz and the upper frequency may be changed to reduce the bandwidth as follows hexcommand 00 00 90 41 75 produces a filter with the range 2000 2700 Hz hexcommand 00 00 80 41 75 produces a filter with the range 2000 2500 Hz hexcommand 00 00 70 41 75 produces a filter with the range 2000 2250 Hz hexcommand 00 00 00 40 75 will switch the EDSP off These macros have no effect if Packet mode is used on the FT1000MP Combining Codes in a Macro Control codes can be combined to perform a complex procedure in one macro in one of two ways Either each command is placed on a separate line o
225. nd Longitude in degrees minutes and seconds then right click on either of the two panes to display the screen below Enter Latitude in the format N S DD MM SS S and Longitude in the format E W DDD MM SS S Lat Long Entry Tonma gt fw foo2 s2 200 Setup Antenna Rotator WSIFP Jim Hargrave General information Logger32 will support the following popular auto positioning rotors Yaesu GS 23 GS 232 RC28000 M2 Rotor HyGain DCU 1 RotorEZ Zelpro SAK 232 This is accomplished via the TxD line of an RS 232 serial port The antenna positioning may be accomplished by entering Ctrl_ A when focus is in the Log Entry window and by macros when in the sound card window The global positioning information is available as soon as a prefix or callsign is entered in the Call field of the Log Entry window Once this is accomplished Logger32 will send positioning commands to the rotor control by either of the above mentioned operator commands The user can select path or long path positioning Rotor Serial port setup To setup the rotor controller on the main menu select Setup then Rotor Highlight Date format Time format Radi CO Rom Autolookup Frequency Antenna Selector Fator De Spot me I Ca I wT Ta nr I ah eo I at ie Tt I el r I sim o e A window will appear where the user can select the type of rotor controller and setup the serial port parameters The example is the HyGain amp RotorEZ control
226. nd Other Programs Logger382 accepts one form of input file know as ADIF Logger82 follows the ADIF standards and will import those files that also follow the standards There are some programs that do not follow the standards and you will have to modify them before they can be correctly imported into Logger32 Logger32 will identify any and all QSO s that are not formatted correctly and will identify the problem Here is a small sample of an ADIF file lt CALL 5 gt KE1EH lt QSO_DATE 8 D gt 20000402 lt TIME_ON 6 gt 000016 lt MODE 3 gt SSB lt BAND 3 gt 10M lt RST_SENT 2 gt 59 lt EOR gt While there are many other fields that can be included in an ADIF record this will give you an idea of what the file should look like One of the ADIF fields is the operator field This field is used to identify the callsign of the operator that made the QSO You can use this field to keep track of the different callsigns you may have had If you wish to use this kind of tracking it will be easier if have one ADIF log for each different callsign Logger will allow you to display QSO data and statistics based on an individual operator or for all operators Before importing your ADIF log be sure the Logbook Entry Window is displaying the correct operator Callsign if it isn t change it accordingly While importing your logs Logger will search for the operator field and apply it to each QSO if the field is not present your ADIF file logger will use the ope
227. nd card to your transceiver go to Interfacing a Radio to the PC Sound Card Logger32 s Transmitter Keying Options You can perform transmit receive switching in four ways q Operate a push to talk PTT switch using a switched voltage RTS or DTR from a serial computer port either the port for serial communication with the radio or a separate serial port q Use transmit and received commands sent to the radio over a serial Com port q Use VOX in your radio so it turns on when audio comes from the computer q Operate the radio transmit receive manually Key the Radio PTT line Hardware Issues In both cases of serial port keying the PTT keying is accomplished by low high voltage on pin 20 and pin 4 of a DB 25 connector the DTR and RTS lines connected to the serial port The DB 9 equivalent pins are 7 and 4 To key the radio PTT line from DTR or RTS a transistor interface circuit is required This simple circuit will do the trick Basic PTT Circuit 2 To MIC ETT a4 1 24401 Te MIC GND CONNECTOR 039 FOR DB25 USE PIN 7 FOR GND AND FIN 4 FOR RTS D1 1H4148 Click here for a list of links with additional PTT circuit and interface information An excellent resource for PTT interface for the builder or purchaser is the site maintained by WM2U http www qsl net wm2u interface html Software Setup to Operate PTT with a Com Port in Logger32 Here is how to switch the PTT line by using a Com port This discus
228. ndow The Show Notes facility is a bit of a hangover from the development and although it works it will not give any further information Please appreciate that there is NO edit facility for notes apart from doing so in the logbook itself You can modify a previous note should you wish to do so Right click on the note in question and select Show Notes This bring up a new window containing the original note You can now type any additional text or modify the existing Notes 16 Jul 02 Test note 2 12 Sep O02 Test note 1 Notes for 9K2ZZ on 26 Oct 02 Test note to see what happens Additional notes wish to put against this contact End the session by clicking on the Modify button 16 Jul 02 Test note 2 12 Sep 02 Test note 1 Test note to see what happens 26 Oct 02 Additional notes wish to put against this contact Reformat QSO Numbers Hew Lines VA3HU Reformat G50 Numbers QSO number Start Abort Selecting this Tools menu item will allow you to re number the QSOs in your logbook If you have manually entered any QSOs in your logbook with dates and or times in the past if you sort on date the display will show QSO numbers out of sequence This function will re number your QSOs in the correct order Backing Up Logger B Charles Sutton W1MCP It is STRONGLY recommended that you backup your files often There are two different backup options within Logger32 ZIP Logbook and ZIP User
229. ne for power PTT Possibilities A spare serial port is an advantage to allow direct keying of the radio see PTT Circuit You can also use software vox or keying of the radio See the topic Configuring Push to Talk for more guidance For vox keying also see Interfacing a Radio to PC Sound Card If you have no unused serial port on your PC for PSK PTT but do have a serial port which you use to interface to your radio for Frequency Mode control you can share this port with PSK PTT The Push to Talk topic has information about this Logger32 not operate the PTT over a parallel port Additional Information on the Web The following sites are recommended for additional information on PTT optical Isolators filtering and attenuation circuits Some sites have general information on PSK or other digital modes Please do not ask the maintainers of these site for Logger32 information If you need help with Logger32 or Logger382 try the yahoogroups reflectors and any further sites you may find from those sources Plans The WM2U page has radio specific interface designs for sound card output to radio audio connections and also for PTT connections Ground loop solutions are addressed htto www qsl net wm2u interface html htto www w5bbr com soundbd html http www ife ee ethz ch sailer pct ptt_circ ptt html Interfaces for sale These interfaces and interface kits provide various combinations of plug compatibility sound card output
230. new value of 11026 Hz in place of the base frequency of 11025 Hz 2 Just to the right of 11026 is the display of 91 PPM 3 Since the new frequency is faster use a plus sign 4 Add the new line to Logger32 ini in Settings Clock Error PPM 91 Note the spaces in the new line Transmitting a Clean Signal With PSK31 and RTTY Jan Ditzian KX2A and Jim Hargrave W5IFP When it comes to keeping our transmitted signal clean most of us operate within guidelines However we also rely on the hams with whom we speak to warn us of distortion When we operate phone distortion degrades the transmitted signal in a way that makes us hard to understand we sound When we operate CW we may receive feedback about AC on our signal or a chirp or a click In both these situations the other Stations are likely to say something to us However when we operate PSK31 or RT TY distortion is a bit harder to recognize The common types of distortion do not affect our own signal copy as much as they cause interference to other stations operating This is why it is important for us to be aware of the kinds of distortion effects we may see how to recognize them how to discriminate transmitted distortion from distortion introduced by strong signals overloading our own receiver and how to set up hardware and software so as to transmit a clean signal Some Definitions In this discussion we refer to a transmitter although most hams use transceivers This is to cl
231. ng alternate background colors and a spot comes in that does not require a color code it will retain color of the grid This can be confusing it is not a bug but something to keep in mind Num Lock LED blinks with DX Spots You may notice the Num lock lamp blinks when clicking on a spot Note The Num Lock lamp must be ON to see this This is not a bug but a limitation in Visual Basic To navigate between the numerous windows and fields within windows Logger uses the VB code SendKeys TAB 1 This causes the light to blink VB does not provide a NoNumLockBlink function Can t remember what portion of the band a frequency falls into Enter the frequency amp a call sign in the Logbook Window either manually or by clicking a spot then look at the Worked Confirmed Window you will see the band amp highlighted you must have show complex info turned on PREFIX DATABASE MAINTENANCE WINDOW Can t remember the prefix you wish to edit Know the country name but can t remember the Prefix Click on any column heading to resort the database TRACKING WINDOW Map Logger32 comes with a generic map for use in the tracking window For those of you who like to play take a look http www satscape co uk under Maps These maps can be renamed to map bmp and used in place of the default NOTE Rename the original map bmp file in case you don t like the change and wish to go back Other maps may also used but the middle of the map must be
232. ng audio out of the computer This method should be used only for initial setup testing purposes One of the more automated methods should be instituted for regular operation One Input At a Time Please When you key the radio make sure that you are not sending one audio signal from the computer plus one from the at the same time On many radios the microphone input and the rear panel input are active at the same time If this is the you should disconnect the microphone from the radio whenever you operate AFSK You may choose to use a device that connects to the microphone input and allows you to switch between a microphone and another input source There are devices on the market that do this and also have the interfaces and wiring for PTT and for reducing and isolating the AFSK signal from the sound card See Information on the WWW Interfacing a Radio for PC Control Andy Obrien KB2EOQ Many modern radios allow the radio CPU to be interfaced with software products Radios can send data about operating parameters and can receive commands Some HF radios manufactured since 1990 can be interfaced to a computer via serial Com port connections If your radio is capable of PC to Radio interfacing this will enable many features within Logger32 that will find useful Benefits of a Radio Connection with Logger32 Here is what Logger32 can do in PSK and RTTY mode when there is a radio communicating with the PC You should also read sections on Mac
233. ng the waterfall display If your radio has an effective manual notch filter tune it slowly and you will see a line of black signal move across the display However if this notch is an audio filter the warning above about audio filtering applies With an audio notch filter any distortion caused by the interfering signal will already be present by the time you apply the audio notch filter remove it An automatic notch filter will not work because it will remove the wanted signal along with the unwanted ones The automatic filter cannot tell the difference between the signal you want and the signal you do not want S Meter Readings When you make a decision about receiver filtering you may also want to consider the fact that your S meter will show the signal strength of the many signals in the radio s passband You may have poor copy of a weak signal using a wide passband the S meter may report a high value due to nearby signals When you narrow the passband with IF filtering in your transceiver also cause your transceiver S meter to read the strength of the signal of interest Saving Received Text to a File You can save a file for later reference say a contest where you may want to double check callsigns or to print all or part of it using an editor such as Notepad or Wordpad If you wish to save received text to a file to hard drive or floppy do the following 1 Go the Main Menu and click on File 2 Select Open receive text file 3
234. ng up Logger32 to operate with the KAM TNC using KAM 8 0 or 8 2 firmware run my KAM in its default setting with these personal preferences INTFACE TERMINAL CWPTT ON ECHO OFF HEADERLN ON USERS 5 5 With these settings the KAM will operate in the following selected modes correctly AMTOR ASCII CW G TOR PACKET PACTOR RTTY These modes are selected from the KAM Terminal mode using the CONTROL_C instruction You must enter the CONTROL_C letter in full and it must be in UPPER CASE Do not use abbreviations like ctrl letter as this will not work All this will do is send set of characters to the modem and it will reply with that lovely EH The KAM command set however is not case sensitive and commands may be entered in both upper and lower case For example mycall and MYCALL are both acceptable In the text descriptions and examples below any text below that is bracketed by a is a MACRO command described in the section MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons AMTOR MODE The AMTOR mode selection macros are CONTROL CX for command mode echo on to see your transmitted text and AMTOR to go to AMTOR stand by mode CONTROL CX for command mode echo on to see your transmitted text and AMTOR call to go to AMTOR calling the selected callsign The following KAM AMTOR instructions can be used in Logger32 CONTROL_CA Abort link CONTROL CD Break link and stay in standby CONTROL_CE CONTROL_Cl
235. nsceiver owner s manual will explain how to do split RTTY Contests RT TY contesting is a passion with a lot of operators There are about a dozen major RT TY contests each year and when they are on the bands will be full Even if you don t care to compete it s a great way to pick up new states or countries Many of the rare stations are serious contest operators A list of RTTY contest times and rules can be found on the web at http nome online no janalme RTTY html or http www sk3bg se contest Contesters are in a hurry of course so please don t send your name QTH or anything except what is required by the contest Plenty of time for chatting after it s over If you get serious about RT TY contesting you will probably want to get a program designed specifically for it In the meantime MMTTY will let you try it out and see how you like it Your First RTTY QSO Ok you ve learned a bunch of stuff and you re ready to get on the air For your first time on RTTY try the 20 meter band 20 has the lion s share of RTTY activity and you can usually find someone day or night Try calling CQ between 14080 and 14087 kHz typical RTTY CQ would go like this CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ CQ DE W7TI W7TI W7TI PSE K Practically all RTTYers add the PSE the end Kind of a friendly touch Some will add their name and QTH some will add the time and date You ll find a lot of variety and it s all ok just get on the air and try it out If you re familiar
236. ntrols work for either display selected Spectrum or Waterfall Fast Display No Smoothing When using Fast display the signals are displayed in real time i e you see the noise spikes and the signals jump up and down in strength Medium and Slow Display Little or Heavy Smoothing By selecting Medium or Slow display options the displayed signals are averaged over a period of time The effect of these is to reduce the noise spikes lower the overall background noise and prevent the signal from jumping up and down on the The effect of the smoothing is easily seen on the display Smoothing has no effect on quality of the received signal Settings ToolBox View Mode Display Aux Aux2 Clear Squelch response E RTT Nt Display smoothing Pw PSK Fast display ino smoothing Spectrum pen width PSK Medium display ditthe smoothing CW ID speed PSE Slow display heavy smoothing Typing preferente YRITIG P RITY Fast display no smoothing Line wrap on RIT Medium display little smoothing Lise w for zero RTTY Slow display heavy smoothing Long Tx tail Overload warning oe ee Red Alerts for Overdriven Sound Cards If you check the option Overload warning on the Settings drop down menu you will activate an indicator which monitors your audio level input to the sound card If your audio level is too high it will cause either display Waterfall or Spectrum to turn red your hardware is protected elsewhe
237. o PTT Options and select PTT by Shared Radio Port Logger32 will key DTR or RTS on the same Com port for information exchange between the radio and Logger32 CW and Sound Card operation may also be shared on the same port as the Radio Control In the CW mode PTT is automatically routed to the RTS line and CW data is automatically routed to the DTR line when in the CW mode To make this all work on the same serial port you must select RTS as the PTT line in the PTT setup in the Sound Card SETTINGS Open the Radio PTT selection Under keying options select PTT by serial port Then select RTS keying Now select PTT by shared radio port Your port is now configured to allow CW and Sound card PTT operation For an appropriate CW data interface see the section on CW operation One Way to Keep From Having a Live Microphone During AFSK Operation A number of modern radios like the Kenwood S 570D when keyed by closing a certain PTT input on the back only accept audio from the rear panel audio input With these radios you can operate the PTT using a direct line from a serial port to the rear panel PTT and apply the AFSK signal to the rear audio input You will never have a live microphone during AFSK operation even if the microphone is left connected Direct Command of Transmit Receive Using the PC Radio Command Interface Certain models of Kenwood Yaesu Kachina and Ten Tec radios can be switched between transmit and receive when the sends th
238. o a standard ADIF mode sub mode name For example PSK will become PSK31 BPSK will become PSK31 with the submode of BPSK and QPSK will become PSK31 with a submode of QPSK The routine can be run from any directory folder and it is self explanatory in its use The user has the option to select how the Comments field is to be dealt with The output file will be called CONVERTED ADI and will be found in the directory where you ran CONVERSION EXE PLEASE NOTE 1 You may still have some small editing to do following the use of this conversion program If you only use SSB and or CW modes then it will not be necessary to run this routine at all 2 The converter routine is ONLY intended to be used with Logger16 ADI files NO attempt has been made to deal with ADIF from other sources Transferring your Logbook from Other Sources If you wish to transfer a logbook for another source the basics of steps 1 to 6 above will still apply The only difference will be the method by which you obtain the ADIF file format from your current software You are advised to consult the help file of that for guidance on how to export your log in ADIF format It should be noted that some ADIF formats contain WPX information in the PFX field and this will cause Logger32 to produce incorrect information The ADI file loader can ignore this field if present and it is recommended that this box be checked before loading if you are in doubt Logger32 will then
239. o set the VFO or to select a memory channel is command FRx FTx Note that is a semicolon between the two commands FRx is the receive VFO selection and FTx is the transmit VFO selection while x is 0 for VFO A 1 for VFO B 2 for memory To set receive as VFO A transmit as VFO B command FR1 FT2 Note Be careful when using this command The right click function to move the receive transmit frequency to the preferred audio frequency see Using Logger32 works only with the A VFO The use of the line command FRO at the start of any Inner Link align MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons align macro will ensure that the A vfo is selected Specific Memory Channel Selection for All Kenwood Rigs The Kenwood TS 850 command for memory channel selection is MC_aa where MC is the command and aa is the channel number In this command string a blank or an underscore is required between MC and the parameter aa This command will only take effect if the memory channel has first been activated as shown directly above That is you must set FRx or FTx to so that there is something for the selected memory channel to do Here is the command to select memory channel 05 for transmit and receive command FT2 FR2 MC_05 Combining Codes in a Macro The above two rig commands filter selection and slope tuning can be combined to perform a complex procedure with one of commands Here is an example for a TS 850 to select an 8 83 mHz filter
240. o that DST in the southern hemisphere if applicable is the reverse to that in the northern hemisphere i e it starts Sept Oct and ends in March April Initial Set up Geoff Anderson G3NPA In order for Logger32 to operate correctly there is some basic set up information that it requires This section is designed to help you through this stage so you will be up and running in the shortest possible time It is recommended that before you progress too far that the latest version of Internet Explorer be installed on your computer The basic steps are 1 Set the operator callsign 2 Set you preferred window configuration and window sizes 3 Set the latitude and longitude of your own location 4 Set your computer clock 5 Set your preferred frequency date and time format 6 Import your existing log 1 Enter Callsign When Logger32 is run for the first time you will be presented with the dialog box displayed below PLEASE READ THIS NOTICE IT CONTAINS IMPORTANT INSTALLATION INFORMATION Logger32 Please read the Help File Terms and Conditions of use For OW keying and the Automatic Antenna selector to work you must install additional software inclided in the Loggers distribution files You will see a file in the Loggers directory called Portd5nt exe you must run this executable file to install the necessary divers and files on your system See the Help file for additional information Enter the Callsign pou want to use S l
241. o the values set on the Demodulator Tab RI TY and PSK31 modes differ in this situation since PSK uses values that are set in the Settings menu item Show RTTY Commands lt is possible to have Logger32 echo in the receive window the RTTY control commands that you issue from the toolbar or from a macro Click View Rx Window Options Show RTTY Commands and they will appear in the receive window in brackets lt gt Show Control Codes You can view the control codes that are sent and received by Logger32 Control codes are carriage returns Click View Window Options Show Control Codes Macros You will find special macros for use in RT TY mode in the Macros topic You may use Logger382 macros that are relevant to RT TY to general Logger32 operation e g transmit and you may use some MMTTY macros if you are familiar with them as long as they apply to RT TY operation in Logger82 and do not require parts of MMTTY that are not part of Logger32 For example you send d and Logger32 will send the date but you cannot use c to send the other station s callsign you must use Logger32 s call macro because this feature pertains to the way that Logger32 captures callsigns Notch Filter The MMTTY engine provides for one or two audio DSP notch filters for use during reception To enable the notch filter s go to RTTY Setup toolbar Demodulator Tab Now look to the right and you will see two smaller tabs one is LMS Notch Click the LMS Notc
242. o undo qsx Communicating with PSK31 Andrew J O Brien KB2EQQ and Jim Hargrave W5IFP The Art of Conversation in PSK From its beginning PSK31 has been known as a conversational digital mode This distinguishes it from the automated PACTOR stations or the rapid fire RT TY contest DX operations Many stations that you have PSK31 QSOs with will ask you a few about yourself and your setup They may also comment on your signal and offer assistance to get your transmitted signal just right While it is perfectly acceptable to have quick QSOs you are encouraged to develop the art of digital conversations The art of a digital conversation does not differ much from the art of a rag chew on voice modes It requires you to try and make conversation interesting In addition to your name QTH weather and how long you have been on PSK try to stimulate the conversation by asking questions about the other station s QTH occupation hobbies other than amateur radio family and so At first operating a digital mode can be intimidating especially to the slow typist However you will soon realize that Logger32 allows you to time your responses while listening to the other station and typing ahead Typing ahead saves time and also your rig s finals since PSK31 is 100 duty cycle Logger32 allows you to program 36 macros that also aid in the art of conversation You will find however that overuse of pre programmed macros is frowned upon by some It s s
243. of displays the Waterfall and the Spectrum Display To select which display you will use click Display the Main Menu and select Waterfall or Spectrum The frequency display receive range is as wide as the audio bandwidth of modern receivers The receive and transmit frequencies are limited to the range 300 to 3000 Hz due to the passband of most However it is better to stay away from the edges because transceivers may have some limitations as well and some sound may be audio limited Remember if you are in QSO at the edge of the receive range you may be at or beyond the edge of transmit audio passband It is best to KNOW your equipment Power output may be lower at the edges of the receive range is a special Logger32 feature called align which allows you to realign your radio and Logger32 so you can transmit at the a audio frequency Align requires that you have computer radio communication Display Aux 1 EE pectrum waterfall ELLE a E eI E In Waterfall mode if the background turns red then the sound card input level is too high In the Spectrum mode the entire spectrum line will turn red in this situation There is a sensitivity control for the tuning display that controls how high the signals rise in the window Click Settings Spectrum Sensitivity and move the sliders to the right to increase sensitivity The main and aux sensitivities can be adjusted separately Note Logger32 starts with zero sensitivity for the tuning display Y
244. ols DatabaseMaintenance OTA maintenance to display the IOTA Maintenance window IOTA Maintenance AF 001 3B6 Mauritius Agalega Is 10 000 AF 002 FTZ French Southem and Antarctic Termtones Only Africa Islands 39 000 AF 003 De British South Atlantic only Africa islands Ascension Island 6 000 AF 004 EAS Spanish islands only Africa islands Canary ls 24 000 AF 005 D4 Cape Verde Is 16 000 AF 006 O9 British Indian Ocean Terntones Chagos Archipelago Diego Garcia 7 500 AF O0F DE Comoro ls rote Contacts with Mayotte before 6 Jul 1975 count 12 000 AF O08 FEW French Southern and Antarctic Territornes Only Africa lslarids 46 500 AF 009 FRA E French Indian Ocean 7 erritornes Europa sland 22 500 AF 010 3C Equatorial Guinean Islands Bioko Fernanda Foo Island 3 500 AF 011 FRAG French Indian Ocean Territories Glorioso ls 11 500 QF OT FRAD French Indian Ocean Territones Juan de Nova Island 1 7 000 AF 013 5A Madagascar Main island only 20 000 NOTE If you left click on either of the first two headings IOTA or Prefix in the table above the grid will sort on that column Add a New Island Group To add a new Island group select first available blank row in the list usually the row at the bottom of the list This action will display the IOTA edit window British South Atlantic only Africa Islands Ascension Islarid Insert the island detail
245. om your receive frequency See Logger32 feat Ee ed ere ee rrr eee ere ere ee ee E EES ESS E BPSK 1500 0He 14071112 KHe 234 Receive NetOt AFCO Reset Abot CPU PTT Receive Transmit The sixth pane indicates that Logger32 is either in Receive or Transmit modes The Rx Tx mode can be toggled with a mouse in this area Rx Tx can also be toggled with the pause break key on your keyboard BPSK 1500 0 Hz 14071 112 KHz 234 Simples Receive NetOf AFC OF Reset Abort Gs CPU amp PTT Net On Off The seventh pane indicates Net is on or off Net can be toggled on off by a mouse click in this area NET on will set the transmitted audio frequency to the receive audio frequency Net off will cause you to transmit at the last frequency at which you transmitted If you have not gone to transmit since you started Logger32 you will transmit at the default Tx audio frequency you transmit the waterfall display of your transmit signal will be at the frequency where you are actually transmitting BPSE 1500 0 Hz 14071 112 KHz 23dB Simplex Receive l Meor AFC OF Reset Abot CPL PTT AFC On Off The eighth pane indicates AFC action whether on or off PSK31 is quite difficult to tune in manually You will usually want the AFC on at least to tune in a station Reset A mouse click in the ninth pane will put the main receive audio frequency the receive passband window back to
246. on until run Logger32 There is a patch to fix this for some operating systems Go to the Hamlogger reflector and there is a link to download this file installed Logger32 and use a Com port for t r PTT switching When I boot up the computer the t r switch is closed transmit position until run Logger32 1 WOMN solves this problem by turning the radio off and on 1 VESTFZ solves this problem with a Rigblaster by not connecting the DTS line and using only RTS and ground for PTT 1 VESTFZ also suggests that you can remove a diode in the OR circuit connects the DRT to the RTS line but you must do some logic level measurements first to confirm which line is actually high West Mountain Radio the distributor of Rigblaster has further information and a possible cure on their web page http www westmountainradio com Try removing the PTT connection from RTS during Logger82 startup and reconnect it after Logger32 is loaded If connect the radio directly to the computer things operate but my audio levels are not right But when I try to through my commercially made interface the interface does not work If your radio interface gets its DC power from the computer over the RTS DSR or DTR lines it may not work properly with Loger and or with Logger32 You should try to provide power from the radio or from an external power source There are extra carriage returns in my transmit buffer after use a macro Carriage
247. on G3NPA The main purpose of this section is to give the operator some brief and quick details which are related to the data entered in the Logbook Entry window and what is in your logbook These windows are accessible ONLY via the icons found in the Logbook Entry window Please see the Basic Setup section above on how to set up information buttons Additional information is currently available for IOTA US State US County and Grid Square only If other ADIF input panels in the log input window are set up with the 2 icon then a Not Coded Yet message will appear when selected IOTA Information window The picture below shows that the cursor has been placed over the IOTA information access button er Entry G3NPA To use the additional information enter a callsign and the IOTA number into the appropriate panes in the Logbook Entry and then click on the IOTA 2 icon This will bring up a small information window advising the log status of the particular group see typical panel below In this case the panel is telling the operator that EU 006 has not been worked at all If the island group in question is already in the log or confirmed then the wording in this panel will change accordingly amp 8 8 E Loobook page G3NPA The messages that appear will be one of the following lOTA confirmed on BAND MODE Need confirmation from IOTA on BAND MODE lOTA confirmed on BAND but need on MODE IOTA wor
248. ook files into a single Zip file It is strongly recommended that you make such backup copies on a regular basis One of the two statements below is correct and the other is wrong At the moment I don t know which is correct but I m trying to find out from BobF will advise ASAP Note You do not need a file compressing program on your computer to use this utility to save the files However you will require WinZip if ever you need to expand the files for use Note You will need to have a file compression program like WinZip installed on your computer before this utility will function correctly To Zip your logbook 1 Click on the Zip Logbook button on the toolbar 4 Loggers2 Tools Wew to open the following window Ea Logbook backup utility Backup this Logbook C PROGRAM FILE SLUGGER 324 SNPA Browse Into this 1p file C PROGRAM FILESSLOGGERS2 BACEUPS Browse Start Exit Verity Abort E 2 Set up the logbook name in the backup this logbook pane by either typing in the path and file name without the ISD extension or by using the browse button to locate the file Note that if you have not renamed you log file it will have the name Logbook32 ISD 3 Set up the destination ZIP file path and filename by either typing in the details or by using the browse button 4 Click on Start When the files have been saved there will be an indication in the bottom
249. ormation for the following radios can be found in the Radios section of the Appendices ICOM 746 Kachina 505 Kenwood TS 570 TS 850 TS 870 Ten Tec Omni VI and Omni VI Plus Ten Tec Paragon Setup CDRom Geoff Anderson G3NPA and Hal Miller KB1ZQ To set up the CDRom facility all one needs to do is to call up the menu item Setup CD Rom and check the appropriate CD ROM shown below RAC CD It is possible certainly in the case of the RAC and QRZ CDRom to run without the actual CD in a drive if the data has been on to a HDD If you wish to do this then here are the steps you have to take 1 Copy the data directory from the CDRom onto a HDD into a directory called C Data for RAC or C Callbk for QRZ we will assume that this is drive C 2 Locate the correct DLL from the CDROM raccd32a dll for RAC and copy it into your Logger82 directory 3 With Logger82 closed open the Logger32 INI file in Notepad or Wordpad and find the section CD Lookup Settings and the line defining the drive letter as follows CD Drive Letter C 4 Resave the Logger32 INI file The callsign lookup will now be very much quicker For information on how to use the lookup facility please refer to the section called Callsign Lookup Transferring Logs from Logger16 and other programs Geoff Anderson G3NPA amp B Charles Sutton W1MCP How to Transfer your Logger16 Logbook into Logger32 To transfer your existing Logger16 logbook into Logger3
250. ort to comply with the terms of the use of this software If you chose not to operate in accordance with the requirements listed above please do not use this software In general Logger382 is free for use in amateur radio but is not licensed for reproduction on CDs or web sites other than those selected by Bob Furzer Authorization to reproduce this software on CD Internet or any other form or media is explicitly Please don t waste my time or yours by asking The answer is NO How to Use Help Geoff Anderson G3NPA The Help files contain a few features that you should know about There are hyperlinks throughout the text in three colors e Those in purple jump to a definition in the Glossary or Abbreviations you can also get to the Glossary or Abbreviations by using the Contents tab e The hyperlinks in green jump to various sections of the Help files that go into more detail about the subject of the link e The hyperlinks in blue will attempt to link to a World Wide Web siteto provide external resources that may help you with hardware and other issues relevant to using Logger and implementing the digital modes on your computer radio system open your default e mail application to send an e mail message to the highlighted e mail address e Inall cases once you have jumped to a new location you can use the Back arrow at the top of the Help screen to return the previous location in the Help files You can use Help in two ways
251. other station about five seconds of idle for him her to get a stable IMD reading lt To PC Soundcard s Headphone SPKR out Jack 3 5mm Stereo to MIC connector cable Solderthe wire connected to the tip portion of the 3 5mm mini phone jack to the AU dio Input pin of your transmitters MIC Plug With the above interface connected and your transceiver s antenna jack connected to a dummy load set the audio output level of your PC sound card to match your transceiver s input circuit Voltage Divider Output Connection In most cases the sound card provides too much drive for the radio s audio stage Even setting the computer mixer output control its lowest level you may still have a high IMD value You are actually overdriving your radio s microphone input stage before the gain control so no matter how low you set the mic gain you are already distorting It is strongly recommended that you use a voltage divider to reduce your sound card output You can make or purchase add on hardware designed for PSK and other digital modes that includes this circuitry For more information see Information on the WWW Here is a voltage divider If you want greater control you can replace the series resistor with a potentiometer lt TO PC Soundcard s HeadphonefSPKR out Jack MIC Connector Riz So oot 10K ies 3 5mm Stereo to MIC connector cable o Solder the wire connected to the tip portion of the 3 5mm mini phone jack to the
252. ou can track what characters have been transmitted by Logger32 Click Settings Transmit buffer indicator to turn this feature on You can change the color of the transmitted characters in Toolbox Tx window buffer indicator color These features work the same in both PSK31 and RTTY modes and settings selected in one mode hold for the other mode Backspacing The RT TY engine can backspace to correct typographical errors but only before the character has been transmitted Baudot not support backspace so once a letter is sent there is no character to tell the receiving station to back up and erase that character The easiest way to benefit from the backspace feature in RT TY mode is to set Settings Typing preference to word out See the next section Word Out vs Character Out Logger32 in RTTY mode allows the user to choose either word out or character out Click Settings Typing Preference RTTY Send word out unclick this choice for character out With word out checked Logger82 only transmits your typed text when you press the spacebar on your keyboard or use a macro containing the Baudot code for space With word out unchecked sends each character to the radio for immediate transmission Sound Card Data Settings Toolbox View Mode SQUEICH response Display smoothing Spectrum pen width t f Cwi ID speed PSEK Send as typed FSK Send all CAFS Typing preference Line wrap on lse for zero Long
253. ou might have an End of conversation macro TNX FOR THE QSO JAN WILL QSL VIA THE BUREAU SK P5DX DE KB2EOQ K By the way Note that the final K or KN in each transmission follows several blank spaces This makes it less likely that P5DX will copy your callsign as KB2EOQK This is especially important when you have a short callsign that can sound like regular callsign if extra letters are added to it P5DX would become P5DXk Contesting DXing RTTY is a major mode when it comes to contesting and those rare DXpeditions In both contesting and DX hunting the QSO place in rapid fire mode Here are a few macros to help you CQ with continuous loop Use this macro for calling CQ transmit cq cq CONTEST de mycall mycall mycall K receive loop loop If a station answers you CQ you click anywhere in the receive window to stop the loop Contest Exchange transmit call de mycall TU 599 serialnum 599 serialnum bk receives This will generate your call and a serial number from the Mini log Thanks and QRZ transmit QSL name TU QRZ QRZ Contest de mycall k receive log This will thank someone in the contest log the QSO in the Mini log assuming you have entered it into the Mini log and send Operating Split Take a close look at Using Logger32 for information on how to use computer controlled split It is in RTTY DX chasing that you most likely to use this feature Profiles Jan Ditzian KX2A The HAM def
254. ou must adjust the sensitivity upward to see any signals on tuning display Waterfall With the Waterfall display the PSK signal is displayed as the brightness of one horizontal line The stronger the amplitude of the signal the brighter the display At time increments each horizontal frequency sample line shifts down and a new one is placed at the top This effect looks like a waterfall A PSK signal should produce a fairly narrow trail often called a snail trail The advantage of this display is that it gives a history in time of the received signal for the last few seconds The disadvantage is that it is difficult to judge the signal strength In order to tune a signal q1 Turn AFC on An error or drift of only a few Hz will stop decoding for PSK q Click on the PSK signal The two red passband lines will reposition over the signal and text will print in the Rx window If the Main Tuning window is open you will see the following things A phase scope indication Receive quality indication squelch display PSK signal displayed on 250Hz frequency histogram display q1 IMD reading if station is sending an idle signal on the StatusBar fourth pane from the left If the squelch is open the text should start flowing across your Receive window A user set Waterfall control can be found under the Settings drop down menu on the Main Menu It is called Waterfall and when selected opens a small window with a mo
255. ow All 47 fields used in the LogBook can be displayed in the Previous QSOs window Here is an example E CAILL Is g all Date Time On Time Ott Frec ASL Sj G 5 Date QSL R F Date Hame 1 CAILL O02 Spr O00 00 00 16 00 00 16 20505 00 nid O4 Apr OO 10 May 00 Charlie 9 CAILL 09 Apr 00 16 26 28 16 26 26 20464 00 ai 12 Apr OO Charlie 10 CA1LL 093 Apr 00 16 46 17 16 46 17 20496 00 at 12 Apr OO 16 Sep 00 Charlie nie At hd xi oz CATLL 15 Jul 00 1 08 25 19 09 23 20119 00 16 Jul 00 Charlie 592 CAILL 11 Jan 01 03 37 00 03 37 00 7066 00 15 Jan 01 Charlie S368 CAILL 21 Dec 01 03 26 16 03 26 16 146560 00 Charlie am Selecting a QSO Left clicking on any QSO shown in the window will center the LogBook Page around that entry Changing the appearance of the Previous QSOs Grid You can change the appearance of the grid such as displaying the grid lines changing the row height and column width grid background colors and much more Please refer to the section Grid Appearance Setup for complete details Setting up the Grid and choosing the fields to display When you right click anywhere inside the Previous QSOs window a popup menu will appear allowing you to make changes changes apply only to the Previous QSOs window B CAILL aso e Call 1 CAILL 10 CAILL oe CATLL 592 CAILL 936 CAILL im Date O02 Apr OO 09 Apr OO 15 Jul 00 11 Jan 01 21 Dec 01 Time On 00 00 16 _ 16 26 25 16 4
256. ow ESC Change from Transmit to Receive In order for this functionality to work correctly the focus must be in the Sound Card Data Window INS Toggle the reception of data on and off so scroll back in the RX window is possible The RXWindow background will turn while data input is suspended PAUSE BREAK Toggle between Transmit and Receive In order for this functionality to work correctly the focus must be in the Sound Card Data Window Programming the Routine To start simply right click on the button you wish to program and the Macro Setup window will be displayed Macro Setup for F2 The Hot Key currently assigned to that button will be displayed in the Title bar Macro Setup for F2 the second button on the top first row To program the button click in the text window and enter any macro commands those beginning and ending with text required to execute the functionality required for this button is Macro Setup for F2 In order to enter a character that is not available on your keyboard you must enter the ASCII code for that character This is done by pressing the lt Alt gt while you type the four digit code for the character on the numeric keypad For example to type the hold the ALT key down and type 0191 on the numeric keypad you must be in Num Lock to do this When you release the key the will be displayed When you type a character this way yo
257. ow or too fast q If you continue to have problems you can bring up the Radio Data window Radio button to look directly at the codes to and from your radio q Once you activate transmit using a radio command if the computer locks up or crashes you may have difficulty taking the radio out of transmit mode You should examine your radio and manual closely and determine what steps you can this situation For example with a Ten Tec Omni VI if you are unable to send the software receive command you turn the radio off and back on q Ifyou use a Ten Tec Omni VI or VI Plus remember that you must set the address to 04 under the Icom setup then go Ten Tec and select the Omni VI Vox Control of Transmit Receive An easy way to control Transmit Receive is to use the vox in the radio Set the vox sensitivity so that the input signal keys the vox If you use vox you may find that the radio does not turn off but cycles on and off when you try to go to receive You can stop this by bringing up the full set of Windows audio mixer controls and making sure that only the ones you need to transmit and receive are turned up or enabled Manual Control of Transmit Receive Manual operation is to be honest a nuisance It requires that you operate the PTT with an external switch and also tell Logger32 when you want to go to transmit and to receive You will find that you sometimes forget to key the transmitter although you have already started transmitti
258. ow that in some parts of the world especially Europe the standard is to use USB instead of LSB This works fine as long as you also reverse the MARK audio frequency and the SPACE audio frequency MMTTY defaults to LSB and it is recommended to leave it there even in Europe since your signal will be identical If you prefer to use USB leave REV on all the time The really critical part about AFSK is the amplitude of the signal fed into the microphone connector or rear panel connector together with the microphone gain setting You must NOT overdrive your transmitter or spurious signals will be transmitted In general keep the audio drive low enough that your transmitter does not generate any ALC voltage Never try to drive your transmitter to maximum output Around 80 to 90 percent of maximum is about right Consult your owner s manual for more information on how to do this If you ever hear a station at two or more frequencies at the same time the cause is almost always overdrive None of this applies to FSK of course With FSK you can run full power and not worry about overdrive Figures Shift and Letters Shift RTTY uses the Baudot code invented before radio even existed and still widely used throughout the world The Baudot code data bits to represent letters numbers and punctuation much like your computer does Unlike your computer which uses eight for each character the Baudot code uses only five plus a start bit and stop bit Using fe
259. ow upper statusbar wf Show lower statusbar UPPER STATUS BAR The Upper Status Bar displays five panels of specific information for any callsign entered in the Logbook Entry window These panels consis of The Country panel displaying the Logger32 country name The Prefix Panel displaying the Prefix CQ Zone and Continent The Sunrise and Sunset times panel ead fod at 172Mmi 02 Sep 02 20 04 The Beam Headings panel displaying the Short and Long path beam headings and Short Path distance to the station The Date and Time panel displaying local date and time at station If you right click on the Date and Time Panel while information is being displayed complete details for the Time Zone of the selected station will be displayed GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada Normal Bias 5 hours to convert local time to UTC Standard Mame Easter Standard Time Standard Bias 0 hour s to add to Mormal Bias Daylight Name Eastern Daylight Time Daylight Bias 1 hours to add to Normal Bias Daylight Begins Un The First Sunday In April 4t 2 00 00 4h This pear 07 April 2002 Dawlight Ends On The Last Sunday In October 4t 4 00 00 4M This year 2 October 2002 LOWER STATUS BAR The Lower Status Bar displays general system and status information 03Sep02 00 33 Cluster Radio Rotor Telnet Antenna HH 0 The system and status information displayed in the Lower Status Bar consists of Logger Date and Time 03 Se
260. ows Within Logger32 The Tx and Rx windows share a common screen area and you can make one window larger and the other smaller by using the mouse to position the cursor over the splitter bar which is the dividing line between the Tx and Rx windows If you do this you will see a special cursor appear now left click the mouse and you can drag the splitter bar up or down This will allow you to see more of what you type while giving up some display area for received text Line Wrap Line wrap works the same way for PSK31 and RTTY Rx Window Line Wrap Logger32 displays received text in the Rx Window exactly as it is received The only exception is that when text reaches the right hand edge it wraps to the next line There is no special line wrap the next character 70 will appear at the left It is up to the sending station to include carriage return line feeds CR LF otherwise words will be broken at character 70 Tx Window Line Wrap To transmit with line wrap click Settings Line wrap on For RT TY you must also check Settings Typing Preference RTTY send word out A check mark to the left of this choice means that it is on On RTTY if you do not check Send word out then Logger32 sends letter by letter and ignores the content When you are typing in the Tx window text is wrapped between 63 and 69 characters This means that when there are 63 characters in a transmitted line Logger32 begins to look for a space in the typed input Whe
261. p 02 00 33 luster Radio Rotor Telnet Antenna HHH If you place the cursor over the Logger date and time a yellow pop up hint box will display your PC system date and time PC time 28 Apr 02 15 39 55 20 Apr 0 19 39 56 Cluster Aadio If you right click on the Logger date and time a pop up menu will be displayed Get atomic clack time Show PC time contig 4b uster 20 Spr U2 allowing you to set your PC time to an Atomic Clock standard or to view details of your PC Time Zone using the same display as described above for the Upper Status Bar local date and time Cluster Telnet window status 03 Sep 02 00 33 Gaz Rotor Telnet Antenna HHH If you place the cursor over the Cluster status a yellow pop up hint box will display the status of the serial COM port configured for the Cluster Telnet window Yo Comm 1 Closed Cluster Hado If you right click on the Cluster status a pop up menu will be displayed allowing you to Open or Close toggle the serial COM port configured for the Cluster Telnet window Tor Upen port ronan pot Radio control status 03 Sep U2 00 33 Cluste Trade I Rotor Telnet Antenna HHH If you place the cursor over the Radio control status a yellow pop up hint box will display the status of serial port configured for the Radio port Comm 1 Closed Aadio Rotor If you right click on the Radio control status a pop u
262. p menu will be displayed allowing you to Open or Close the serial COM port Radio port Upen port EE Rotor control status 03 Sep U2 00 33 Cluster Aadio Traa T elnet Antenna HHH Telnet window status 03 Sep 02 00 33 Cluster Aadio Rotor Tra T ntenna HHH If you place the cursor over the Telnet window status a yellow pop up hint box will display the status of the socket connection of the Telnet window 4 Suf Socket closed Telnet ntenna If you right click on the Telnet window status a pop up menu will be displayed allowing you to Connect or Disconnect from the Default Remote Host configured in the Telnet Window Connect to KUGA a Su a Disconnect Te Antenna Selector status 03 Sep U2 00 33 Cluster Aadio Rotor Tare Viera T HHH If you place the cursor over the Antenna Selector status a yellow pop up hint box will display the status of the parallel port configured for the Antenna Selector ead Antenna Selector Port Closed Antenna Serial Number and 03 Sep 02 00 33 Cluster Aadio Rotor Telnet antag ae T Serial Numbers disabled HHH Serial setup Set font to bold WWV WCY and WX messages received in the Cluster window If you can right click on this pane to update it s contents from the NOAA DX Spot Window Hal Miller KB1ZQ The DX Spot window uses inputs from the Cluster and Telnet Windows to display DX Spots These spots
263. pane of the window that 3 files have been zipped Zip User Files and Databases This utility will backup all user files and databases into a single Zip file It is strongly recommended that you make such backup copies on a regular basis One of the two statements below is correct and the other is wrong At the moment I don t know which is correct but I m trying to find out from BobF will advise ASAP Note You do not need a file compressing program on your computer to use this utility to save the files However you will require WinZip if ever you need to expand the files for use Note You will need to have a file compression program like WinZip installed on your computer before this utility will function correctly To use the utility 1 Click on the Zip Logbook button on the toolbar File Tools wiew to open the window shown below a Logger32 Tools Wew 2 Set up the destination ZIP file path and filename by either typing in the details or by using the browse button 3 Click on Start When the files have been saved there will be an indication in the bottom pane of the window that xx files have been zipped MACROs Hot Keys and Programmable Buttons Randy Tipton WA5UFH Geoff Anderson G3NPA and Hew Lines VA3HU Overview What are Macros Programmable Buttons and Hotkeys Logger82 is user friendly and can be customized to your own personalized likes by using the programs built in MACRO These
264. path beam headings and local time for the distant end Comprehensive statistics tables Real time satellite tracking using Keps from a local file or collected from a favored web site Grayline display with selectable terminator DX spot tables with input from packet or telnet sources or both at once User definable worked confirmed color scheme on incoming spots Support for many radios including a debug window User selectable frequency display in KHz or MHz down to 1 Hz resolution User selectable date and time format CDROM support Support for the use of QRZ com and GoList via the Internet A facility to synchronize your computer clock to an atomic standard All windows fully re sizeable Supports multiple INI files for different set ups normal contest etc Fully configurable fonts background and foreground colors Auto log on scripts for telnet and cluster access Definable telnet and cluster shortcuts and scripts Sorting of the logbook on Date Callsign Frequency Band Mode Zone and many more Personalize you own band plan Prefix statistics available on screen for up to 50 bands and 48 modes Previously worked callsigns automatically appear under the callsign entry window Callsign preview The Logbook Previously Worked Spots and Stats tables all have variable width columns Support for a parallel port antenna selector that can o
265. perate automatically with your bandplan Log page can be sorted on QSO Callsign Prefix Frequency Band Mode COZ DXCC Grid Square IOTA State Continent and UZ Logs can be output in either ADIF or CSV format Supports both multiple user One log for the family or Club station and multiple logs one for the main one for contesting User selectable fields to copy from previous QSO details to a new logbook entry Logbook percentage full indicator Grid Square Calculator Support for Logbook of the World Functional information buttons in the log input window Support for eQSL and LOTW output files Export QSOs flagged for QSLing QSLs waiting to be sent are highlighted in the log Send DX spots to a VHF cluster or Telnet Built in version of Zakanaka the soundcard window for PSK31 RTTY which includes Three independant simultaneous receive channels in PSK31 Waterfall or spectral signal display Selectable colors for receive and transmit windows Tx and Rx windows Selectable frequency markers Built in macros for use with a selectable number of programmable buttons Macros with programmable colored keys and number of macros Capture his callsign and his name with a click Add QSO number Programmable default Rx initial receive frequencies Independent AFC and squelch settings for each Rx window Selectable waterfall and spectrum
266. perating our transmitter in the manner intended by the manufacturer for audio signal inputs Here are some steps to reduce the problem Set the microphone gain to the setting used for phone operation Reduce the setting of the output gain of the sound card using the Windows mixer controls As mentioned previously this control may not be precise enough to adjust to a satisfactorily low level without shutting down the signal altogether If so the voltage divider solution should bring sound output signal levels into a reasonable range for more precise adjustment Use a voltage divider and a transformer as explained earlier Actually we should have already taken this step before to operate at all If we are already using a divider perhaps we need to increase the 10 kilohm resistor to a larger value Reduce the microphone gain at the transmitter This may be a touchy adjustment If we reduce the microphone gain and all that happens is that the tune power also drops and we simply run less power this indicates substantial IMD before microphone gain control Operating Phone and AFSK With the Same Transceiver Some transceivers isolate the microphone input from the separate AFSK audio input internally Some do this by having using different PTT lines for the microphone input and for the AFSK input Others respond to computer commands by switching in the AFSK input instead of the microphone However many radios do not have such a provision
267. plicated in the Log Window Also all the features of Logger32 can be seen at a glance e g previous QSOs new country past comments distance bearing headings Possible Operator Errors Using These Configurations Why Logger32 Might Appear to Have Stopped Operating If you make a mistake in Logger82 such as not entering a frequency when configured for frequency input or entering a wrong county for a state the Error Window for Logger32 could be hidden behind the Sound Card window Logger32 did not stop you just made a keyboard mistake In this case click on the Logger32 Sound Card Window tool bar and drag it down so you can acknowledge the error window and correct your mistake Lost Windows lf you change screen resolutions it is possible to leave pop up windows such as the Individual tuning windows and Aux Rx outside the viewing area especially at low screen resolution The result is that you cannot find your window To find your windows return back to the higher screen resolution setting and close the windows before changing back or place the lost inside the Main QSO window before changing to the next screen resolution See the next item for information on how to set resolution Screen Size Resolution It is really up to every user to decide what is comfortable to your eyes If you re running Windows 95 98 you can see what your system is capable of by doing the following 1 Double click on My Computer 2 Double click on Control P
268. port in packet mode and if your HF is purely used for voice strongly suggest that when entering commands into the TNC that you use the following format command set command example beacon e 20 The following commands will program your beacon to transmit on VHF only every 20 minutes Command HF port VHF port BEACON E 10 E 35 BTEXT blna HF gateway is active 10 149lsb ui with gate hf gt vhf blt 1 E 00 05 00 E 00 20 00 blt 2 E 00 12 00 E 00 30 00 blt 3 E 00 22 00 E 00 40 00 blt 4 E 00 10 00 E 00 50 00 It 1 3748 33ST14520 11E Station description It 2 3748 33ST14520 11E Station description It 3 3748 33ST14520 11E Station description It 4 blna HF gateway on 10 149Isb ui with gate hf gt vhf only Ito 1 aprs v MMM APRS Ito 2 aprs v echo MMM aprs v LLL Ito 3 aors v MMM OOO aprs V WIDE2 2 LLL Ito 4 aors v MMM aprs v trace2 2 LLL this is not covered very well it the Kam manual got these from the manual of the new kantronics modem the above commands all correspond with each other blt2 It2 Itp2 where blt is beacon times per port It2 is information that is to be beaconed Ito2 is the port and path with digi peater routes PACTOR MODE The PACTOR mode selection macros are CONTROL_CX Return to command prompt echo on View transmitted text pactor PACTOR standby mode CONTROL_CX echo on pactor call PACTOR the specified callsign CONTROL_CX echo on otlisten CONTROL_CA CONTROL_CD CONTROL_CE CONTROL_CR CONTROL_CS
269. port is not activated The Change Offset only show in black typeface if a prefix for a country with several time zones is entered USA Russia etc and the station being worked is not in his her own area For example enter the prefix W1 and note that this shows time and distance based on the station being in Concorde NH If this station was actually in California the time and other information shown would be so press CTL_O and a small window will appear allowing you to highlight the appropriate area in this case W6 Right click W6 and then on Select The calculated times distances etc will now be based on San Francisco The CTL_D function will allow you to forward a DX spot to the cluster DX 140 70 0 GINPA PSK 31 Soot cane O r All of the report to the cluster is preformed the header showing the frequency and callsign of the spot Anything typed into the pane will appear as a comment Click on the Spot button to send You must be connected to a cluster before this facility work Band Mode Selection Setup If you right or left click on any of the titles Frequency Band or Mode in the log input window you can do several things Manual entry If you have no computer interface or you wish to enter details of frequency band mode and or sub mode then remove the check marks from Band from BandPlan and Mode from BandPlan You will now have complete manual control over what appears in the log entry window Enter the d
270. quency setting see Transmitting a Clean Signal You have a narrow receive filter in your radio but it is not centered at the place where the station you want to receive is coming in You want to quickly move the station you are listening to near the edge of the receive range so you can use your radio s passband tuning to get rid of QRM The align function will help out in both PSK and RT TY modes Your radio can be retuned with a mouse click To set up to use the align frequency change function do the following You must have computer communication with your radio 1 Select the Settings Default main Rx Frequency menu item and set it to an appropriate value this will stay the same most of the time This can be a high tone or the center of the narrow filter passband It is best if both situations are true and you may have to tune your passband tuning control to make it so 1 Select the View Frequency Display Display Frequency from Radio menu item Here is how the align operation works Leave the AFC on so Logger82 can retune following the frequency change Left click on a signal to receive it in the main Rx window and Right click on the same signal to invoke the align function so that signal will be received at the preset Default Rx Frequency Instead of a right clicking you can use the align macro in a programmable button Logger32 will move the main passband to the default Rx frequency and will a
271. r W7TI RTTY is a fun and easy mode to operate but there are a few things which may be puzzling to the newcomer Please take a few minutes to read the following and you will probably save yourself some time and frustration as well as becoming more knowledgeable about the basics of RT TY Mark and Space An RTTY transmitter sends out a continuous carrier which shifts the frequency back and forth between two distinct frequencies There is no amplitude modulation only a pure carrier similar to CW with the addition of a frequency shift The lower RF frequency known as the SPACE frequency and the upper RF frequency is known as the MARK frequency The difference between the two known as the SHIFT For amateur radio the SHIFT has been standardized at 170 Hz It is customary to refer to the MARK frequency as the frequency on which you are operating For example if you say you are transmitting on 14080 00 kHz that your MARK frequency is 14080 00 kHz and your SPACE frequency is 170 Hz lower or 14079 83 kHz FSK and AFSK You will often hear the terms FSK and AFSK when talking about RI TY FSK means Frequency Shift Keying and AFSK means Audio Frequency Shift Keying Here is an important point regardless of which method is used the RF signal sent out over the air identical MARK is always the higher RF frequency and SPACE is always the lower RF frequency The station receiving the signal cannot tell any difference at all So what is the difference The di
272. r use Purpose of the Rx Window The Main Receive window has three purposes 1 Display received PSK31 text 2 Echo transmitted text after it has been sent 3 Provide an area for the user to capture callsign signal report and name Toolbox Menu Item ToolBox View Mode Display Aux Rs window fort As window Ts test color Rs window control codes color Ae window normal background Rs window paused background Rs window mouseover highlight Ts window for Ts window background Ta window butter indicator color Waterfall colors Waterfall sensitivity Sound card input level Sound card output level RTTY sr Scope color CPU Power saver mode The following are user selected options for the Rx window 1 Rx window font sets print style and text color Rx window Tx text color sets color for echoed text Echoed text is enabled disabled with the View Rx Window Options menu item Rx window control codes color Control codes are enabled disabled with the View Show Control Codes menu item 1 Rx window normal background Rx window paused background sets the background color when all Rx windows are paused with the lt Insert gt key Rx window mouseover highlight sets color for text change when the cursor is over it This is useful when you are selecting text to right click for the comment field of Logger32 or when selecting a callsign or RST for a log Rx Window Pause The Rx Window has a scrollbar on the ri
273. r 50 kHz higher and 160 meters 160 meter RTTY activity is rare but when found it is usually between 1800 and 1820 Avoid the CW DX window between 1830 1840 At present there is not much activity on the WARC bands although 30 meters can be active at times Here is where you will find most of the RTTY activity 80 meters 3580 3650 3520 3525 in Japan 40 meters 7080 7100 in the US see note below 30 meters 10110 to top of band 20 meters 14080 14099 avoid the beacons at 14100 15 meters 21080 21100 10 meters 28080 28100 RTTY allocations for 40 meters vary greatly all over the world In the US RTTY is permitted between 7000 and 7150 although US activity is between 7080 and 7100 DX activity is often found between 7020 and 7040 For US operators remember that RTTY is not allowed in the phone portions of the HF bands except on 160 meters where it is anywhere in the band RTTY DX Chasing DX on RTTY is highly popular with the RTTY crowd As you might guess 20 meters is the premier DX band for RTTY most rare DX stations and especially DXpeditions operate on 14080 Just like with CW or phone if the DX is calling CQ and no answers you can feel safe in calling him right on his frequency If things are busy however he will often work split which you should call him on a different frequency usually 2 10 kHz higher He will say up 2 10 or something similar at the end of his transmission and that s your clue Your tra
274. r and smoother display of all band frequency and mode changes Kachina 505 Hew Lines VA3HU No COM port is required for this radio The Kachina writes data directly to a data file on your computer Setting up Logger32 to control the Kachina 505 is very simple From the Main Menu select the Setup menu From the Setup Menu select the Radio Port configuration menu item to display the RigControl Setup dialog box HiglControl setup Com port Hone D atabits E Baudrate 9600 StopBits fi Radio Kachina 505 a Parity None Data file EAFA Set DTA high M Folling speed ms 1000 Set ATS high M lcom address Hex foo OF Select None for the Com Port enter a fully qualified filename into the Data File edit box and accept all other defaults Yaesu FT 100 Barry Winch VA3WI The procedure for Interfacing the FT 100 is relatively straight forward provided you have a level converter to interface the computer s RS 232 signals to the FT 100 s TTL signals There are two ways to achieve this the first is to acquire the Yaesu CT cable the second is to build your own Below are details of a home brew circuit using a minimum of components If a MAX 233 is used instead of the MAX 232 then the capacitors are not required 13 8 VDC 3 YDG r005 ae FTIUU 3 84 From FTIOUComp fond To Computer RxD From Computer TxD To FT100 Data Out From FT1o0 Data In BAS BAS NOTE All
275. r the recording settings Click on Tool Box Sound Card output level For now slide the Windows Volume Control to a minimum all the way and the Wave slider at just slightly above the minimum setting Put Logger82 in the tune mode by clicking Mode Tune Tune should now appear the lower left hand corner of the statusbar It is also possible to cycle through the modes by clicking in the mode pane of the Statusbar Next click on the small blue Receive indicator in the pane in the middle part of the Statusbar Receive blue changes to Transmit red and Logger82 transmits a single tone in the Tune mode To return to receive mode simply left click the same pane again which now says Transmit You can also toggle between transmit and receive by pressing the Pause Break key on your keyboard Don t lose track of how long you are transmitting You can overheat your finals Here is what this setup should look like with both windows visible SC7 here Adjust Rig Audio and Vox There is a lot of interaction between the vox level setting and the audio setting Slowly raise the Volume control on the mixer until the rig s vox circuit engages and the radio starts transmitting If vox has not engaged by the time the Volume control is midway up the slider scale then raise the rig s mic gain slightly and try again Watch rig s ALC indicator You want a minimum reading here indicating that there is just enough audio to drive the rig but not so much that you run the
276. r they can be combined on one line as shown below Both examples set USB with the 2 4Khz hexcommand 00 00 00 01 OC sets USB hexcommand 00 00 00 00 8C sets the 2 4 kHz filter Or combined hexcommand 00 00 00 01 OC 00 00 00 00 8C Note It has been found that for the FT990 only two commands can be put in one line but for the FT 1000MP this increases three Direct Control of Icom and Ten Tec Omni VI Transceivers It is possible to use the hexcommand and qsy commands to set modes and frequencies in Icom radios that are in communication with Logger32 Read the above sections for general information on what to do and what to expect This contains information specific to some Icom radios The Ten Tec Omni VI and VI use the same syntax For the full syntax of these commands consult the radio user s manual There may be commands that work for one radio and not another but the format is the same Icom radios do not have a transmit receive command but the Ten Tec Omni VI does Therefore you cannot transceive via radio command with an Icom radio you must use another form of t r control See the topic Configuring Push to Talk PTT Default Address Icom radios do not share a single universal default address and the correct one must be set in the Logger32 setup for the radio You will find this information in the instruction manual for your radio or you can review your radio menu and find the in the radio The IC 706MKII uses 4E the I
277. r works for most copied The shift will change only for receive it will return to the HAM default for transmit 4 FSK The center frequency cannot change and the shift can only take the values of 170 200 220 240 Hz whichever for most letters decoded You can set the mark and shift by clicking Setup Demodulator Tab and setting them at the left Press OK to leave this display save the mark shift values If you set the AFC at Fixed then the mark frequency can change to try to copy a signal but the shift stay as you set it on the Demodulator Tab If you are in Free AFC mode the shift will change to match the actual shift of the received signal when you turn the AFC on You can return to the standard HAM values by pressing Reset on the RTTY toolbar or the Statusbar The HAM values can be set on Demodulator Tab The MMTTY engine comes with these preset at mark 2125 Hz shift 170 Hz When you set the AFC at Free and turn AFC on Reset returns you to the original mark shift values for a moment then Logger32 looks around for RTTY signals and varies these parameters in an attempt to copy something Left Click to Reset Shift When you are in an AFC mode that allows the shift to change such as Free Logger32 returns the shift to the HAM default every time you left click in the waterfall This means that Logger32 always begins to try to decode a new signal at the default shift Reset The Reset button sets the mark and shift frequencies back t
278. radio must be turned off then back on for the new parameters to take effect on the port SETTING UP LOGGER Both the TS 570 and TS 870 operate with No Parity and 8 Data Bits Setting up Logger32 to control either the TS 570 or TS870 is very simple From the Main Menu select the Setup menu From the Setup Menu select the Radio Radio Port configuration menu item to display the RigControl Setup dialog box Com port Eom 1 Databits E Baudrate a600 Stop its fi Radic Kenwood all Parity None Data file Jtest Set DTA high Iw Folling speed ms 1000 Se RTS high M Icom address Hes foo OK From the drop down lists select the following RigControl setup Com Port the serial port to be used on the computer Baudrate the Baudrate configured in the previous section Setting up the Radio Radio Kenwood all Databits 8 StopBits the number of Stop Bits configured in the previous section Setting up the Radio Parity None and Accept all other defaults Click OK NOTE The default values of 9600 baud for the COM port and 1000 ms 1 second for the Polling Speed should be used as a starting point for your configuration If your radio and computer can handle faster baud rates you should select the highest baud that provides reliable operation with your specific hardware Reducing the value of the Polling Speed increasing the rate of polling will provide a faste
279. rator currently being used Before the import starts a dialog popup window will remind you this and show the current operator callsign that will be used as the default From the Main Toolbar select the Tools Menu then the Import Logs option then ADIF file ka Lorzer32 Fie Tools View wards CW Setup Help GridSquare calculator E a EH Snap windows bo size Setup Bands amp Modes Database maintenance Import logs d ADIF adi File Export logs Export Files Logger will prompt you for the file you wish to import NOTE Logger will only look for files with the ADI extention Highlight the you wish to import and click on the OPEN button A popup window will provide you with a few options at this point crham radio Vogzertbackupdatabasefilesikb g Callsign K4 Q5O0stead 514 Errors ai i Add O50 to eOSL i Add QSOs to LOTW Start Button Clicking this button will start the import Stop Button Clicking this button will stop the import Note Any QSO s that were added before pressing Stop will remain in logbook Add QSOs to eQSL Checking here will flag each imported QSO to be included with an eQSL export Add QSOs to LOTW Checking here will flag each imported QSO to be included with a LOTW export More information on these two exports is included in the Exporting Files help topic After Logger32 has completed the import a popup window will open showing you the total imported QSOs and any errors that found AD
280. rch for a QSO right click anywhere within the Logbook page and select Search for QSO A pop up window will open and you can choose from many of the fields to conduct your search some are shown here Search the Logbook by 050 EJ ADIF field to search by Search starting with QS0_NUMBER Jea Depending on what field you choose to search on the logbook page will react differently For example if you choose to sort QSO number beginning with 983 as in the image above the log will sort by QSO number and then position itself at QSO On thing to note is that when sorting only QSOs with matching data will appear in the log For example if you sort by IOTA starting with NA 001 the log will first sort by IOTA then position itself at NA 001 and only those QSOs with an IOTA entry will display in the log One other thing to note once you have selected your search criteria you can move the Search the window out of your way while you are working with the log Once you close the Search the Logbook window the log reverts back to the condition it was in before you invoked the search Flagging QSO records Right clicking on any QSO will bring up a pop up window see image above where in the center of window are 4 options Send QSL This option will flag the QSO so that it is included with the next Link to topic Exporting Files QSL Record Send eQSL This option will flag the QSO so that it is included with the next Link to topic Exporting Files
281. re then leave the option off TE Sound Card Data File Settings Toolbox View hode Display Squelch response Display smoothing Spectrum pen width CID speed Typing preference T F F F F Line wrap on Use i for zero Long Tx tail Overload warning RTTY watchdog timer Transmit butter indicator w Receive window mouseover lt 4 4 Display Width A user set Display control called Spectrum Display Width can be found under the Settings drop down menu on the Main Menu This allows you to shrink or expand the display view width The following window Is displayed for the user to adjust for personal operating preference Display width Depending on your operating preference and screen resolution You may want to set the Spectrum display or waterfall to be wider or narrower on the screen Increasing this scale value will make the display wider decreasing scale will make the display narrower The display itself will show a 4EHz audio bandwidth Adjusting this setting will make the 46Hz wider or HANOwE on YOuUr Screert The limits of this setting are from 5 to 15 Under View on the Main Menu you will find Frequency display After selecting Frequency display the user has the option to the display Spectrum or Waterfall scaled in Display audio frequency or Display frequency from radio Display Using Preset Radio Frequency Reading If you wish to use the display scaled in radio frequency instead of
282. replace the field with the correct DXCC prefix automatically Should you find that have prefixes like WB2 or 9K2 in the PFK field then this is incorrect and the log files will have to be reloaded Delete ALL the files 4 AND the Stats files 4 and start again The ADI file loader has the ability to load contest logs and to mark them with the name of the contest If this option is required the check the Import Contest Log box and you will be asked to supply the contest name The contest name given will be loaded into the Contest_ID field for each record in the logbook Setup Callsign Geoff Anderson G3NPA When Logger32 is run for the first time or if you right click on the Logbook Entry window and select Change Operator from the popup menu the Current Operator dialog box will be displayed Simply enter a new callsign into the edit box or using the drop arrow select a previously entered callsign and click the Apply button Current Operator Main Menu Hew Lines VA3HU Logger32 utilizes two standard Windows Menu bars the Main Menu and Setup Menu The Main Menu enables the user to access the following functionality cl Loggers Fle Tool View Awards CW Setup Help The FILE menu item allows the user to change the logbook The TOOLS menu item allows the user to Utilize the Grid Square Calculator Snap Windows to Size Set up Bands and Modes Database Maintenance allows the user to Display Logbook details Logboo
283. return lt CR gt or a space within the macro sequence the lt CR gt or space will go into the transmit text buffer It will be sent on your next transmission If this is annoying you simply concatenate the commands on a single line with no space between sequential commands If this is not you don t bother For specific information on how to set up Logger32 to operate PTT using direct commands see Configuring Push to Talk or the specific appendix for your radio Remember also that Logger382 has QSY and QSX macros These macros do not require that you know any special codes If you have the computer controlling your radio frequency just click the Simplex Split button on the Statusbar and Logger32 will change frequency as it switches to transmit Direct Control of Kenwood Radios The original material for this section was developed on the Kenwood TS 850 It was then found to be partly applicable to the Kenwood TS 570 and TS 870 The fundamentals described may give an insight to those owning other equipment on how to construct macros in Logger82 to control their rigs Some of the suggestions will work with all Kenwood equipment having remote control interfaces However because of changes filter switching and the introduction of DSP since the release of the TS 850 the selection of filters and effective receiver and the associated command sequences will be slightly different The reader is left consult his her radio s instruction manual and to e
284. ros and Direct Control of Radios Display radio frequencies on the analog Display frequency scale go to View Frequency Display Display Frequency from Radio Display radio frequencies on pane 3 of the Statusbar Set the transmit frequency to that of an Aux window by turning Net off and then clicking on pane 3 in the Aux window see Operating Split By Transmitting at an Aux Window Passband Frequency Automatically retune your radio so that you are transmitting a tone of a selected audio frequency while remaining on the same transmitted radio frequency see align Retune your radio to a favorite frequency using Macros Set the receiver filter bandwidths using Macros Select mode and sideband using Macros Operate split frequency Separate trnsmit and receive frequencies using Macros The Macros topic has a list of all macros in Logger32 The Direct Control of Radios topic discusses how to use those macros that are specifically designed to control the radio over the Com port Connecting a Radio to Your Computer and to Logger32 General information is provided here to interface radios to Logger32 Detailed interface instructions for some specific radios may found in the appendix for those radios You will need to refer to your radio instruction manual for details of the exact protocol used by your radio the communications port com port settings and the cable and interface requirements In Logger32 you must first configure a port
285. round the world is www timeanddate com worldclock full htm Detailed information on the Port95nt exe Low Level I O Port Drivers may be found at www driverlinx com DownLoad DIPortlO htm REFLECTORS The following reflector will allow you to participate in on line discussions related to the Logger programs both 16 and 32 bit http hnamlogger yahoogroups com General Features Geoff Anderson G3NPA Logger32 has been constructed to be a highly user configurable general purpose Amateur Radio logbook with computer control support for many radios and antenna rotators It is NOT a contesting log although there is no real reason why it could not be used for such and does not contain some features that might be found in software specifically designed for this activity A sample of it DOES contain is given below Fully ADIF compatible including the proposed new modes and sub modes Logbook and previously worked tables can have up to 48 columns all user configurable including IOTA Grid squares satellite names ten ten etc Logbook Previous QSO and QSOs to a selected prefix windows can have the columns presented in any order Worked Confirmed Table can display information in either of two ways Seven user definable log entry page items Logs more than 1 5M QSOs All Country County and IOTA databases are fully editable Displays sunrise sunset short path distance long and short
286. rse RTTY Operate RTTY using reverse shift USB rttysetup RTTY Display the MMTTY setup dialog box This is the equivalent of selecting the Setup button of the RTTY Toolbar rttyshift RTTY Returns the current setting of the RT TY Shift normal or reverse rttysquelchoff RTTY Turns the RTTY Squelch off rttysquelchon RTTY Turns the RTTY Squelch on rxtonefreq RTTY Returns the Mark tone currently displayed in the second panel of the Sound Card Data Window Statusbar see the section on Difficult Macros sentrst PSK RTTY Inserts the contents of the RST Sent field of the Logbook Entry Window into th output text stream serialnum PSK RTTY Returns the serial number of this QSO shortdate PSK RTTY Inserts the current date into the output text string in the form dd mm yy shortdateandtimne PSK RTTY Inserts the current date and time into the output text string in the form dd mm yy hh mm shorttime PSK RTTY Inserts the current time into the output text string in the form hh mm simplex PSK RTTY Restores simplex operation by returning the Transmit frequency to the Receive frequency after a qsx command speed CW Temporarily increases the Dot length by 4 ms CW speed will be slower speed CW Temporarily decreases the Dot length by 4 ms CW speed will be faster CWspeeddn CW Permanently increases the Dot length by 2 ms CW speed will be slower CWspeedup CW Permanently decreases the Dot leng
287. s BPSK 1179 9Hz 14069 230 KHz Simplex E Transmit E NetOn Y APCOn Reset Abort 14070 ll _ 14 65 14068 ma 254 KHz F Simpk LD CD AFC n Reset Abort Operating Split By Transmitting at an Aux Window Passband Frequency and Receiving With the Main Window 1 You come upon a DX station operating split by calling CQ DX CQ DX de SP1LT listening down 500 hz pse Here is a to follow his instructions 2 Turn Net Off this is a crucial step From now on your transmit frequency will not follow your receive frequency 3 Open Aux 1 Rx window blue passband lt gt Look for activity down 500 Hz if he was calling on 1400 Hz you should look down around 900 Hz 4 If you see some activity close to 900 Hz hold the Alt key and click on the signal in the display to bring the Aux 1 Rx to that area blue passband 5 Click the Audio Frequency Pane second pane from left on the Aux 1 Window status bar This moves the transmit to that frequency When you transmit your signal now will be at the blue passband and you are still listening to the station split under the red passband Main Rx Window You can use either Aux 1 or Aux 2 to set the transmit frequency when working split Receive the station in the Main Receive Window To reset the transmit frequency to the receive frequency simply click Reset on the Statusbar of the Main Receive Remember to turn Net on when you have finished working split Aux Ax Chann
288. s must be observed when setting them up The TNC must be operated a dedicated serial port The PTT is the most common shared function The port setup of each function is defined in the specific portion of this help file related to the respective functions If you choose to use Shared ports you must make sure that each shared function is setup in a manner that will not cause any conflicts The following Serial port combinations are possible Radio Control PTT and CW transmit PTT and CW transmit PTT CW transmit and Rotor control The only Parallel combination that is possible is Antenna Switching and CW transmit including PTT See below for specific rules must be followed if this configuration is used Serial Port configurations The following is a list of the signal lines used by each module in Logger382 Radio Control TxD and RxD PTT RTS and or DTR CW RTS for PTT keying and DTR for CW data RT TY TxD line is used in the FSK mode of operation There is also the TxD line used in the RTTY module if folk want to use FSK operation rather than AFSK Specific details on pinouts and RS 232 signals for both Inner Link DB 9 Glossary DB 9 and Inner Link DB 25 Glossary DB pin connectors are available in the Link to topic Glossary Glossary Parallel Port configuration Antenna switching Pins 2 thru 9 CW transmit PTT on pin 22 and CW Data on pin 23 NOTE If the same Parallel Port is used for both the Antenna and the CW module
289. s to be displayed in the Island Group column in the large text box and complete the details in the IOTA Prefix Latitude and Longitude edit boxes and click on the Add button Modify an Island Group To modify an Island Group entry click on the appropriate row of the IOTA Maintenance window make the modifications and click on the Modify button Delete an Island Group To delete an Island Group entry click on the appropriate row of the IOTA Maintenance screen and then click on Delete button If you wish to add modify or delete and additional information about the Islands within the group this can be done in the lower half of the above screen US County Maintenance of the US County database is identical to the IOTA maintenance process only using the US County maintenance and Edit US County database windows US County maintenance a First Southeast 56 9471 135 0426 Fourth Central 64 5037 147 6591 Second Morthwest 5 2414 165 2777 Third Southcentral 61 2169 149 85682 Autauga B aldwir Barbour Bibb Blount Bullock Butler Calhoun 32 9422 30 6545 31 8631 da ab 33 9797 32 1015 31 7520 33 4o 06 6415 of fod 09 2090 ar 1269 06 5662 a 06 os NOTE If you left click on either the State or County headings in the table above the grid will sort on that column Edit US County database X Bk JFouthCental ooo Update Delete add Cancel Atomic Clock B Charles Sutton W1MCP If you hav
290. s to disable the on board sound card in Windows Settings Configuration System menu and install a separate sound card After these receive adjustments are made try to copy some QSOs by tuning them in using Logger82 s tuning indicator s as above and described in Tuning Display and Controls in the topic on Receiving PSK31 Transmit Interface To transmit digital signals you need to connect the sound card output often through an isolation transformer or 100 1 attenuator the transmitter microphone or AFSK input The following picture shows a direct connection but many transceivers and sound will need the voltage divider shown later in this section However please check the instructions for your rig Some radios have a divider in the rear audio input but do not have it at the microphone connector If you connect to the rear input you do not need external divider One radio that does have such a divider is the Kenwood TS 680 Also make sure that you do not use speech processing in the radio Any type of speech processing will distort the audio and this distortion hurts digital signals more than speech signals Overdriving your transmitter audio stage in PSK31 creates big IMD problems and is a major cause of interference in this mode It very important to get this right Be sure to check in your first QSOs to make sure that you do not have a high IMD Many PSK programs like Logger82 read this value out on received signals You must give the
291. s wide reduce the sensitivity with the control at the bottom If it is still wide make sure to click at the same relative place on both top and bottom ticks e g left edge q Ifthe display is quite slanted at first repeat this calibration two or three times The last time should make only a small change If the time standard station roadcasts a strong tone along with the ticks and you have trouble seeing the tick line it is possible to use manual or automatic notch to get rid of the steady tone The automatic notch is probably too slow to the ticks Right click to move the vertical calibration reference line without beginning the procedure This lets you look at the tick in comparison with the vertical standard PSK31 Calibration Procedure The calibration for PSK31 involves adding a line to the Settings area of the Logger32 INI file Logger32 ini that looks like this Settings Clock Error PPM xxxx Where xxxx is the adjustment for the clock error in PPM Clock speed is 8000Hz in PSK A plus sign makes the clock go and a minus sign makes the clock go slower The value xxxx must be in the range of 10000 The MMTTY adjustment screen shows the adjustment in PPM to the right of the display of the actual sound card clock frequency Copy this number down when you do the calibration in RTTY mode and put it in the Logger32 ini file in the Clock Error PPM line Here is an example 1 Do the RTTY calibration and arrive at a
292. se actively during digital operations The panes in the Status Bar not only give information but those with captions in blue or red are controls that act as switches to change modes or perform actions for example to switch between receive and transmit Mode The first pane indicates the digital mode currently selected A mouse click in this panel will cycle through Logger32 s modes The mode can also be set from the Mode menu fa Cd 14070 esl E res Ne eee e eae etter Ue ene See eee eee ee Ee eee lee E E E BPSK fis000H2 140A 2khe 230 Simplex Aecewe NetOt AFCON Reset Abot CPU PTT Audio frequency The second pane indicates the audio frequency at the tuned position of the main window a best BPSK 1500 0Hz 14071112 KHz 23d8 Simplex Receive NetOtt AFCOM Reset Abot CPU PTT Operating frequency The third pane will show your actual operating frequency which is your radio frequency plus USB or minus LSB the receive frequency To display this frequency your radio must be connected to Logger32 using a computer radio communication and you must be running Logger32 See Interfacing a Radio for PC Control for information on connecting your radio to use Logger32 s control features Next select Display frequency from radio from the View Frequency display menus shown here fa Cd 14070 ESSE E E ea beeen E Emme E E nee meas Emmaus Se ee es eee ene E ome
293. sensitivity of the transmitter audio by using the microphone gain The microphone gain control works fine at preventing overmodulation when a regular microphone is connected to the audio input and the cause of the overmodulation is the strong voice of the operator generating a slightly higher voltage at the microphone than it was intended to handle However when the input is not the few millivolts for which it was designed but instead is 100 or more times too great as in our sound card to microphone situation distortion can occur in the first audio stage even before the signal has reached the microphone gain control No matter how low the operator sets the microphone gain control the distortion already happening before the control Even if the operator were to reduce the microphone gain so low that it barely modulated the transmitted signal at all that modulation would be distorted Instead of reducing the mic gain reduce the level of the input signal Windows Gain Control Lowering the voltage output from the sound card eliminates the audio microphone stage distortion Alright says our ham I will use the computer mixer or volume control thoughtfully provided by my friend Bill at Microsoft when he created and will move it down until the output voltage from my sound card is low enough for my transmitter microphone input Well there is still a problem That volume control was designed to vary the voltage through a range of reasonabl
294. sing the Default Back Colors button When the Macro Setup is completed and you are ready to save it press the OK button Pressing the Cancel button will cause the Macro Setup window to close without saving your work Delete Cancel all settings will restore the button to the way it was before you began editing it If it had a script that script will be restored if it was blank it will return to blank User Assigned Hot Keys In order to make your buttons more user friendly consider the use of User Defined Hot Keys It may be easier to remember that the simultaneous combination of Alt C rather than F1 is the routine for calling CQ User Defined Hot Keys are assigned to a button by using an ampersand amp in the Button Caption immediately preceding the character you wish to use as the Hot Key For example entering amp CQ in the Button Caption field will cause the button text to CQ and allow the pressing of lt Ctrl C gt to be used as the Hot Key for that button Note that the underline under the C indicates Hot Key visually 5 Macro Setup forF2 A Button Caption of Msg amp 1 would display as Msg 1 on the button and use lt Ctrl 1 gt as the Hot Key An extension of this feature allows the use of special characters on the Macro buttons During Macro Setup entering the ASCII code of any special character will display that character as part of the caption text For example entering caption of a button as chr 191
295. sion assumes that you have built and connected an appropriate interface for the PTT line as shown above Select the appropriate PTT options Click Settings Radio PTT which brings up the following dialog box The selections displayed are the correct ones to setup the radio for sharing the com port for radio control and PTT functions ee mo x EIE keping line f ATS Keying only C DTR Keying only C ATS OTR Keping Seral Fort f None C Comi Com C Com2 f Com C Com3 C Com C Com4 C Come Keying options PTT by Serial Fort PTT by Radio Command f PTT by Shared Radio Port If you wish to use a Separate com port for PTT or you do not have radio control the following steps will provide the correct setup q Under Keying Options select PTT by Serial Port q Under Serial Port select the Com port connected to your PTT interface q Under PTT Keying line select RTS for pin 4 DB 25 or pin 7 DB 9 operation used by the circuit above Select for pin 20 DB 25 or 4 DB 9 operation Selecting RTS and DTR will set both pins to high Make sure that your interface is connected to the appropriate pin for the method that you choose PTT Using a Shared Radio Port You may choose to operate a PTT line directly from a pin on a Com port as described directly above and also have communicate directly with the radio for frequency information and software command control on the same Com port Click Settings Radi
296. smit pane in the Statusbar this is the sixth box along the bottom Sen Scr ce eee eee E eee er E E ES BPSK 1451 1 He a a Sep ee ee a ce Pr q Use Macros and Hot Keys q Use the Pause Break key Use the lt Esc gt key Pausing the Rx Window You can pause the display of received data in the Rx Window by pressing the lt Ins gt or lt Insert gt key on the keyboard You can scroll back and forth in the Rx Window using the scroll arrows to the right The pause is cancelled by typing lt INS gt again continues to receive data while the Rx Window is paused and the text that arrived while the display was paused will appear at the bottom of the Rx window when you press lt INS gt a second time Be careful with the pause function When you use the pause function the background turns white If you are using a white the whole Rx Window will turn white and you won t be able to see the letters You can adjust the Rx window background color pause with Toolbox Rx Window Paused Background Cut and Paste You can cut and paste data from the Sound Card Data Window You can copy text into the Logger32 Windows into a browser or into a word processor For those familiar with Windows this is the Clipboard function Left click and drag the mouse across some text in the Rx window this will momentarily highlight the text then release the left mouse button Right click and select copy or cut Be careful people often forget t
297. t ANY ADIF entry Right click on any of the log entry panes select Setup Setup user fields and pick the field of your choice In the example below USER 5 was selected Enter the label required select the ADIF field type and in this case select the Show Help button Make other selections to suit Please be aware that the list of ADIF fields available from the pull down list will change Once one of the ADIF definitions has used the same definition will NOT appear in the list again thus preventing its use in a second pane To restore the definition to the list you must remove it from wherever it is used thus releasing it back to the list Setup User iS 5 l C The settings above for User 5 give the results shown below The mark is the Help button and a click on this will reveal information about your IOTA contacts Note that only fields 2 3 5 6 and 7 can have help button associated with them ic If you wish to limit the number of characters that can be entered into a field or have something preset in a field then complete the appropriate parts in the setup window for that field Shown below is an example for the Logbook Entry Window that does not display User1 and User4 fields aoe Entry G3NPA Revd e oE Name e SS SS OTA mnt Note This button will cause the fields on this line to toggle between Comment QTH and Address Other Setup Menu Items Appearance The
298. t chance may be the 20 meter frequencies RTTY usually is received and transmitted using the lower sideband LSB Put your transceiver in LSB and tune to one of the desired frequency ranges If you are lucky you should be able to find the quite distinguishable trill chiroy RTTY tones RTTY warbles while PSK drones Getting Logger32 Ready q First copy MMTTY EXE version 1 59D2 or above into the same directory as Logger32 Logger32 will not be able to operate RTTY without this file q1 Next place Logger82 in RTTY mode Either click and rotate through the mode options in the lower left corner of your Logger382 screen figure 1 or click on MODE at the tope of your screen and choose RTTY from the drop down menu figure 2 MOLO 14060060K Simplex Receive Figure 1 RTTY selected by clicking until RTTY appears in the left pane of the statusbar Mode Display Auxd AL BPSK BPSK PSE inverted RTTY 170Hz shit setup ATTY Frofiles Tune Figure 2 RTTY selected from the drop down menu The RTTY logo will appear on your Windows task bar usually at the bottom of your screen Figure 3 l l Aug 22 02 18 59 10 Cluster Radio Rotor Telnet Antenna HHH Astan Gc Ee ae fa Sound Car Re MGI Photo 3 Logger32 ate Figure 3 RT TY Mode selected and RTTY Engine activated Okay I m All Set Bring On the RTTY With your radio ready and Logger82 correctly configured you are a mouse
299. t column the packet cluster command to be sent to the packet cluster station that menu item Clucter echorteute a Show D1 TELNET PANEL The Telnet panel provides a connection to a DX cluster via the Internet CA Telnet VHF Tenet Data terminal Welcome to the clx gateway you logged in from 4 43 36 z44r 3545 n Your callsig VYVA3HU Password VASHU Hello washu you were validated now connecting to clx Fe connected to clx Hi hew This is Eduga a Linux PacketCluster node running CLAS O3 Last started 16 Jan 2002 16352 Uptime 3 04 565 34 Cluster 11 links 44 total nodes 3 local users max 4 Welcome to E4UGA l You can do a Show tutor far info about online help f amp You can set noannounce to kill all the chit chat mostly EUs trou can do a shom arn LO anwy time to see what wou missed j x Right clicking on the Telnet panel displays a pop up menu allowing the operator to both configure and operate the Telnet panel This menu is divided into five sections Sections 1 2 3 and 5 display a fixed set of menu items Section 4 displays to ten packet cluster shortcuts that are manually entered by the user using the Cluster shortcuts menu item of section 5 no cluster shortcuts are defined there will be no menu items displayed in section 4 Z ornrncet to PI J Section one Hold off receive text This is a toggled menu item When checked the display of received tex
300. t logs based on different callsigns you ve had in the past or used to separate mobile or calls then you should CHANGE the Logger 32 callsign to match the log you will be importing Unlike Logger16 in which you would have to load and maintain multiple log books for different callsigns Logger32 takes advantage of the ADIF field OPERATOR and therefore only uses one Logbook The operator field should be used to identify the operator at the time of QSO Logger32 will automatically enter the callsign for the current operator when importing ADIF log files Step 5 Load the Logbook Data into Logger32 With Logger32 running from the menu bar select File Import Logs ADIF Locate your possibly modified file and select Open You will now be presented with the window shown below and as this section is specifically for the of Logger16 logs it is recommended that all the check boxes are left blank Click on Start You will now receive a message the effect that if imported QSOs have no operator field they will default to the current user YOURCALL Click OK and the will load c program files logger3s24 gq3npa adi E E E E At the end of the loading process you will receive an information window advising of the number of QSOs loaded and the number that could not be loaded for some reason If there are log entries that were not accepted by Logger32 then the file BAD ADI will contain those records that were problematical These can be edited
301. t stops When cleared the display received text starts Section two Connect to This is a toggled menu item If there is not a current Telnet connection then this menu item is enabled and provides the capability to connect to the callsign defined by the Set as defaults shortcut button of the Setup Remote Hosts selection of the Telnet Setup menu If the Telnet panel is currently connected this menu item is disabled Connect list This is a toggled menu item If there is not a current Telnet connection then this menu item is enabled when clicked displays a drop down list of possible connections defined by the user using the Setup hosts menu item of the Telnet Setup menu If the Telnet panel is currently connected this menu item is disabled Disconnect This is a toggled menu item If there is not a current Telnet connection then this menu item is disabled if there is a current Telnet connection then this menu item is enabled and when clicked will disconnect Section three Clear text Clears all text from the Telnet panel Paste text Pastes any text in the Windows clipboard into the Telnet panel at the current cursor position Section four Show DX Show WCY Show WWV Bye In this example the user using the Setup Telnet shortcuts menu item of the Telnet Setup menu has adapted these menu items Section five Setup This menu allows the user to setup the telnet scripts remote host addresses and shortcuts Setup Setup scrip
302. t will not decode In the case of QPSK this leads to problems with standards since the mode is so new In actual practice most hams appear to be operating BPSK using AFSK and upper sideband This means that when they switch QPSK without reversing they must be decoded by the other station using upper sideband and QPSK without reversing However the standard of RTTY operation is lower sideband and this means that most hams operating as just mentioned are operating QPSK reverse based on the RTTY standard What this really means is that when you and another station decide to switch to QPSK if you do not know whether that station is using upper or lower sideband there is a chance that you will not decode that station If you click again on the mode pane it will switch from QPSK to QPSK reverse and you should begin to copy One trick is to set all three Rx windows on the signal to be copied set one aux window at QPSK and the other at QPSK reverse When you see which Aux window starts to print readable copy switch your main Rx window to that mode and you can then So What Is QPSK How QPSK Got Its Name Peter G3PLX says in an article entitled PSK 31 A new radio teletype mode with a traditional philosophy says that he called it quadrature polarity reversal keying which of course would have come out as QPRk but that everyone else calls it quaternary phase shift keying QPSK It is an error correcting mode that relies on four phas
303. ter up to ten telnet commands Each entry consists of plain text in the left column that will be displayed as the menu item of Section four and in the right column the telnet command to be sent to the telnet station for that menu item Telnet shortcuts Menuitem Commanding Show DX i Show DXAO Show cy Show wer Show ww Showy DATA TERMINAL PANEL Not coded yet Tracking Window Geoff Anderson G3NPA The tracking Window displays a map of the world on three tab panels overlaid with additional data The three panels are 1 Grayline Satellite DX Spots Grayline Panel The Grayline panel overlays the world map with three distinct shaded areas defining Day q Night A selectable transition area between day and night the Grayline 4 Tracking R epee A i at eB i an ee Select the size of the sun displayed on the map from one of three sizes 1 Show or Hide the sun Select the size of the Grayline The screen capture of the Grayline Panel displayed above is showing the daylight terminator set to nautical 12 degrees Satellite Panel 41 sill Lon 101 25 E FAUN AEH Lat 1 59 S Orbit 43701 Orbit 43701 ADS at 01 14 4 ADS at 01 144 Doppler 1966 Doppler 1966 Eclipse No Phase 145 Height 567 5 The Satellite Panel overlays the world map with the optional display of the position footprint and the predicted track to next Acquisi
304. th by 2 ms CW speed will be slower starttime PSK RTTY Records the current time as the QSO start time transmit PSK RTTY Turns the transmitter on and transmit any text in the TXWindow up PSK RTTY Moves the main passband up 1 Hz If AFC is locked on this command will have no effect upperorlower PSK RTTY Returns a plus sign if the radio is in USB mode or a minus sign if the radio is in LSB mode see the section on More Difficult Macros version PSK RTTY Enters the version number of Logger82 into the output text stream RTTY Turn RTTY diddle off This command also works if type into the TxWIndow RTTY Turn RTTY diddle on This command also works if type into the TxWIndow A Concatenatikon of adjacent letters see NOTE 3 Note 1 These commands are designed to change the operational mode of a radio controlled by Logger32 Since these change mode they can be invoked from any other mode They are ignored if the radio is transmitting so they cannot be used is macro statement that is meant to execute while the radio is transmitting e g Fred QSY to 14080 SRTITY asy 14080 00 Note 2 These commands can be used ONLY as a stand alone MACRO NO other text can be included in the command Note 3 Concatenated CW letters like AR SK BK etc are simulated by MACRO text with a caret between the letters to be joined e g A R S K Note 4 MACRO commands are only available via the buttons They may
305. th in one day and it also changes during the year Daylight is longer in the northern hemisphere than in southern hemisphere from about March 21 to September 21 and daylight is longer in the southern than in the northern hemisphere during the rest of the year The terminator more or less divides the Earth into halves facing the sun and away from the sun Logger32 also displays the Twighlight Terminator defining a Twighlight Zone These terminators are displayed in three different modes Zakanaka A digital mode decoding and terminal program that uses no terminal unit terminal node controller or multimode It does all its decoding using the sound card inside the computer and it can interface with a radio using a COM port Zakanaka is an extremely cost effective way of operating PSK31 and RTTY Direct Control of Radios Geoff Anderson G3NPA Additional information for this topic was provided by GOWZY DFSIAL W4JSI G3VFP KX2A W7DPW KD6AZN Introduction It is possible to use the command and hexcommand macro commands to send any legal command to a radio under control Each radio manufacturer has its own set of commands and these are changed as radios change This topic has instructions for Kenwood Yaesu and Icom or Ten Tec radios Note for purists Radio control is normally included in macro scripts operated by the macro buttons If you write a string of commands to be activated by a single macro button every time you put a carriage
306. the end of file creation you will be presented with a message that nnn QSO s have been copied the eQSL file Do you want to flag these QSO as having been sent to eQSL Yes No Answer this prompt appropriately Logger32 will now have created the ixt file ready for uploading to eQSL LOTW Files The LOTW file is a standard text txt file To save an LOTW file 1 Click on the LOTW button on the Toolbar to produce the LOTW Dialog Box Export QSL records Only W502 By All Operators Start Abort ADI SY no headers 2 Select the Operator 3 Click on Start 4 Either select a file name from those presented OR type in a new file name 5 Click on Ok in the file window 6 Select one of the three options to replace the file to append to the existing file or Cancel 7 You are then advised that XX QSO s have been copied into the LOTW file Do you want to flag these QSO as having been sent to LOTW Yes No Logger32 will now have created the ixt file ready for uploading to LOTW NOTE If there are no appropriate QSOs flagged in the log a message to that effect will be displayed Please note that at present the LOTW files are only dummies as the format for these has yet to be announced QSLFiles To save an QSL file 1 Click on the QSL button on the Toolbar to produce the QSL Dialog Box Export LOT records E4 Only G50 by jal Operators Start Stop 2 Select the Operator
307. then table will be blank If a callsign is entered into the logbook entry window and there are notes associated somewhere in logbook then the table will fill with the appropriate details as the example below shows Hotes 18 Jul 02 Testr ne o es rr a 12 Sep 02 Test note 1_ LIRA 26 Oct 02 Testr note to 2 zee what happens ee More test notes to show the effect of Henne Ina long line of information a line which is perhaps considerably longer than the the width of the Motes f TEENUS display window There is no need to enter a sReturn character at the end of each line as there is a built in word wrap If you left click on anyone of the notes in the table it will be highlighted and the logbook will also highlight that particular To enter a note you must have the Notes window visible and have inserted a callsign into the logbook entry window Right on the Notes window to bring up menu shown below Some of the above options may be greyed out If just adding a note click on Add Notes for current QSO and type your text into the small window that will appear Once you have completed this task Exit from the text window and return the focus back to the Logbook Entry Window You may then continue with entering whatever further QSO data you wish before recording all the information using the lt Return gt key You may also delete a note from the Notes Wi
308. ting them on your screen see Screen Control Operations The Auxiliary Rx Windows can be used for the following purposes An additional window to receive a PSK31 signal possibly ready for a change to QPSK To monitor a crowded band 1 To look for the next contact while in QSO Towork split frequency directly from Logger32 using audio split not transceiver split From the Aux1 and Aux2 windows a callsign can be captured by double clicking on it However all QSOs have to take place the Main Rx Window If you saw a station on Aux 1 signing with R5ARE you would do the following to give him a call 1 Quickly left double click on the station s signal in the display window 2 Double click the station s callsign in the Aux Window this will add the callsign to the log and call macro 3 Now call him The Aux windows have the same font and background controls as the Main Rx Window Go to ToolBox on the Main Menu of the Auxiliary Rx Window to change functions that apply separately to each Aux window To tune in signals for the two Aux Windows use the combination of lt ALT gt and mouse click for Aux 1 and lt CTRL gt and mouse for Aux 2 The AFC is controlled by clicking on the AFC pane on the Statusbar in the Aux Window The Aux Window Statusbar indicates the received signal frequency Hz and IMD The Aux 1 and Aux 2 Windows can be resized and positioned anywhere on your screen display The following drop down items are on the
309. tion of Signal AOS or Loss of Signal LOS of a selected satellite as well as optional details The satellite to be displayed is selected by the drop down list at the left of the top row of detail information The satellites listed in this drop down list are derived from the import of one or more sets of Keplerian Elements described later The remaining panes of the detail information displayed on the top row are The time in hours minutes and seconds remaining until the next AOS The azimuth and elevation of the satellite Lat and Long must be set correctly The range to the satellite Other than the top row of detail information the display of the remaining items in the Tracking Window is user selectable Right clicking on the Tracking Window will display a pop up menu allowing the user to 1 Display the satellite in one of three sizes Show or hide the satellite Show or hide the satellite path to next AOS or LOS When the satellite reaches AOS a new track is drawn from AOS to Loss of Signal LOS and the time indicator on the top row changes to show the time remaining LOS Once LOS is reached a new track will be drawn to the next AOS Note The satellite predicted track does NOT get erased automatically as the satellite moves The track can be updated by left clicking on the map 1 Show or hide the two panes of detail on the bottom of the window q Adjust the color contrast See Grayline Panel
310. to Files Change Logbook and enter the name of the file to be created In the case shown the file name will be G3NPA ISD Press the apply button and then enter the callsign you wish to use as the Operator Once Applied the new log will be available If this is a new log then the logbook page window will be empty and you may then load appropriate ADIF file or just start to use it This facility is most useful should you wish to maintain separate logs for contesting This has the advantage that the stats during the contest will apply ONLY to that contest even if the operator is the same as in other logs Exporting Logs B Charles Sutton W1MCP Logger32 gives you the option to export your logs in two different formats 1 ADIF Logger32 follows all the standards for exporting ADIF files here is an example of a portion of an ADIF record lt CALL 5 gt KE1EH lt QSO_DATE 8 D gt 20000402 lt TIME_ON 6 gt 000016 lt MODE 3 gt SSB lt BAND 3 gt 10M lt RST_SENT 2 gt 59 lt EOR gt 2 Comma Delimited csv The first 4 lines of the CSV file have details about the data it contains the 6th line shows the field headers and the following lines contain the QSO records here is an example of a portion of a CSV record KE EH RI KENT NA 03 291 28 305000 06 008 musty CSV files can be easily imported into many other programs including Microsoft Excel You may have to delete the first 4
311. to communicate with your radio Do this in the Config menu at the top of Logger You must do this first and have your radio on before doing the next step Icom and Ten Tec Radios require a specific address for the radio type This address can be set within Logger For example how to set up an IC 751 in the Logger program Click On Config at the middle of the second ToolBar Click On Radio Type Icom Click on IC 751 Input the Radio Address in Hex i e 1C for an Icom 751 Click the Red check mark For a Ten Tec you must first go to the Icom radio type and set the port to 04 the default port for al ITen Tec radios set the port address and go to Ten Tec and select the radio Note You must have your radio connected through a Com port and have the port selected and communicating with your radio before using Radio Type or Logger may freeze and have to be closed via Ctrl Alt Del Radio Debug Window To assist in setting up the communications there is a Radio Debug window that displays the data sent to and received from the radio In Logger click the Radio button at the top of Logger In Logger32 standalone click Toolbox Radio debug window Logger Bandplan Not all radios return their mode when interrogated Also when attempting to QSY a radio to a DX Spot some guess work is in determining the mode to put the radio on i e Is a DX Spot on 14080 a CW or RTTY spot To address this difficulty see the Logger Help Topic Bandplan in the Log
312. to use the low tone approach we will not have the extra harmonic reduction Of course if we generate a clean signal to begin with this decision may not make much difference Very Strong Received Signals lt is possible to be fooled into thinking that someone is distorting or generating harmonics although they are not doing so This happens when a received signal is so strong that it creates distortion within the receiver This is not the fault of the transmitting station any more than it is that station s fault if the receiver agc desenses on CW or phone operation because the signal is strong The danger is that a strong signal will overload your receiver and you will see a low IMD on the meter with lines on the display You will give the poor guy on the other end a warning about his distortion but in fact his signal is clean If you see a station with lines on the display and a low IMD first check to see if it is very strong If it is not strong you can trust the indicators If it is strong try adding attenuation to the front end of your radio with the radio s attenuator button If the IMD and lines improve IMD becomes more negative then this suggests that the problem is not with the other station but with your receiver and you need not warn the other fellow about his distortion If IMD stays the same then please warn him so he can fix problem Self Test of Our Own Signal Here is a procedure to check the quality of our PSK31 signal
313. ts Setup remote hosts Setup telnet shortcuts Setup Scripts Selecting this menu item displays the Setup telnet script dialog box This box enables the user to identify to Logger32 the prompts that are sent by the default Telnet host and to define responses to each of those prompts This effectively enables an automatic login process to the default Prompts sent by the host are detailed in the left hand columns and the Logger32 responses to each of those prompts are detailed in the right hand column Setup Telnet script x Frompt Response a our callsigrr kb 2q E Password ial Please enter your call kb 2g fa Setup Remote hosts This menu item displays the Telnet Setup dialog box that enables the user to define a list of host shortcuts that appear when the Connect List menu item of the Telnet panel pop up menu of the entries in this list may also be designated as the default host and will appear in the to menu item of the Telnet panel pop up menu Telnet setup x a A frcviaacm fs Add current entry Enters the current entry to the list of stored hosts Modify current entry Enables the current entry to be edited Delete current entry Deletes the current entry Clear all fields Clears all fields allowing new entry to be made Set as default shortcut Sets the current entry as the default Connect to host Setup telnet shortcuts This menu item displays yet another dialog box that permits the user to en
314. ts of the QTH field currently displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into the output text string radioandtone PSK RTTY Returns the RF center frequency radio carrier frequency plus audio tome frequemcy when in PSK mode Returns the RF of the Mark tone radio frequency plus the mark tone audio frequency in RT TY mode see the section on More Difficult Macros radiofreq PSK RTTY For radios controlled by Logger82 returns the nominal RF carrier frequency of the radio see the section on More Difficult receive PSK RTTY Switches the radio from transmit to receive receivedrst PSK RTTY Inserts the received RST report currently displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into the output text string reset CW An immediate command to reset the parallel port the serial port CW keying and or the PTT control lines to a low state un key the radio see Note 2 rtty PSK RTTY Changes the mode to RTTY See Note 1 rttybpoff RTTY Turns the receive bandpass filter off rttybpon RTTY Turns the receive bandpass filter on rityfigures RTTY Shifts the RTTY transmission into Figures mode rtty 1 PSK RTTY Changes the mode to RTTY Inverted see Note 1 rttyletters RTTY Shifts the RTTY transmission into Figures mode rttymarkfrequency RTTY Returns the RTTY Mark frequency This frequency will change depending on the commands rttynormal or rttyreverse rttynormal RTTY Operate RTTY using normal shift LSB rityreve
315. tween the two external connectors either on the hot or the ground In the year 2000 a voltage divider built to the above specifications could be constructed from new Radio Shack parts for about 10 00 including the case and a pair of phono jacks Here is a schematic diagram of this divider and 1 1 transformer n TI MIC SOUND CARD GND amp RF Feedback Problems We may need to add bypass capacitors between the hot and ground connections on both sides of the interface to reduce caused by RF feedback from the transmitter into the sound card We can also try ferrite beads on both hot and ground leads The Digital Mode Interface Here is a link to a number of interface designs to go between the sound card output Speakers or headphone out and the microphone or audio input at the transceiver In addition to the interface between the sound card output and transceiver audio this excellent site has schematics for interfaces that allow us to operate the push to talk PTT line of the radio from a Com port on the computer yet keep the two components completely isolated by using an optoisolator There are designs for switching PTT the RTS or DTR line and the diagrams give the pinout on the computer DB 9 or DB 25 for each line htto www qsl net wm2u interface html There are numerous manufacturers of such interfaces The earliest of these commercial devices was the RigBlaster Transmit Tone Selection to Reduce Harmonics We have discussed ho
316. u must enter a four digit number so for the ASCII 191 you must type 0191 After entering the routine enter a name into the Button Caption edit box at the lower right This is the text that will be displayed on the button itself w Macro Setup for F2 You can also program the following features of each macro button Back color This displays a standard windows color selection dialog box allowing you to select the color of the background of the button Fore color This displays a standard windows font selection dialog box allowing you to select the type style and color of the font be used on the button Note that even though the position of the text on the button in this window is not correct it will be on the button in the Sound Card Window or CW Machine w Macro Setup For F2 Mouseover Back color This displays a standard windows color selection dialog box allowing you to select the color to which background will change when you drag the cursor over it Mouseover Fore color This displays a standard windows font selection dialog box allowing you to select the type style and to which the font will change when you drag the cursor over it Note that even though the position of the text on the button in window is not correct it will be on the button in the Sound Card Window or CW Machine bg Macro Setup You can also restore the default background colors a delightful shade of gray u
317. u set either of these lines High you will not be able to share the same Com port for CW operation However if your Interface will run on power from the DTR line you may still be able to share the RTS line for PTT operation of the Sound card ICOM IC 746 Hal Miller KB1ZQ Radio IC 746 with ICOM OPC 662 interface cable Sample Settings are as shown in the figure below RigContol setup 4600 Icom not 0 735 7 Com port and Baudrate are user selectable making sure that the radio is set to the same settings Radio is set to Icom not IC 735 Set RTS high must be checked as this powers the OPC 662 interface Databits must be set to 8 StopBits should be set to 2 will work intermittantly with 1 Parity is set None Icom address Hex can be user defined however the default for the IC 746 is 56 OPC 662 Interface and cable are part of the ICOM RS 746 Package NOTES The default values of 9600 baud for the COM port and 1000 ms 1 second for the Polling Speed should be used as a starting point for your configuration If your radio and computer can handle faster baud rates you should select the highest baud rate provides reliable operation with your specific hardware Reducing the value of the Polling Speed increasing the rate of polling will provide a faster and smoother display of all band frequency and mode changes On the IC 746 menu set the CI V Transceive to OFF This will stop the radio from sending data to the computer
318. ual sampling frequency must be high It is 2010 2000 X 11025 which is 11080 125 Hz 1 Click Setup Misc Tab and set the frequency to 11080 you will be very close to the correct value 2 Click OK to exit Setup 3 Exit Logger32 and restart it Calibration using a Time Standard on Short Wave Logger32 s MMT TY RTTY engine has a special display that allows you to find the true clock frequency of the sound card using an accurate 1 second tick Here are some stations around the world that broadcast ticks each second 1 WWV WWVH 2500 0 5000 0 10000 0 kHz 1 GBR 60 0 kHz SSB 1 RWM 4996 0 9996 0 14996 0 SSB 1 CHU 7335 0 How the Calibration Procedure Works The MMTTY RTTY engine has a calibration routine that listens to the sound card for two seconds when the sampling frequency around 11025 Hz and paints a picture across the screen of the sounds during those two seconds If the clock window says that this takes 11025 Hz then the software puts 11025 dots across the screen If the clock window is adjusted to say that this takes 11030 Hz then 11030 dots are painted across the screen If the value 11025 or 11030 is correct then this will result in the ticks occurring in exactly the same place on the screen every two seconds Over time there will be two vertical lines of ticks down the screen However if the clock number is incorrect then it will take longer or shorter than two seconds to see two ticks The white spot that shows a tick
319. uency The transmit waterfall display will be at the audio at which you are transmitting If you have made a mistake you can abort your transmission and turn Net on or if you decide to where you are you can left click on your own transmit waterfall during while you are transmitting and your receive passband window will move to your transmit frequency so you can copy someone who calls you zero beat Note The displayed PSK31 Signal on the display and Tuning windows is software generated and is not a true representation of your actual transmitted signal PSK31 NET Rule of Thumb The station that is initiating a contact or calling CQ should leave the Net function off thus setting the master frequency and let the called station track the master frequency This prevents walking up or down the band if one is always a little off frequency Indications That You Are Transmitting PSK31 There are a number of ways to know that Logger32 is transmitting The 6th pane on the Statusbar indicates Transmit q The PTT light is green The display shows only the PSK31 signal at your transmit frequency 1 The Main Rx Tx Tuning window indicates the PSK31 signal Transmitted text is echoed in the Rx window oe 14063 363 Ke The above picture of the display panel indicates the station is transmitting on 1556 0 Hz Macro Control of Transmit Frequency The topic on Macros describes the QSX and QSY macros There is a full description
320. ull and correct identification of PSK31 and if this is the case then it is advisable to correct the problem now before you go on If you need to correct a Logger16 log file please read the section Using Conversion exe then continue the correction of your file here You can correct your file by loading the YOURCALL ADF file into Notepad or Wordpad and performing a search and replace function throughout the complete file to correct this problem NOTE When making changes to the AD file you must follow correct format Before the actual mode text is the field identifier and the field length for example lt MODE 3 gt PSK You can simply change PSK to PSK31 you would have to search on 3 gt PSK and replace it with 5 gt PSK31 In this example the word MODE identifies this field as the MODE field the number 3 identifies the length of the text following the gt delimiter so PSK characters If you omit changing the 3 to a 5 any ADIF compliant program will ONLY read the three characters following the delimiter in effect you would negate the text change Once you have made the necessary changes you are ready to go to the next step Step 3 Make Quite Sure that the Logger32 Logbook is Empty lt is quite possible that in your eagerness to see how Logger32 works you have entered some data into the logbook Before load your logs into Logger32 you are strongly advised to make sure that any log previously created is removed Open Explorer and select t
321. uning Window lost a display that used to have Check the View menu The waterfall display is missing or very hard to see Make sure that your Windows colors setting is set to something greater than 16 colors Start Control Panel Display Colors The tuning display shows no signals Click Settings Spectrum Sensitivity and increase the sliders to over half scale The align frequency change or QSY feature right mouse click on the target signal no longer works You may be using a Kenwood radio in which this feature only works with one of the VFOs Switch VFOs and try again suddenly have distorted audio on PSK31 or on phone q Disconnect the microphone from your radio when you operate PSK31 q Disconnect your computer sound card from the audio input to the radio when you operate phone 1 See Transmitting PSK31 for a discussion of problems you can have when transmitting with high or low tones See your doctor maybe your mouth is broken Sometimes my transmit audio is weaker than at other times Your radio has a transmit as well as a receive passband If your transmit audio begins to roll off at 2500 Hz then you will find your transmitted signal to be weaker if you transmit and receive at 2800 Hz from the carrier frequency because radio s audio at that frequency is weaker even though you may be able to copy a signal at that distance from the frequency 1 See Transmitting PSK31 for a discussion of problems you can have when tr
322. untries worked 0 are confirmed Mixed Mode Continents Mixed Hode Mixed Mode US Counties and US Counties Mined Mode with All Operators Abbeville Acadia Accomack Worked 316 151 314 179 50 Confirmed 22 36 B3 a4 20 Total of 580 US Counties worked 145 confirmed Mixed Mode jal Operators Grid Squares Wikd tim Total of 0 Grid squares worked 0 confirmed on Mited Mode Mixed Mode fai Operators More The CW menu item allows the user to use the Logger32 CW Machine The SETUP menu item switches the Menu Bar to the Setup Menu The HELP menu item allows the user to display the Logger32 Version Number Help File Index and Help File Contents Setup Menu Hew Lines VA3HU Logger32 utilizes two standard Windows Menus the Main Menu and Setup Menu The Setup Menu enables the user to access the following Logger32 Setup functions E eed Loggers Highlight Date format Time format Radio CO Rom Autolookup Frequency Antenna Selector Rotor Ds Spot Main menu The HIGHLIGHT menu item allows the user to configure the following selectable highlight options for Loggers2 Grid Highlight on mouse click Worked Highlight Confirmed Highlight QSL sent highlight QSL to be printed highlight The DATE FORMAT menu item allows the user to select the Date format to be used by Logger32 from a drop down menu list 23 1001 10 23 01 23 102001 10 23 2001 23 10 01 10 23 01 23 10 2001
323. ures for PSK and RTTY modes Many of the normal QSO exchange data can be logged directly from the Receive Text window They can be automatically transferred to the Log Entry window by clicking on the appropriate words or numbers in the received window Note In order for all these entries to work you must configure the Log Entry window to accommodate the desired entries by the data fields to the user defined Fields This is accomplished by right clicking in the Log Entry window and select setup select each field you want to display by placing a check mark by each field to be shown Setup the user fields by selecting the appropriate title and ADIF field Specific details of setting up the user fields are provided elsewhere in the Helpfile The following sample text shows the fields that can be automatically transferred to the Log Entry window by mouse clicks de W5ifp Jim Bulverde TX Grid EM09ss RST 599 10 10 10530 IOTA NA 067 SRX 219 QSL via WD5FCA As in the examples below Logger32 does not always display the full list of options It determines which selections are to be displayed based on the word number that is highlighted by the right click CALLSIGN Left click on the callsign of the station you are in contact with or desire to contact This is a fixed field and does not require user setup TE Sound Card Data Due Ea ia aet File Settings Toolbox HEN Mode Display Ausi Aux Clear de Wife Jim Bul verde TH Grid ELO9ss 16 1 cae 19630 Ic A
324. vable pointer that will either increase or decrease the sensitivity of the watertfall s brilliance The two examples below show a Waterfall sensitivity of 100 and 26 x Aux Clear Spectrum Display The Spectrum Display shows amplitude versus frequency Actual signals that you will see depend on the audio bandwidth of the receiver The display starts at O Hz and goes to 4000 Hz receive range The mouse cursor changes to a cross while in the display area To tune in a signal q Turnon AFC q Click on the PSK signal The two red passband lines will reposition over the signal If the Main Tuning window is open you will see the following displays Phase scope indication q Receive quality indication PSK signal displayed on 250 Hz display q1 IMD reading if station sending an idle signal If the squelch is open the text should start flowing across your Receive window Here are the controls that are specific to the spectrum display on the Settings drop down menu Spectrum pen width controls the line thickness 1 is narrow 2 is wide Spectrum sensitivity adjusts the spectral sensitivity from 1 to 50 This control does not change the strength of the signal coming into Logger32 just the display brightness Main Tx Rx Tunin Shared Controls for Both the Spectrum and Waterfall Displays From the figure below you can see how to select Display smoothing It is on the Settings menu The smoothing software manipulated co
325. ve PSK31 you will always need to turn AFC on because an error of only a few Hz will reduce copy to zero By the time the frequency drift contributions of your receiver the other station s transmitter and your sound card are added together it is best to use AFC to the signal Squelch Response Speed There are three squelch controls One for the Main Receive window and one for each Aux Rx channel The squelch threshold for each is user adjustable The Settings Squelch Response slow or fast is used for the Main Receive window and the Aux Rx channels It can only have one setting for all receive windows Adjust the squelch using the yellow bar in the Tuning window below or above the indicator line in the vertical yellow bar at the right side of the display For received text to be displayed in or Aux window the yellow bar must be above the squelch line M Sound Card Data File Settings toolBax vi Squelch slow Sqauelch Fast Received Signal Quality The squelch meter on the right hand side of the Tuning window is actually a measure of signal quality it has nothing to do with Signal quality describes how readable is the signal The scale is arbitrarily O to 100 where 0 means unreadable and 100 means perfectly readable The squelch value displayed is inversely proportional to the phase jitter on the phase scope A good quality signal see note will have very little jitter and the phase scope will be almost a steady v
326. ve textile Exit The key item is the transmit receive pane in the middle of the Statusbar Click here to perform Tx Rx switching If you go to Loggers2 will first transmit all the characters in its transmit buffer before going to receive There are also duplicates of the toolbar items Net on off AFC on off Reset and Abort Net On Off The Net function uses Logger32 s ability to control the audio frequency of output tones to make sure that you transmit AFSK tones the same frequency as your received tones Click the Net button to set Net on and transmit zero beat with receive This is the way to call someone to establish a QSO Leave Net on When you turn Net off in RT TY mode the MMTTY engine sets the transmit mark and shift at the HAM default which is set on the MMTTY Setup Demodulator Tab MMTTY comes with these values at mark 2125 Hz shift 170 Hz When you call CQ you should turn Net off but you can leave AFC on This means that your transmit frequency will not move to track the drift of the other station and the two of you in QSO will remain at your original transmit frequency assuming that you have a stable transmitter that does not drift If you operate split frequency from your transceiver perhaps to chase a DXpedition you should set Net off because you will your transmit frequency with your second VFO You probably do not want your transmit frequency wandering around due to movement of your receive passband Remember
327. w Logbook Page window Previous QSOs window Logbook Page Window QSOs window Telnet window Sound Card Data window Tracking window E e e eem Worked Confirmed window Notes Window Toolbar Group Three E Es bl 1 The third group of four buttons allows the user to Snap Windows to Size Do Country Prefix Database Maintenance il Access the Grid Square Calculator zl Setup contest serial numbers E Toolbar Group Four 80 The fourth group of buttons allow the user to perform WWW QRZ COM callsign lookup a CDROM callsign lookup D GO List Callsign lookup Toolbar Group Five The fifth group of buttons enables the user to create An eQSL File imi A generic QSL file in one of three formats A LOTW File Toolbar Group Six lS wel The sixth group of buttons allows the user to mark QSOs for export to one or more of the QSL files described above li Flag for an eQSL file al J Flag for a generic QSL file Flag for an LOTW file Status Bars Hew Lines VA3HU Logger32 provides two user selectable Upper and Lower Status Bars The display of these status bars is controlled through the Main Menu View menu item View Awards CW Setup Show D Spots Show Logbook Ertry Show Logbook Page Show Previous WS ils Show Cluster Winday Show Sound Card Data Show Tracking Window YY oredLontinned Grid appearance i Form background color Show Toolbar w Sh
328. w to adjust the signal to reduce harmonics and how to build hardware to reduce harmonics There is trick to reduce harmonic generation but it requires that we tailor our operating procedures We can generate high tones say 1600 Hz rather than low tones In this way the second harmonic we may generate will be at 3200 Hz which is attenuated by filtering already in the transmitter Commercial ham transceivers roll off their audio by 3000 Hz sometimes even lower Even if there is distortion that creates a harmonic tone it will be attenuated by the filtering in the transmitter as long as the harmonic is greater than 3000 Hz The higher we generate our tones the more attenuation of the harmonics will take place Logger82 has a special align function that can help to generate high tones We point and click on a signal whether high or low in the receive range but if the radio is computer controlled we can invoke the align function to retune to put the operating higher in the transmit receive range See align in the Using Logger32 topic High Tones Low Tones US vs EU Standards The US and Japan standard for RTTY tones is called high tones Mark is 2125 Hz and space is 2295 Hz and shift is 170 Hz High tones is the original default for the HAM button in both MMTTY and in the MMTTY module for Logger82 and it reduces harmonics as described above The European standard is called low tones where mark is 1275 Hz and space is 1445 Hz If choose
329. ware Audio Interface Data Out 5 pin 160de DIN Pin Description 1 Data In 2 Ground Line Out 4 Data Out B00 Ohm 1 1 Computer Sound Card Audio Transformers CAT CW and PTT Interface The CAT CW and PTT functions can be combined into one single interface that will only use one Serial port If you use this configuration be sure and follow the ground rules for the Shared port setup to make sure there is no conflict FT 920 Radio Control Interface CAT F Key Description DBS Pin OBS Pin RxD 3 2 TxD 2 J Gnd f 5 eee 1 4 Stereo Plug OTR 20 hl RTS 4 E E PTT 14001 2NS306 or AN Uy Radio Settings for Sound Card Operation The AFSK FSK slide switch on the back of the radio should be in the AFSK position Select the desired SSB mode USB or and then press the DATA button This will automatically disconnect the microphone and make the DATA connection active Follow normal procedures for setting up your power levels and sound card levels See the Sound Card setup section for details Radio Settings for CW and PTT Operation If you use the KEY connection on the back of the radio for CW and PTT you must set two switches for operation The PDL KEY switch on the rear of the radio should be set to KEY for PTT functions This setting will make the PTT line active all modes The KEYER switch on the front panel must be ON for CW operation KAM TNC Mike Mace VK3SU This section provides information on setti
330. wer bits is good because it speeds up transmission and reduces the chance of errors but there is a complication Five data bits can only represent 32 different characters Since there are 26 letters in the English alphabet plus ten numbers plus some punctuation 32 different characters is not enough even if you only use capital letters which Baudot does Mr Baudot could have chosen to use six data bits or even more but he found a better solution He reasoned that most of what would be sent would be letters rather than numbers or punctuation so he assigned all the letters to the basic 32 He then had six characters left over and he did a very clever thing with two of them He made one of them a FIGURES SHIFT and another a LETTERS SHIFT The way it works is this when sending one of the basic 32 characters nothing special happens But when a number or punctuation is to be sent a FIGURES SHIFT character is sent first it s a non printing character you won t see it on screen Whatever follows will still be one of the basic 32 characters but the receiver will interpret it differently For example the letter Q uses the same five data bits as the number 1 but when the receiver gets a FIGURES SHIFT first it prints the next as a 1 nota Q This continues until a LETTERS SHIFT character is received at which time the receiver goes back to normal printing All of this shifting is done by the system there is no key marked LETTERS SHIFT or FIGURES SHIFT
331. will be painted a little earlier or a little later each sweep resulting in slanted lines Time Standard Calibration Procedure 1 2 8 9 Click Setup Misc Tab Turn off the AGC with the button at the bottom button should be up Tune your radio to the 1 second tick standard Set the radio display to the carrier frequency Wait for about three minutes If you are using 11025 Hz calibration you should see two lines of marks vertical or corresponding to the 1 second tick sound bursts transmitted by the time standard broadcast station You will see only line with 8000 Hz or 6000 Hz Right click to move the vertical green line to the tick line This allows you to compare the tick line to vertical Left click a low tick burst mark bottom one if possible and move the cursor to the top of the line You will see a yellow on the display Overlay the yellow line with the tick mark line and left click a high burst mark top one if possible This will automatically put the correct clock frequency in the adjust window Watch for a few minutes to make sure that the new tick line is vertical 10 Click OK to leave this display 11 Click OK to leave the setup display and to memorize the new value 12 Restart Logger32 for the new clock value to take effect Here is the calibration display showing a sound card clock that is pretty close to its intended value of 11025 Hz Adust Sampling Frequency Using WwY Tick
332. with CW procedures you ll be right at home with RT TY RTTYers use most of the Q signals as well as DE K and all the rest And if you accidentally find yourself upside down don t get embarrassed we ve all done it RTTYers are some the nicest people you ll ever meet and things like jamming and profanity are almost unheard of RTTY Forever In spite of the newer digital modes like PSK Pactor G Tor and others RT TY remains the favorite of contesters and DXers alike RTTY does not use error correction handshaking or synchronizing all of which slow things down When quick back and forth exchanges are important RT TY is the mode of choice Roundtable discussions and nets which would be difficult or slow with modes are a natural for RTTY and RTTY is likely to be around for a long time to come So there you have most of what you need to know to become a proficient RT TY operator Welcome to RTTY Bill W7TI Receiving RTTY Andy O Brien KB2EOQ This topic will help you to receive RTTY signals when using Logger82 It is NOT a technical guide For detailed information see Inner Link RTTY Basics Sound Card Data WIndow RTTY Basics elsewhere in this document Getting Your Radio Ready To receive RTTY signals one first has to find RTTY signals on the air RI TY signals are not as prevalent as PSK31 signals these days but you should be able to find them at 7070 7085 kHz 14080 14095 kHz 21080 to 21095 kHz and 28080 28110 kHz bes
333. work the DSP ignores the bars outside the main Rx passband lines Transmitting PSK31 Randy Tipton WA5UFH Transmitting PSK31 signals involves several software options Every operator is personally responsible for the quality of signal he she emits For information on adjusting your transmitter and sound card see Link to topic Interfacing the Radio to a PC Sound Card Interfacing the Radio to a PC Sound Card This discussion covers the software options available to the Logger32 user for transmitting PSK31 signals and makes suggestions on how to use them The best way to get familiar with the transmitting is to read all the topics and then with the radio turned off start playing with the options to become familiar with their operation Selecting an Operating Mode The modes of operation are found in the Main Menu for Mode Modes not yet available in your version will be gray in color The mode that is selected will have a check mark indicating it is selected The leftmost pane of the statusbar also indicates mode can be clicked to step through the modes You can also use the following macro commands to change mode Srtty q rtty i q bpsk T Sqpsk T qpsk i Mode Display Aux1 AL PEER APEK GFSK inverted RTTY 170Hz shitt Set Raley Eroties ft Tune The Tune Position In Tune mode Logger382 will output a steady carrier when you transmit To select Tune first select Mode on the Main Menu and sel
334. would display 4 as the caption of the button Testing the Buttons lt is strongly recommended that you test each button after it has been programmed With the radio turned off and with either the sound Card Data Window or CW Machine open click on the button to execute the macro and observe its operation in the transmit and receive windows If the button has commands to switch the radio to receive or transmit observe that those operate properly watching the Tx Rx indication in the appropriate window If there is a problem with a button s operation you can edit it by right clicking on the button and making whatever changes are necessary Also execute the button by pressing the assigned Hot Key to ensure that the Hot Key is correctly programmed It is better to find out about problems before sending the contents of the macro live QSO MACRO Commands Many of these commands require a radio controlled by Logger32 via a serial port for their effective operation These commands colored Red afc PSK RTTY Toggles the AFC function on and off align PSK RTTY Re tunes the radio so the captured signal appears at the default RX frequency ascii n nnn PSK Inserts the ASCII code n nnn of a character than cannot be entered from a keyboard into the output text string if the first digit is zero it is optional see the section on More Difficult Macros band CW PSK RTTY Inserts the current band displayed in the Logbook Entry Window into
335. ws as they are processor dependant The program requires approximately 20 Mb of disk space Install Procedures Hal Miller KB1ZQ Download the program from one of the Logger382 distribution sites and run Setup exe Setup will create all the necessary folders install all files in the correct spot User Editable Databases Geoff Anderson G3NPA The Country Databases In order to provide maximum versatility and to maximize the capability of Logger32 to correctly identify the correct Country and from a callsign the program maintains three separate but linked databases e The Country database contains information about o the designated ARRL Prefix this must be unique o the Country Name o the Latitude and Longitude of the approximate center of the Country o the CQ Zone and o a flag to determine if the Country is current or has been deleted from the ARRL Countries list This information is contained in the four files COUNTRY ISD ISF ISL and ISM These files must ALWAYS be as a set of four e The Alias database contains information about alternative prefixes for the Country For example in the case of the USA the Prefix assigned is W Valid alternative prefixes include A K and 4U1WB is included as an Alias since that callsign used by the World Bank HQ counts for DXCC as the USA Each Alias must be unique Hidden within the Alias files are the ADIF Country numbers This information is contained in the four files ALIAS
336. x window buffer indicator color Waterfall colors Waterfall sensitivity Sound card input level Sound card output level RT TY XY Scope color CPU Power Saver mode View Show Tuning window Show Tuning display Show Statusbar Show RTTY toolbar Show Radio debug window Frequency markers 1050 Hz 1100 Hz 1150 Hz 1200 Hz Frequency display Display frequency from radio Display audio frequency Fixed Radio on 14070 00 USB Fixed Radio on 14070 00 LSB Fixed Radio on 14071 00 USB Fixed Radio on 14071 00 LSB Macro buttons 0 Macro buttons 12 Macro buttons 24 Macro buttons 36 Macro buttons Rx window options Show control codes Show RTTY commands Echo transmitted text Mode BPSK QPSK QPSK inverted RTTY 170Hz shift Setup RTTY Profiles Load RTTY profile from file Save RTTY profile to file Assign RTTY Menu item Delete RTTY Menu item CW Tune Display Spectrum Waterfall Aux 1 Aux 2 Clear Clear Rx Clear TX Clear both The Aux 1 and Aux 2 Menu Bars provide access to the following functionality File Close ToolBox Rx window font settings Rx window mouseover highlight RX window background settings View Show Tuning window Mode BPSK QPSK QPSK inverted RTTY CW Clear The Status Bar An Information Control Mechanism Scoit E Thile K4SET The Statusbar of the Sound Card Data Window is located at the bottom of the window It is the command and control center of window providing access to information and commands that you will u
337. xample MA 001 ITUZ M ITU Zone Yes based on info in your Country Go E a E i ied E a m data AAAA A A A das database IEE C http dwew jaror jp Englishit Librari 4 A jec jegicc list tet JOG htp dew parlor jp English Librarna 4 SB jec jogijcg list tst MODE T SSB CW RTTY TORSAMTOR PET AM fres based on your bandplan Fld SSTY ATY PACSPACTOR CLO CLOVER MAME tL Mame ofthe operator of the other station fres Ifyou are using a callbook CD and have it setto automatically import data MOTES aL a m D 0 Yes once set Must be changed if Op changes Yes based on info in your Country database Personal message to appear on ASL card CISL Revd Date CISL Sent Date T Y Yes M wMo F 2Reguested l lqnore or invalid T Y Yes M Mo R Reguested l lgnore or invalid QSL Manager Bureau etc Yes Ifvou are using a callbook CD and Long text for digital copy third party traffic En 7 jen T i T GSLMsG 7 have it setto automatically import data a i G f of O D 41 L Ei wal al oA 1 pes E pee a 2 J ea es 5 z l 5 i sa al a n _ MT Mm Lo RRA ee Pa Wee Maes ss ede a oe eb ede oe ae el Worked Confirmed Window Geoff Anderson G3NPA The Worked Confirmed window is designed to show a summary of the band mode combinations worked for a specific prefix Additionally it will show specific summary information for the callsign entered in the Log input window i
338. xperiment to achieve his her own desired results Logger32 has two macros for the direct control of transceivers using a remote interface one for those rigs which require a string command and the other for hex commands The format of the macro is command for strings and hexcommanad for hex values Both macros allow for multiple commands For example filter selection and slope tuning can all be achieved using one For Kenwood rigs the command string version is used In the case of the Kenwood rigs the string to set various functions is composed of the following sequence two alphabetical characters various parameters and anda terminator to indicate the end of the command For example This command sets VFO A to 7 000 mHz FA 00007000000 where FA is the command the numbers are the parameter and the semicolon is the terminator The most useful commands for rig control in connection with Logger32 are filter selection and slope tuning or filter bandwidth settings Naturally there are many combinations of the above so the reader is left to his her own but some of the codes required to perform these functions are included here Applying Macro Control to Select a Filter and Initialize Slope Tuning Codes for Filter Selection for the TS 850 The Kenwood TS 850 command for this function is FLaaabbb where FL is the filter command aaa and bbb are the codes required for the 8 83 kHz and 455 kHz filters respectiv
339. xt MACRO A set of commands that can be used along with plain text to create limited routines or shortcuts to be assigned to the programmable buttons of the Soundcard Data Window and CW Machine MMTTY An RT TY encoding decoding program developed by JESHHT whose main engine is used by Zakanaka to operate RI TY Parallel Port The standard O ports of PC s that are normally used to connect to a local printer normally identified as LPT1 and LPT2 The standard hardware connector on the PC used for the Parallel Port is a female DB 25 Programmable Buttons There are 36 buttons available in the Soundcard Data Window and the CW Machine that are user prorammable using Logger32 MACRO commands plain text Hot Keys and color These buttons are available in three sets of 12 RS 232 The EIA 232 D commonly referred to as RS 232 standard defines a system used to send data over relatively long distances It is commonly used to send data anywhere from a few feet to 50 feet or more The standard specifies the connection and signal lines Serial Port The standard O ports of PC s that are normally used to connect to a serial device modem TNC or radio normally identified as COM1 to COM4 The standard hardware connectors on the PC used for the Serial Ports are male DB 9 or 25 connectors Terminator The terminator is the boundary between day and night Its position changes during the day it makes a complete circuit around the Ear
340. xt window for hot key lt F5 gt Your exact frequency is radioandtone Here s how figure that out My receiver is on radiofreq am receiving your signal rxtonefrea Therefore your actual signal is radiofreq S upperorlower rxtonefrea radioandtone the Button caption is set to FREQ IN and the Back color is set to blue Here is that macro on a button in Zakanaka Pressing the F5 key or clicking on the button titled FREQ IN will now insert the following text into the Tx Window for If you wanted to send the same message using RTTY you need only change rxtonefreq to rttymarkfrequency in the macro A really long macro that takes the place of all brain activity on the part of the ham operator Bob Furzer K4CY the author of Logger32 came up with this macro that you can assign to a button If you ever work him and you see this he has probably fallen asleep But it sure is neat to have all this power Good to hear you again see you are in my log numqsos times Just goes to prove that a am a DX hog and b you can work DX with a mouse Our last QSO was on lastqsodate at lastaqsotime note it was also here on lastqsoband lastqasomode An example of several macro commands that refer to data in Logger Here is an example of a single macro that makes use of the following commands that all refer to data in the current Logbook numaqsos lastqsodate lastqsotime lastqsoband lastqsomode command and hexco
341. y 8 Data Bits and 2 stop bits at a fixed baudrate of 4800 Setting up Logger32 to control FT is very simple From the Main Menu select the Setup menu From the Setup Menu select the Radio Radio Port configuration menu item to display the RigControl Setup dialog box E RieControl setup Com port Com 2 Databits Baudrate 4300 StopEits 2 Radio assu FT 100 Patty None Data file Set OTA high Folling interval rz 000 SetATS high Icom address Hex 00 Show Radio Debug Window From the drop down lists select the following Com Port the serial port to be used on the computer Baudrate 4800 Radio Yaesu FT 100 Databits 8 StopBits 2 Parity None and Accept all other defaults Click OK NOTE The default value of 1000 ms 1 second for the Polling Speed should be used as a starting point for your configuration Reducing the value of the Polling Speed increasing the rate of radio polling will provide a faster and smoother display of all frequency and mode changes Yaesu FT 920 Jim Hargrave W5IFP General The FT 920 has a built in RS 232 Level converter for the CAT radio control system However the user needs an interface to the RS 232 levels for PTT and CW data signals The Audio for the Sound card operation can be connected direct via the rear connector however it is recommended that be accomplished using a 1 1 isolation transformer and some
342. y Bob Each topic has the name of the original author s at the upper left but all team members contributed over course of development Copyrights and License Bob Furzer K4CY Zakanaka Inc a Delaware corporation holds the copyright to the Logger32 software and its help files 2002 Robert C Furzer All rights reserved Authorization to use this software is limited to radio amateurs who agree to strictly comply with the following operating practices e Always use your full callsign when calling another station e Never respond to calling operators who do not use full callsigns e Donot spell your name or QTH unless specifically asked to do so e Do not call the operator of the station you are in contact with Sir Your Highness Doctor Monk or any other title real imaginary e Donot end your transmissions with QSL Roger Over or Over Over e Do not begin your transmissions with QSL Roger or Roger Roger e Do not operate or condone those that do on DX list or DX net operations e Know the callsign of the station you are calling before you call Do not operate on SSB with wider than 2 8KHz bandwidth filters or condone those that do Do not use external devices to unnecessarily distort the audio took the time and effort to write the software Many others have taken the time and effort to debug the software and write the documentation At the very least you can make the eff
343. y Markers and left click on one of the color squares and you will be able to change the color for that marker One application of the frequency markers might be to mark your default Rx frequency You could choose the red marker to correspond with the main passband indicator and set your default Rx frequency as the audio frequency for this marker If you want a marker to go away go to View Frequency Markers click it again and the check mark will disappear and the marker will no longer be on the frequency display Note For more help on adjusting display properties and manipulating Windows applications consult your Windows Manual Slash zero Option You can have Logger32 print a slash zero instead of a plain zero Go to Settings and select Use slash zero for zero Mouseover There are a number of capture operations that can be performed on mouseover passing the mouse cursor over the text but you can disable this option if it does not work properly on your computer Go to Settings Receive window mouseover and click it to uncheck the option When you do this received text will no longer change color on mouseover and the capture operations will work Low Level I O Drivers Port95nt EXE Geoff Anderson G3NPA ALL USERS PLEASE TAKE CAREFUL NOTE Some parts of Logger32 will not work unless you carry out the instruction given below Logger32 requires the file DLPortlO dll to be on your computer before some of the functions available will work
344. you purchased the computer and the gremlins who are on the payroll at Microsoft may have sneaked something onto the computer as part of Windows and other programs you run may have installed components that are running when you do not realize it The following recommendations are ways to reduce CPU usage A few of these items apply to general operation and work for PSK31 and RT TY modes However most of these items are specific to RT TY operation where CPU usage seems to be higher We shall begin with the general items CPU Power Saver Mode If you have problems there is a simple first step The Sound Card Data window has a CPU Power Saver Mode in which it skips every other screen update This reduces the load on the computer and display system by halving the number of display processes that run in a given amount of time To implement this solution simply Click Toolbox CPU Power saver mode This procedure works for both PSK31 and RTTY CPU Power Saver and Logger32 ini If your setup is so near the edge of operation that you cannot get RT TY working you can implement Power Saver mode before Loggers2 starts Open Logger32 ini ina TEXT processor e g Notepad exe not MSWord look for the first group of statements under the heading Settings At the bottom of this group just before a blank line and then the words Main Tuning Window is a statement like EnergySaver Off Change this to EnergySaver On If the statement is not there
345. z T eae i ne ras Net On _ AFC On The picture below of the display indicates the following The user has left clicked on the PSK signal in the display and the main red passband marker is now centered over that signal The mode is BPSK The net feature is turned on Transmit frequency Receive frequency q The radio is in receive mode ao i 14069 a B aro ole PRecavey Ne On AFC On Net Function lt is possible to work split frequency by using different audio tones for transmit and receive Net is turned off and the transmit frequency is set separately For information on this process see Operating Split Frequency Net On forces Logger32 to transmit on the current receive frequency selected in the Display and shown on the Statusbar pane The advantage of having Net turned on is it reduces the bandwidth used by the two stations because stay on one If neither station uses the Net function it is like operating split frequency which uses more spectrum If both stations use Net it still possible for both stations to drift If this happens one station should change his her Net status if off turn it on if on turn it In this way one station will track the other station s frequency The Net function has two positions either off or on Click on the 6th pane on the Statusbar to toggle between these positions pane will change from Net On to Net Off If you turn Net off you will transmit at the last used Tx audio freq

Welcome History

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents